HomeMy WebLinkAbout2018-12-11; City Council; Resolution 2018-211RESOLUTION NO. 2018-211
A RESOLUTION OF THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF CARLSBAD,
CALIFORNIA, APPROVING THE PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE
FARADAY CENTER HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING AND
ROOF REFURBISHMENT, PROJECT NO. 4720, AND AUTHORIZING THE CITY
CLERK TO ADVERTISE FOR BID SOLICITATION.
EXHIBIT 1
WHEREAS, the City Council of the City of Carlsbad, California has determined that it is desirable
and in the best financial interest of the city to maintain city building conditions and infrastructure; and
WHEREAS, the plans and specifications for the Faraday Center HVAC and Roof Refurbishment,
Project No. 4720 (Project) are on file in the city clerk's office; and
WHEREAS, the Project is financed by the Infrastructure Replacement Fund (IRF) and as defined
in Carlsbad Municipal Code (CMC) Section 1.24 the IRF consists of "city funds"; and
WHEREAS, Section 1.24.030 of CMC Section 1.24 states that "The city shall make no real
property acquisition and/or no improvement to real property the cost of which exceeds one million
dollars in city funds, unless the proposed acquisition and/or improvement project and the cost in city
funds is first placed upon the ballot and approved by a majority of the voters voting thereon at an
election. A project may not be separated into parts or phases so as to avoid the effects ofthis chapter.";
and
WHEREAS, on July 19, 2005, the City Council adopted guidelines to implement CMC Section 1.24
which states that "Section 1.24.020(3) shall be interpreted in the following manner: 'Improvement to
Real Property' shall not include replacement, repair, maintenance, routine refurbishment or upgrades
of existing facilities as they are considered to be routine ongoing capital expenditures necessary to
carry out the normal and routine business of the City. The City Council may make findings on a case by
case basis on whether the above exceptions are applicable to a proposed project."; and
WHEREAS, the scope of work included in the Project is the replacement, repair, maintenance,
and routine refurbishment of various building systems at the Faraday Center as necessary to carry out
the normal and routine of the business of the city; and
WHEREAS, the project is exempt from the California Environmental Quality Act (CEQA) per
CEQA Guidelines Section 15301(d); and
WHEREAS, sufficient funds are available for completion of the project.
December 11, 2018 Item #9 Page 4 of 6
EXHIBIT 1
NOW, THEREFORE, BE IT RESOLVED by the City Council of the City of Carlsbad, California, as
follows:
1. That the above recitations are true and correct.
2. That the plans and specifications for the Faraday Center HVAC and Roof Refurbishment,
Project No. 4720, on file in the city clerk's office, are hereby approved.
3. That the City Council finds that the use of city funds in the Infrastructure Replacement
Fund in excess of one million dollars for the Project is consistent with the CMC Section
1.24, in that carpeting, lighting, painting, heating, ventilating and air conditioning, and
roof refurbishment are considered routine ongoing capital expenditures and within the
scope of replacement, repair, maintenance, and routine refurbishment work and is not
considered an "Improvement to Real Property."
4. That the city clerk of the City of Carlsbad is hereby authorized and directed to publish,
in accordance with state law, and CMC Section 3.28.080(G), a Notice to Contractors
Inviting Requests for Bids for the Faraday Center HVAC and Roof Refurbishment, Project
No. 4720, in accordance with the plans and specifications referred to herein.
PASSED, APPROVED AND ADOPTED at a Regular Meeting of the City Council of the City of
Carlsbad on the 11th day of December, 2018, by the following vote, to wit:
AYES:
NOES:
ABSENT:
M. Hall, K. Blackburn, M. Schumacher, C. Schumacher, M. Packard.
None.
None.
(SEAL)
December 11, 2018 Item #9 Page 5 of 6
Fa r a d a y Ce n t e r Ro o f a n d H V AC Re f u r b i s h m e n t
Ci t y o f Ca r l s b a d
Te c h n i c a l Sp e c i f i c a t i o n s
A u g u s t Ϯ4, 2 01 8
Pacific Architecture and Engineering, Inc.
2447 Pacific Coast Highway, Suite 218, Hermosa Beach, CA 90254
310-698-8711
Exhibit 3
4720 TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 1
Faraday Center Roof and HVAC
Refurbishment
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS
02 4100 DEMOLITION
DIVISION 05 - METALS
05 5213 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES
06 0573 WOOD TREATMENT
06 1000 ROUGH CARPENTRY
06 1500 WOOD DECKING
DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07 5110 REHABILITIATION OF BUILT UP ROOFING
07 6000 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL
07 6200 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
07 7200 ROOF ACCESSORIES
07 8400 FIRESTOPPING
07 9200 JOINT SEALANTS
DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS
08 6200 UNIT SKYLIGHTS
DIVISION 09 - FINISHES
09 5100
09 9000
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
PAINTING AND COATING
DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING, AND
AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC)
23 0500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
23 0513 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC
23 0529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND
EQUIPMENT
23 0548 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND
EQUIPMENT
23 0553 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
23 0593 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
23 0700 HVAC INSULATION
23 2300 REFRIGERATION PIPING
23 3113 HVAC DUCTWORK - METAL DUCTS
23 3300 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
23 3713 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES
23 8119 PACKAGED ROOFTOP GAS ELECTRIC UNIT
23 8126 SPLIT-SYSTEM HEAT PUMPS
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL 26 0500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 0501 MINOR ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION 26 0519 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 0526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0533 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0548 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 2816 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS APPENDIX A – BASIS OF DESIGN PRODUCT DATA TREMCO, ALPHAGUARD BIO BASE COAT PRODUCT DATA TREMCO, ALPHAGUARD BIO TOP COAT PRODUCT DATA TREMCO, ALPHAGUARD BIO & MT FLUID APPLIED ROOFING SYSTEM, INSTALLATION GUIDE 2018 UL FIRE RATING FOR TREMCO, ALPHAGUARD BIO BASE COAT AND TOP COAT
4720 TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 2 Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and
HVAC Refurbishment
02 4100 - 1 DEMOLITION
SECTION 02 4100
DEMOLITION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Selective demolition of built site elements.
B. Selective demolition of building elements for alteration purposes.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. 29 CFR 1926 - U.S. Occupational Safety and Health Standards; current edition.
B. NFPA 241 - Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alteration, and Demolition Operations;
2013.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Site Plan: Showing:
1. Areas for temporary construction and field offices.
C. Demolition Plan: Submit demolition plan as specified by OSHA and local authorities.
1. Indicate extent of demolition, removal sequence, bracing and shoring, and location and
construction of barricades and fences.
2. Identify demolition firm and submit qualifications.
3. Include a summary of safety procedures.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Demolition Firm Qualifications: Company specializing in the type of work required.
1. Minimum of 5 years of documented experience.
PART 3 EXECUTION
2.01 SCOPE
A. Construction to be phased per Contractor's recommendations, building to be fully occupied and
functional, coordinate demo and renovation phasing with City Project Manager. Occupants must
be moved to other areas of building to remain fully operational.
B. Occupants may be moved to conference rooms and other offices. Contractor to present phasing
plan to City Project Manager.
C. Contents of cubicles may be relocated or covered. Obtain from City Project Manager method to
protect or relocate cubicles and contents of cubicles if such relocation is necessary for the work.
D. The Contractor is responsible for returning cubicles and contents of cubicles back to existing
condition.
E. Items to be protected or relocated include computers and other equipment. Coordinate with
City/Building IT manager if disconnection and reconnection is necessary.
F. All work will be done between Friday-Sunday 7 a.m. to 5 p.m. City Project Manager shall
approve all sequence of work.
2.02 GENERAL PROCEDURES AND PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Comply with applicable codes and regulations for demolition operations and safety of adjacent
structures and the public.
1. Obtain required permits.
2. Comply with applicable requirements of NFPA 241.
3. Take precautions to prevent catastrophic or uncontrolled collapse of structures to be
removed; do not allow worker or public access within range of potential collapse of
unstable structures.
4. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary barriers and security devices.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and
HVAC Refurbishment
02 4100 - 2 DEMOLITION
5. Conduct operations to minimize effects on and interference with adjacent structures and
occupants.
6. Do not close or obstruct roadways or sidewalks without permit.
7. Conduct operations to minimize obstruction of public and private entrances and exits; do
not obstruct required exits at any time; protect persons using entrances and exits from
removal operations.
8. Obtain written permission from owners of adjacent properties when demolition equipment
will traverse, infringe upon or limit access to their property.
B. Do not begin removal until receipt of notification to proceed from City.
C. Protect existing structures and other elements that are not to be removed.
1. Provide bracing and shoring.
2. Prevent movement or settlement of adjacent structures.
3. Stop work immediately if adjacent structures appear to be in danger.
4. Protect City Equipment, documents, and furniture from dust and damage.Obtain from City
Project Manager approval for the method for which this will be achieved such as drop
cloths or protective paper or film prior to commencement of work.
D. If hazardous materials are discovered during removal operations, stop work and notify Architect
and City; hazardous materials include regulated asbestos containing materials, lead, PCB's, and
mercury.
2.03 EXISTING UTILITIES
A. Coordinate work with utility companies; notify before starting work and comply with their
requirements; obtain required permits.
B. Protect existing utilities to remain from damage.
C. Do not disrupt public utilities without permit from authority having jurisdiction.
D. Do not close, shut off, or disrupt existing life safety systems that are in use without at least 7
days prior written notification to City.
E. Do not close, shut off, or disrupt existing utility branches or take-offs that are in use without at
least 3 days prior written notification to City.
F. Locate and mark utilities to remain; mark using highly visible tags or flags, with identification of
utility type; protect from damage due to subsequent construction, using substantial barricades if
necessary.
G. Remove exposed piping, valves, meters, equipment, supports, and foundations of disconnected
and abandoned utilities.
2.04 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION FOR ALTERATIONS
A. Drawings showing existing construction and utilities are based on casual field observation and
existing record documents only.
1. Verify that construction and utility arrangements are as indicated.
2. Report discrepancies to Architect before disturbing existing installation.
3. Beginning of demolition work constitutes acceptance of existing conditions that would be
apparent upon examination prior to starting demolition.
B. Separate areas in which demolition is being conducted from other areas that are still occupied.
1. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary dustproof partitions of construction areas .
C. Remove existing work as indicated and as required to accomplish new work.
1. Remove items indicated on drawings.
D. Services (Including but not limited to HVAC, Plumbing, Fire Protection, Electrical,
Telecommunications, and any other systems):
1. Maintain existing active systems that are to remain in operation; maintain access to
equipment and operational components.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and
HVAC Refurbishment
02 4100 - 3 DEMOLITION
2. Where existing active systems serve occupied facilities but are to be replaced with new
services, maintain existing systems in service until new systems are complete and ready
for service.
3. Verify that abandoned services serve only abandoned facilities before removal.
4. Remove abandoned pipe, ducts, conduits, and equipment, including those above
accessible ceilings; remove back to source of supply where possible, otherwise cap stub
and tag with identification.
E. Protect existing work to remain.
1. Prevent movement of structure; provide shoring and bracing if necessary.
2. Protect all equipment to be reinstalled from damage. If damage occurs, replace with new.
3. Perform cutting to accomplish removals neatly and as specified for cutting new work.
4. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during removal work.
5. Patch as specified for patching new work.
2.05 DEBRIS AND WASTE REMOVAL
A. Remove debris, junk, and trash from site.
B. Leave site in clean condition, ready for subsequent work.
C. Clean up spillage and wind-blown debris from public and private lands.
END OF SECTION
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and
HVAC Refurbishment
05 5213 - 1 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
SECTION 05 5213
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Balcony railings and guardrails.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. AAMA 611 - Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum; 2014 (2015 Errata).
B. AAMA 2603 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for
Pigmented Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels (with Coil Coating Appendix);
2017a.
C. ASTM B241/B241M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Seamless Pipe
and Seamless Extruded Tube; 2016.
D. ASTM B429/B429M - Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Structural Pipe and
Tube; 2010e1.
E. ASTM B483/B483M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Drawn Tubes
for General Purpose Applications; 2013, with Editorial Revision (2014).
F. ASTM E935 - Standard Test Methods for Performance of Permanent Metal Railing Systems
and Rails for Buildings; 2013, with Editorial Revision.
G. ASTM E985 - Standard Specification for Permanent Metal Railing Systems and Rails for
Buildings; 2000 (Reapproved 2006).
H. OSHA
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, anchorage, size and type of
fasteners, and accessories.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Handrails and Railings (Roof Hatch guardrail and safety pole, and skylight guardrail) rails must
not anchor or penetrate roof membrane, must attach to base of skylight or roofhatch. Provide
safety pole:
1. Tremco/Kee Hatch with gate or approved equal for roof hatch.
2. Leading Edge Skylight Guardrail System. or approved equal for guardrail.
https://leadingedgesafety.net/products/skylight-guardrail. Round skylight will require
custom guardrail system.
3. Bilco Bilguard 2.0 or equal. Provide Ladder UP safety pole or
equal.https://www.bilco.com/category237/Safety_&_Security_Products
4. All substitutions must be approved by City Project Manager.
2.02 RAILINGS - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Design, fabricate, and test railing assemblies in accordance with the most stringent
requirements of ASTM E985 and applicable local code.
B. Distributed Loads: Design railing assembly, wall rails, and attachments to resist distributed
force of 50 pounds per linear foot (730 N/m) applied to the top of the assembly and in any
direction, without damage or permanent set. Test in accordance with ASTM E935.
C. Concentrated Loads: Design railing assembly, wall rails, and attachments to resist a
concentrated force of 200 pounds (890 N) applied at any point on the top of the assembly and in
any direction, without damage or permanent set. Test in accordance with ASTM E935.
D. Allow for expansion and contraction of members and building movement without damage to
connections or members.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and
HVAC Refurbishment
05 5213 - 2 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
E. Dimensions: See drawings for configurations and heights.
F. Provide anchors and other components as required to attach to structure, made of same
materials as railing components unless otherwise indicated; where exposed fasteners are
unavoidable provide flush countersunk fasteners.
G. Provide mechanical and welding fittings where indicated to join lengths, seal open ends, and
conceal exposed mounting bolts and nuts, including but not limited to elbows, T-shapes, splice
connectors, flanges, escutcheons, and wall brackets.
2.03 ALUMINUM MATERIALS
A. Aluminum Tube: Minimum wall thickness of 0.127 inch (3.2 mm); ASTM B429/B429M, ASTM
B241/B241M, or ASTM B483/B483M. Aluminum Alloy: T6061.
B. Welding Fittings: No exposed fasteners; cast aluminum.
C. Straight Splice Connectors: Concealed spigot; cast aluminum.
D. Exposed Fasteners: Flush countersunk screws or bolts; consistent with design of railing.
2.04 FABRICATION
A. Accurately form components to suit specific project conditions and for proper connection to
building structure.
B. Fit and shop assemble components in largest practical sizes for delivery to site.
C. Fabricate components with joints tightly fitted and secured. Provide spigots and sleeves to
accommodate site assembly and installation.
D. Welded Joints:
1. Exterior Components: Continuously seal joined pieces by intermittent welds and plastic
filler. Drill condensate drainage holes at bottom of members at locations that will not
encourage water intrusion.
2. Interior Components: Continuously seal joined pieces by intermittent welds and plastic
filler.
3. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints
butt tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius.
2.05 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard line.
B. Touch-Up Materials: As recommended by coating manufacturer for field application.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Apply one coat of bituminous paint to concealed aluminum surfaces that will be in contact with
cementitious or dissimilar materials.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install components plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects, with tight
joints.
C. Install railings in compliance with ADA Standards for accessible design at applicable locations.
D. Anchor railings securely to structure.
E. Conceal anchor bolts and screws whenever possible. Where not concealed, use flush
countersunk fastenings.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and
HVAC Refurbishment
05 5213 - 3 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
3.04 SCHEDULE
A. Stair C: Aluminum pipe railings, high performance organic finish.
END OF SECTION
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and
HVAC Refurbishment
06 0573 - 1 WOOD TREATMENT
SECTION 06 0573
WOOD TREATMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Site applied termiticide for wood materials.
B. Site applied mildicide for wood materials.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. See General Provisions for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide technical data on insulated sheathing, wood preservative materials, and
application instructions.
1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. General: Cover wood products to protect against moisture. Support stacked products to prevent
deformation and to allow air circulation.
B. Fire Retardant Treated Wood: Prevent exposure to precipitation during shipping, storage, or
installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SITE APPLIED WOOD TREATMENT
A. Manufacturers:
1. Nisus Corporation: www.nisuscorp.com.
B. Site Applied Termiticide and Mildicide: Borate mineral salt based, spray applied termiticide,
mildicide and mold growth preventative.
1. Products:
a. Nisus Corporation; Product QNAP5: www.nisuscorp.com.
b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Remove dust, dirt and other contaminants from treatment surfaces. Remove tarpaulins,
dropcloths, strippable protective films, etc., from areas to be treated Move equipment and
stored materials that block or prevent product application.
3.02 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A. Provide temporary ventilation during and immediately after installation sufficient to remove
indoor air contaminants.
3.03 SITE APPLIED WOOD TREATMENT
A. Comply with manufacturers written mixing and installation instructions.
B. Termiticide: Apply to foundations, structure and other items as listed.
1. All structural wood and sill plates within 24 inches (610 mm), minimum, of point of contact
with foundation.
2. All wood, wood based and cellulosic sheathing within 24 inches (610 mm), minimum, of
point of contact with foundation.
3. Concrete foundations 2 inches (51 mm), minimum, from sill plate.
4. All pipe and plumbing penetrations up to 24 inches (305 mm), minimum, above slab and
slab surface within 6 inches (152 mm), minimum, of pipe or penetration.
END OF SECTION
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and
HVAC Refurbishment
06 1000 - 1 ROUGH CARPENTRY
SECTION 06 1000
ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Rough opening framing for roof openings.
B. Roof-mounted curbs.
C. Preservative treated wood materials.
D. Fire retardant treated wood materials.
E. Concealed wood blocking, nailers, and supports.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware; 2016a.
B. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or
Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2015, with Editorial Revision
(2016).
C. AWPA U1 - Use Category System: User Specification for Treated Wood; 2017.
D. PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard; 2015.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. See General Provisions, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide technical data on insulated sheathing, wood preservative materials, and
application instructions.
C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that wood products supplied for rough carpentry meet or
exceed specified requirements.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. General: Cover wood products to protect against moisture. Support stacked products to prevent
deformation and to allow air circulation.
B. Fire Retardant Treated Wood: Prevent exposure to precipitation during shipping, storage, or
installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Dimension Lumber: Comply with PS 20 and requirements of specified grading agencies.
1. If no species is specified, provide any species graded by the agency specified; if no
grading agency is specified, provide lumber graded by any grading agency meeting the
specified requirements.
2. Grading Agency: Any grading agency whose rules are approved by the Board of Review,
American Lumber Standard Committee (www.alsc.org) and who provides grading service
for the species and grade specified; provide lumber stamped with grade mark unless
otherwise indicated.
B. Lumber fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted.
2.02 DIMENSION LUMBER FOR CONCEALED APPLICATIONS
A. Sizes: Nominal sizes as indicated on drawings, S4S.
B. Moisture Content: S-dry or MC19.
C. Miscellaneous Framing, Blocking, Nailers, Grounds, and Furring:
1. Lumber: S4S, No. 2 or Standard Grade.
2. Boards: Standard or No. 3.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and
HVAC Refurbishment
06 1000 - 2 ROUGH CARPENTRY
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Fasteners and Anchors:
1. Metal and Finish: Hot-dipped galvanized steel complying with ASTM A153/A153M for
high humidity and preservative-treated wood locations, unfinished steel elsewhere.
B. Joist Hangers: Hot dipped galvanized steel, sized to suit framing conditions.
1. For contact with preservative treated wood in exposed locations, provide minimum G185
(Z550) galvanizing complying with ASTM A653/A653M.
2.04 FACTORY WOOD TREATMENT
A. Treated Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements of AWPA U1 - Use Category System
for wood treatments determined by use categories, expected service conditions, and specific
applications.
1. Fire-Retardant Treated Wood: Mark each piece of wood with producer's stamp indicating
compliance with specified requirements.
2. Preservative-Treated Wood: Provide lumber and plywood marked or stamped by an
ALSC-accredited testing agency, certifying level and type of treatment in accordance with
AWPA standards.
B. Fire Retardant Treatment:
1. Manufacturers:
a. Viance, LLC; D-Blaze: www.treatedwood.com/#sle.
b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
C. Preservative Treatment:
1. Manufacturers:
a. Viance, LLC; Preserve ACQ: www.treatedwood.com/#sle.
b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2. Preservative Pressure Treatment of Lumber Above Grade: AWPA U1, Use Category
UC3B, Commodity Specification A using waterborne preservative.
a. Kiln dry lumber after treatment to maximum moisture content of 19 percent.
b. Treat lumber exposed to weather.
c. Treat lumber in contact with roofing, flashing, or waterproofing.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A. Select material sizes to minimize waste.
B. Reuse scrap to the greatest extent possible; clearly separate scrap for use on site as accessory
components, including: shims, bracing, and blocking.
C. Where treated wood is used on interior, provide temporary ventilation during and immediately
after installation sufficient to remove indoor air contaminants.
3.02 BLOCKING, NAILERS, AND SUPPORTS
A. Provide framing and blocking members as indicated or as required to support finishes, fixtures,
specialty items, and trim.
B. In framed assemblies that have concealed spaces, provide solid wood fireblocking as required
by applicable local code, to close concealed draft openings between floors and between top
story and roof/attic space; other material acceptable to code authorities may be used in lieu of
solid wood blocking.
C. In metal stud walls, provide continuous blocking around door and window openings for
anchorage of frames, securely attached to stud framing.
D. In walls, provide blocking attached to studs as backing and support for wall-mounted items,
unless item can be securely fastened to two or more studs or other method of support is
explicitly indicated.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and
HVAC Refurbishment
06 1000 - 3 ROUGH CARPENTRY
E. Where ceiling-mounting is indicated, provide blocking and supplementary supports above
ceiling, unless other method of support is explicitly indicated.
3.03 ROOF-RELATED CARPENTRY
A. Coordinate installation of roofing carpentry with deck construction, framing of roof openings, and
roofing assembly installation.
B. Provide wood curb at all roof openings except where specifically indicated otherwise. Form
corners by alternating lapping side members.
3.04 TOLERANCES
A. Framing Members: 1/4 inch (6 mm) from true position, maximum.
B. Surface Flatness of Floor: 1/8 inch in 10 feet (1 mm/m) maximum, and 1/4 inch in 30 feet (7
mm in 10 m) maximum.
C. Variation from Plane (Other than Floors): 1/4 inch in 10 feet (2 mm/m) maximum, and 1/4 inch
in 30 feet (7 mm in 10 m) maximum.
3.05 CLEANING
A. Waste Disposal:
1. Comply with applicable regulations.
2. Do not burn scrap on project site.
3. Do not burn scraps that have been pressure treated.
4. Do not send materials treated with pentachlorophenol, CCA, or ACA to co-generation
facilities or “waste-to-energy” facilities.
B. Do not leave any wood, shavings, sawdust, etc. on the ground or buried in fill.
C. Prevent sawdust and wood shavings from entering the storm drainage system.
END OF SECTION
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and
HVAC Refurbishment
06 1500 - 1 WOOD DECKING
SECTION 06 1500
WOOD DECKING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Plywood structural wood decking.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. AITC 111 - Recommended Practice for Protection of Structural Glued Laminated Timber During
Transit, Storage and Erection; 2005.
B. ASTM D1761 - Standard Test Methods for Mechanical Fasteners in Wood; 2012.
C. AWPA U1 - Use Category System: User Specification for Treated Wood; 2017.
D. PS 1 - Structural Plywood; 2009.
1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Design roof live load: 20 psf (equivalent kPa) with deflection limited to 1/240 of span.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See General Provisions, for submittal procedures.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect glue laminated members in accordance with AITC 111 requirements for unwrapped
material.
B. Fire Retardant Treated Wood: Prevent exposure to precipitation during shipping, storage, or
installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Plywood Decking:
1. Boise Cascade, LLC: www.bc.com.
2. Georgia-Pacific Corporation: www.buildgp.com.
3. Weyerhaeuser Co: www.weyerhaeuser.com.
4. Substitions: See General Provisions.
2.02 WOOD MATERIALS
A. Wood fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted.
B. Plywood Decking: PS 1 veneer plywood; APA Rated Sheathing, Span Rating 48/24; Exterior
grade;1 A interior veneer appearance grade; sanded.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Fasteners and Anchors:
1. Fastener Type and Finish: Hot-dipped galvanized steel for high humidity and
preservative-treated wood locations, unfinished steel elsewhere.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that support framing is ready to receive decking.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate placement of bearing items.
3.03 INSTALLATION - PLYWOOD DECKING
A. Install decking perpendicular to framing members with ends staggered over firm bearing. On
sloped surfaces, lay decking with tongue upward.
B. Engage plywood tongue and groove edges.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and
HVAC Refurbishment
06 1500 - 2 WOOD DECKING
C. Allow expansion space at edges and ends.
END OF SECTION
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and
HVAC Refurbishment
07 5110 - 1 REHABILITIATION OF BUILT UP
ROOFING
SECTION 07 5110
REHABILITIATION OF BUILT UP ROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Work Includes:
1. Thoroughly clean roof of all dirt, dust, debris and loose granules / coating with RoofTec
cleaning system or approved equal including proper reclaiming and disposal of all runoff.
2. Build up designated low areas marked on roof with leveling coat consisting of a 50/50
mixture of Alphaguard bio base coat and #2/16 Cemex lapis lustre sand. Bid shall include
all areas marked on roof as well as what is shown in Sheet A4 "Fill Low Area and Cricket
Roof Plan".
3. Reinforce perimeter and projection flashings with alphaguard bio base coat @ 3 gallons
per square, embed permafab polyester reinforcing membrane and then coat with
alphaguard bio top coat at 2 gallons per square. Designated ridges in roof to receive a
detail coat of alphaguard bio base coat and polyester membrane, 6” wide, bid shall be
based on 750 lineal feet.
4. Install detail coat of alphaguard bio base coat over side and end laps, then install at 4
gallons per square over entire roof. Immediately embed permafab polyester membrane
into base coat per warranty detail requirements.
5. After proper cure of base coat (6-10 hours). Install alphaguard bio top coat at 2 gallons per
square. After proper cure of top coat (6-10 hours ) install slip resistant surface in
designated walkway areas consisting of 20-40 mesh silica sand broadcast @ 10-15 lbs /
square and backrolled into additional layer of alphaguard top coat at 1.5 gallons per
square. Base bid shall be for 600 lineal feet of nonskid walk surface 3 feet wide.
6. Remove and replace perimeter counterflashing with new surface mounted 24 gage kynar
counterflashing set in butyl tape, secured 12” on center with appropriate fasteners and
caulked with Tremseal D.
7. Coat inside / top of parapet wall above counterflashing with solarguard masonry primer @
1 gallon per 200 square feet and 2 coats of solarguard hy-build elastomeric wall coating @
1.25 gallons per square per coat.
8. Clean sight screen support trays and seal fasteners through tray with solarguard acrylic
seam sealer.
9. Remove and replace skylights, see Section 08 6200 Unit Skylights.
10. Install new Cal-OSHA approved safety rail / gate at roof access hatch.
11. Remove and replace all service line support blocks with durablocks.
12. Provide add price for CAL-OSHA approved non penetrating safety rails at all skylights.
13. Provide City with 2 year contractor guarantee for defects in workmanship and 20 year
manufacturer system warranty.
1.02 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Contractor shall:
1. Be experienced in fluid applied roofing.
a. Five (5) years minimum.
b. Be acceptable to City.
c. Be a manufacturer Approved Contractor.
d. Has not been in Chapter 7 during the last ten (10) years.
e. Provide a list of at least five (5) projects available for inspection employing similar
system within a 75-mile radius of City.
B. Roofing material manufacturer shall:
1. Be an Associate Member in good standing with the National Roofing Contractors’
Association (NRCA) for at least five (5) years.
a. Be nationally recognized in roofing, waterproofing, and moisture survey industry.
b. Be approved by the City.
c. Has not been in Chapter 11 during the last five (5) years
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and
HVAC Refurbishment
07 5110 - 2 REHABILITIATION OF BUILT UP
ROOFING
d. Provide a Project Close-out Report upon delivery of the project warranty. This report
shall include the following sections:
1) Project Specifications
2) Project Summary
3) Project reports as a result of roof inspections.
4) Job progress photos.
5) Warranty document.
6) Owner’s Manual describing maintenance and emergency repair.
7) Inspection Report to be completed by the roofing material manufacturer on an
annual basis.
C. The roofing material manufacturer will be ISO 9001 Certified or be able to demonstrate levels of
quality assurance.
1. Employ full-time Field Technical Services Representative to make daily site visits, report
work quality, verify material coverage rates and job progress. Provide City with daily
inspection reports with progress photos for the entire project duration.
2. Provide list of at least ten (10) projects available for inspection employing
3. Similar system within 75 mile radius of city.
4. The presence and activity of the manufacturer’s/specifier’s representative and/or City’s
representative shall in no way relieve the contractor of contractual responsibilities of duties.
D. Project meetings:
1. Pre-Installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. Review methods and
procedures related to roofing system installation including but not limited to the following:
2. Meet with Owners Representative, Roof System Manufacturer’s
Representative, Contractor, City, Architecture/Engineer, and Third Party Roofing
Installation Inspector.
3. Review methods and procedures related to roofing installation, including manufacturer’s
written instructions.
4. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, contractor
personnel, equipment and facilities needed to complete project.
5. Review odor control procedures to be implemented around roof top air intakes.
6. Final Inspection:
a. Will be scheduled by City upon job completion.
1) Contractor.
2) Roofing material manufacturer.
3) City.
4) Minimum agenda:
(a) Walkover inspection.
(b) Identification of problems which may impede issuance of warranty.
E. Random sampling:
1. Roofing material:
a. During course of work, City’s Representative may secure samples according to ASTM
D140-93 of materials being used from containers at job site and submit them to an
independent laboratory for comparison to specified material.
b. Should test results prove that a material is not functionally equal to specified material:
1) Contractor shall pay for all testing.
2) Roofing installed and found not to comply with the specifications shall be
removed and replaced at no change in the contract price.
2. Regulatory requirements:
a. Uniform Building Code.
1) UL 790 Class A Fire Rating.
2) CA Title 24 compliant.
F. Plans and specifications:
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and
HVAC Refurbishment
07 5110 - 3 REHABILITIATION OF BUILT UP
ROOFING
1. Contractor shall notify the City of any omissions, contradictions, or conflicts seven (7) days
before bid date. The City shall provide necessary corrections or additions to plans and
specifications by addendum. If Contractor does not so notify the City of any such
condition, it will be assumed that the Contractor has included the necessary items in the
bid to complete this specification.
2. It is the intent that this be a completed project as far as the contract documents set forth.
It is not the intent that different phases of work on
a. this project be delegated to various trades and subcontractors by the contract
documents. Contractor must make own contracts with various subcontractors, setting
forth the work these subcontractors will be held responsible for. The Contractor alone
will be held responsible by the City for the completed project.
b. If the Contractor feels a conflict exists between what is considered good roofing
practice and these specifications, contractor shall state in writing all objections prior to
submitting quotations.
c. It is the Contractor’s responsibility during the course of the work to bring to the
attention of the City’s representative any defective membrane, or deck discovered
where not previously identified.
1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Delivery of materials:
1. Deliver materials to job site in new, dry, unopened, and well-marked containers showing
product and manufacturer’s name.
2. Deliver materials in sufficient quantity to allow continuity of work.
3. Coordinate delivery with the City.
B. Do not order project materials or start work before receiving written approval from the City.
C. Storage of materials:
1. Store roll goods on ends only. Discard rolls which have been flattened, creased, or
otherwise damaged. Place materials on pallets. Do not stack pallets.
2. For felt rolls, slit the top of the plastic shrink wrap only. Cover top and sides of all stored
materials with tarpaulin (not polyethylene). Secure tarpaulin.
3. Rooftop storage: Disperse material to avoid concentrated loading.
4. No materials may be stored in open or in contact with ground or roof surface.
5. Should Contractor be required to quickly cover material temporarily, such as during an
unanticipated rain shower, all materials shall be stored on a raised platform covered with
secured canvas tarpaulin (not polyethylene), top to bottom.
6. Contractor shall assume full responsibility for the protection and safekeeping of products
stored on premises.
D. Material handling:
1. Handle materials to avoid bending, tearing, or damage during transportation and
installation.
2. Material handling equipment shall be selected and operated so as not to damage existing
construction or applied roofing. Do not operate or situate material handling equipment in
locations that will hinder smooth flow of vehicular or pedestrian traffic.
1.04 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Field measurements and material quantities:
1. Contractor shall have SOLE responsibility for accuracy of all measurements, estimates of
material quantities and sizes, and site conditions that affect work
B. Existing conditions:
1. Building space directly under roof area covered by this specification will be utilized by
ongoing operations. Do not interrupt City operations unless prior written approval is
received from the City.
a. Use care to prevent generation of unnecessary noise and keep noise levels
to the minimum possible. When ordered by the City, immediately
discontinue such methods that produce noise disruptive or harmful to
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and
HVAC Refurbishment
07 5110 - 4 REHABILITIATION OF BUILT UP
ROOFING
1) Facility functions and occupants, and employ unobjectionable methods. Equip.
air compressors, tractors, cranes, hoists, vehicles, and other internal combustion
engine equipment with “residential” grade mufflers, and muffle the unloading
cycle of compressors. Limit use of impact tools to times and locations as
approved. Remove from the site any equipment producing objectionable noise
as determined by City.
C. Safety requirements:
1. All application, material handling, and associated equipment shall conform to and be
operated in conformance with OSHA safety requirements.
2. Comply with federal, state, local, and City fire and safety requirements.
3. Advise the City whenever work is expected to be hazardous to any persons of the City
community, employees, and/or operators.
4. Maintain a crewman as a floor area guard whenever roof decking is being repaired or
replaced.
D. Waste disposal:
1. Do not re-use, re-cycle or dispose of material manufacturers product containers except in
accordance with all applicable regulations. The user of manufactured products is
responsible for proper use and disposal of product containers
E. Environmental requirements:
1. Do not work in rain, or in presence of water.
F. Security requirements:
1. Comply with City security requirements.
2. Provide City with current list of persons on the job site.
1.05 PAYMENT SECURITY
A. Progress payments:
1. Contractor shall establish with the City procedures for progress payments, retainages, and
final payment prior to commencement of work on this project.
2. Partial or progress payments shall not relieve Contractor of performance obligations under
this contract, nor shall such payments be viewed as approval or acceptance of work
performed.
3. Final payment shall be withheld until all provisions of the specifications are met.
1.06 WARRANTY/GUARANTEE
A. Guarantee
1. Upon project completion and City acceptance, effective upon complete payment,
Contractor shall issue the City a guarantee against defective workmanship and materials
for a period of two (2) years.
B. Warranty
1. Upon project completion, Manufacturer acceptance, and once complete payment has been
received, by both Contractor and Manufacturer, Manufacturer shall deliver to the City a
twenty (20)-year manufacturer Roofing System Quality Assurance Warranty. Manufacturer
will perform special inspections at year 2, year 5, year 10 and year 15 of the warranty
period.
2. Roofing System Quality Assurance Warranty requirements:
a. Warranty Coverage is for Labor and Material and Includes:
1) The Roof Membrane.
2) The Flashings.
3) Edge components
4) Metal Components
5) Warranty/Maintenance Service (At Year’s 2 , 5 , 10 & 15 )
(a) Housekeeping and minor maintenance including removal of debris from roof
membranes and cleaning of drain areas.
b. Maintain Online Database:
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and
HVAC Refurbishment
07 5110 - 5 REHABILITIATION OF BUILT UP
ROOFING
1) Manufacturer to maintain online database of completed roof with roof system
data including CAD drawing of roof and photos to provide historical data for roof.
Inspection data to be updated with photos / reports after each inspection. City
shall be provided full access to online report and updates.
3. Warranty shall be an entire system warranty and include roof insulation, membrane,
surfacing, flashing, and sheet metal terminations. At the end of twenty (20) years,
warranty may be renewed in five (5)-year increments following manufacturer’s standard
warranty renewal process.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Comply with quality control, references, specifications, and manufacturer’s data. Products
containing asbestos are prohibited on this project. Use only asbestos-free products.
B. Use all products with appropriate personal protection. User must read container label and
material safety data sheets prior to use.
C. Referenced eco-friendly RoofTec system is the basis of design for roof cleaning / roof
preparation. Traditional power washing is not an approved method.
D. Referenced materials from Tremco Alphaguard Bio System provided for minimum standard of
utility. Single component urethanes will not be considered,
E. Water based systems will not be considered.
1. Total cured (dry) system thickness: (base coat and top coat): Minimum 96 mils.
F. Requests for or “equal” products must include the following and be submitted to the City no later
than 48 hours after the pre-bid meeting. City will notify contractors of any approved equals no
less than 3 days before bid date.
G. Specific product name and manufacturer as well as product literature demonstrating how this
product meets or exceeds the mil thickness requirement and meets the performance
requirements of the specifications.
H. Product Data Sheets
I. Safety Data Sheets
J. Copy of manufacturer’s actual warranty
K. Submit name and product literature of proposed roof cleaning system and comparison to
environmental and performance requirements of specified method. Including but not limited to
reduced water usage, non detergent, Ecologo certified cleaner, and proper recapture, filtering
and disposal of runoff.
L. Provide project specific letter, on the applicable roofing manufacturer’s letterhead that states
specific roof cleaning system is approved by manufacturer and meets performance
requirements of specifications.
M. Provide samples of proposed system including wet samples ( 1 pint and Third Party Roofing
Installation Inspector minimum ) of each fluid applied component and a 12" x 12" cured sample
of proposed system.
2.02 ROOFING MATERIALS
A. Adhesive: Rock-It WB Title 24 Surfacing Adhesive by Tremco Inc. or approved equal.
1. VOC limit: 50 g/L or SCAQMD and Building Code Requirements, whichever is more
restrictive.
2. White, highly reflective, asbestos-free, poly-meric low volatile, extreme low odor, surfacing
adhesive.
B. Primers: Tremco or approved equal.
C. Metal: Alphaguard M Prime by Tremco or approved equal.
1. Cured coating: Geoguard Primer by Tremco or approved equal.
2. Base Coat:
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and
HVAC Refurbishment
07 5110 - 6 REHABILITIATION OF BUILT UP
ROOFING
a. Alphaguard Bio Base Coat by Tremco or approved equal. Two-part, bio-based, low
odor polyurethane coating.
3. Bio-Based Content: Not less than 20 percent.
a. Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC), maximum ASTM D 3960 1g/L
b. Percent Solids, by weight, minimum ASTM D1644: 100 percent.
c. Percent Solids, by volume minimum ASTM D 2697: 100 percent.
d. Water Vapor Transmission, ASTM E96 ( system ) 0.19 perms.
4. Reinforcing Membrane:
a. Permafab polyester membrane by Tremco or approved equal.
5. Top Coat:
a. Alphaguard Bio Top Coat by Tremco or approved equal. Two-part, bio-based, low
odor polyurethane coating.
1) Bio-Based Content: Not less than 20 percent.
b. Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC), maximum ASTM D 3960 6g/L
c. Percent Solids, by weight, minimum ASTM D1644: 100 percent.
d. Percent Solids, by volume minimum ASTM D 2697: 100 percent.
1) E. Water Vapor Transmission, ASTM E96 ( system ) 0.19 perms.
2) F. Tensile Strength ASTM D412 (system ) 1,400 lb/in2
3) H. Solar Reflectance Index ( SRI ) ( White ), ASTM E 1980: Not less than
104
6. Reflective Coating: Base Flashing/Exposed Mastic:
a. Solarguard 6083 Coating or equal.
7. Vinyl-Coated, Fiberglass Mesh: ELS Mastic or approved equal.
8. Repair Mastic: ELS Mastic or approved equal.
9. Aggregate ( non skid ): 20-40 mesh silica sand.
a. Build up low areas: Mixture Alphaguard Bio Base coat and #2/16 Cemex Lapis
Lustre Sand or approved equal. See Drawing Sheet A4.
b. Sealant - perimeter counterflashing: Tremseal D or approved equal.
c. Sight screen lags - Solarguard acrylic seam sealer or approved equal.
d. Parapet wall coating system: Solarguard Masonry Primer and Solarguard Hy-Build
Coating or approved equal.
e. Butyl Tape: TF Tape by Tremco or approved equal.
f. Service line support blocks: Durablock or approved equal.
2.03 METAL FLASHINGS
A. Edge flashing - Install new 24 gage kynar surface mounted metal counterflashing with hemmed
drip edge at perimeter parapet wall detail.
B. Install 24 gage galvanized skirt metal at AC units / curbs with hemmed drip edge.
C. Work shall be in accordance with Architectural Sheet Metal Manual, as issued by Sheet Metal
and Air Conditioning Contractor’s National Association, Inc. (SMACNA).
D. See Division 07 6000 Flashing and Sheet Metal and Division 07 6200 Sheet Metal Flashing and
Trim.
2.04 ROOF PREPARATION
A. RoofTec by Tremco or approved equal.
1. Water usage: 60% less than power washing.
2. Cleaner: UL ECOLOGO Certified, detergent free.
3. 100% water recapture for filtering / proper disposal.
4. Power Head: 2500 RPM
5. Pressure: 2000 PSI
6. Temperature: 120 degrees F
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and
HVAC Refurbishment
07 5110 - 7 REHABILITIATION OF BUILT UP
ROOFING
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify conditions as satisfactory to receive work.
B. Do not begin roofing until all unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. Beginning work constitutes
acceptance of conditions.
C. Verify that work of other trades penetrating roof deck or requiring men and equipment to
traverse roof deck has been approved by the City, manufacturer, and roofing contractor.
D. Check projections, curbs, and deck for inadequate anchorage, foreign material, moisture or
unevenness that would prevent quality and execution of new roofing system.
3.02 GENERAL WORKMANSHIP
A. Substrate shall be free of foreign particles prior to laying roof membrane.
B. Phased application is not permitted. All plies shall be completed each day.
C. Traffic and equipment shall be kept off completed plies until adhesive has set.
D. Wrapper and packaging materials shall not be included in roofing system.
E. Fit plies into roof drain rims; install lead flashing and finishing plies; secure clamping collars; and
install domes.
F. Extend roofing membrane to top edge of cant at wall and projection bases.
G. Cut out fishmouths at side laps which are not completely sealed and patch. Replace all sheets
which are not fully and continuously bonded.
H. Store all materials prior to application at temperatures between 60 and 80 deg F.
I. Apply coatings within range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended by
manufacturer, do not apply materials when air temperature is below 50 or above 110 deg F.
Do not apply in snow, rain, fog or mist.
3.03 PREPARATION
A. Protection:
1. Contractor shall be responsible for protection of property during course of work. Lawns,
shrubbery, pavement areas, and buildings shall be protected from damage. Repair
damage at no extra cost to the City.
2. Prior to commencing removal of debris, provide at the site, a dumpster or dump truck to be
located adjacent to building as directed by the City.
3. Roofing, flashings, membrane repairs, and installation shall be installed and sealed in a
watertight manner on same day of installation or before arrival of inclement weather.
4. At start of each work day, drains within daily work area shall be plugged. Plugs to be
removed at end of each work day or before arrival of inclement weather.
5. Preparation work shall be limited to those areas that can be covered with installed roofing
material on same day and before arrival of inclement weather.
6. Arrange work sequence to avoid use of newly constructed roofing for storage, walking
surface, and equipment movement. Move equipment and ground storage areas as work
progresses.
7. Protect building surfaces at set-up areas with tarpaulin. Secure tarpaulin. Remove
dumpster from premises when full and empty at approved dumping or refuse area. Deliver
empty dumpster to site for further use. Upon job completion, dumpster shall be removed
from premises. Spilled or scattered debris shall be cleaned up immediately. Removed
material to be disposed from roof as it accumulates.
8. Provide and install charcoal pre-filters at all fresh air intakes, properly secure per owner
requirements when working in close proximity to fresh air intakes. Filters must be
maintained and changed on a regular basis for the duration of the project.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and
HVAC Refurbishment
07 5110 - 8 REHABILITIATION OF BUILT UP
ROOFING
3.04 SURFACE PREPARATION:
A. Throughly clean roof with RoofTec cleaning system including proper recapturing / filtering and
disposal of all runoff. No runoff may enter storm drains.
B. Verify that existing roofing membrane is free of blisters, loose coating, splits, open laps,
indications of shrinkage, and puncture damage. Commencing application of fluid-applied
re-coating membrane indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
C. Verify adhesion of new coating system with test patch before commencement of work.
D. Maintain roof drains in functioning condition to ensure roof drainage at end of each workday.
E. Install leveling coat in designated low areas as shown on Sheet A4, assume 2 feet beyond ovals
shown, to raise flush with surrounding roof / provide positive slope to drain, trowel apply
mixture of alphaguard base coat and #2/16 aggregate. Roof manufacturer shall approve
completed leveling coat areas before any additional coating work is installed.
3.05 FLASHINGS / FIELD MEMBRANE
A. General flashing requirements:
1. Complete primer, base coat, fabric reinforcement and top coat at all
parapets, curbs, penetrations and drains prior to application in field of fluid-applied
membrane. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's
warranty detail requirements.
2. Extend coating to cover all flashing surfaces and a minimum of 4 inches
onto horizontal surfaces.
3. Back roll to achieve minimum wet mil thickness of 48 mils of base coat on
flashing's unless otherwise recommended by manufacturer; verify
thickness of base coat as work progresses.
4. Embed fabric reinforcement into wet base coat, lap adjacent flashing
pieces of fabric 3 inches along edges and 6 inches at end laps.
5. Roll surface of fabric reinforcing to completely embed and saturate fabric.
Leave finished base coat with fabric free of pine holes, voids, or openings.
6. Roof drains: Install base coat onto surrounding membrane surface and
metal drain bowl flange. Install target piece of fabric reinforcement
immediately into wet base coat and roll to fully embed and saturate fabric.
Reinstall clamping ring and strainer following application of top coat.
Replace any broken drain rings or clamping bolts.
7. FIELD MEMBRANE
a. Install detail coat of base coat at all side and end laps.
b. Install 1 layer polyester reinforcing membrane (6” wide ) set in alphaguard bio base
coat installed at 3 gallons per square over designated ridges in roof membrane. (650
lineal feet) broom membrane into place and top coat with another 3 gallons per
square of base coat.
c. Install base coat at 4 gallons square (64 wet mils).back roll to achieve
wet mil coating thickness.
d. Embed fabric reinforcement into wet base coat. Lap adjacent pieces of
fabric minimum 3 inches along edges and 6 inches at end laps.
e. Roll surface of fabric reinforcing to completely embed and saturate fabric.
leave finished base coat with fabric free of pin holes, voids, or openings.
f. Allow base coat to cure prior to application of top coat.
g. Apply top coat to field of membrane and flashings uniformly in a
complete, continuous application at a rate of 2 gallons per square ( 32
wet mils ). ( Note: base coat must be re-primed before install of top coat
if exposed more than 72 hours )
h. Avoid foot traffic on new fluid-applied membrane for a minimum of 24
hours.
8. WALKWAY / NON SKID
a. Mask walkway location with tape.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and
HVAC Refurbishment
07 5110 - 9 REHABILITIATION OF BUILT UP
ROOFING
b. Apply additional layer of top coat @ 1.5 gallon per square, back roll,
broadcast 20-30 lbs per 100 square feet of slip resistant top coat aggregate
in wet top coat. Back roll sand and top coat creating even dispersal of
sand. Remove masking immediately. Bid shall include 600 lineal feet of
c. Non skid walkway surface 3’ wide in owner designated areas.
9. SIGHT SCREEN SUPPORTS
a. Clean existing trays of any loose paint / coating, remove sealant / mastic
b. from lag supports, prime and reseal with solaguard acrylic seam sealer.
10. SKYLIGHTS
a. Remove and replace existing skylights with new specified curb mounted skylights per
Section 086200 Unit Skylights. Use appropriate fall protection at all times and
schedule skylight replacement during hours approved by City.
11. PERIMETER PARAPET WALL
a. Remove and replace perimeter counterflashing metal with new 24 gage kynar surface
mounted counterflashing set in TF tape and use appropriate fasteners 12” on center,
seal top of counterflashing with Tremseal D, tool sealant to provide complete and
continuous seal. Coat inside and top of parapet wall with solarguard masonry primer
and 2 coats of solarguard hy-build coating at manufacturer’s required coverage rates.
3.06 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Repair of deficiencies:
1. Installations of details noted as deficient during final inspection must be repaired and
corrected by applicator and made ready for re-inspection within five (5) working days.
B. Clean-up:
1. Immediately upon completion, roof membrane and flashing surfaces shall be cleaned of
debris, whether or not the result of construction activities.
2. Clean gutters and downspouts of debris, whether or not the result of construction activities.
3. Vacuum / sweep loose and remove excessive aggregate in walkway areas.
3.07 INSPECTION
A. The Contractor shall retain a full time third-party roofing system inspection service from a
mutually agreed firm. The third-party roofing system inspection firm (different from the
manufacturer) and/or subcontractor shall provide the services as described in Appendix B.
END OF SECTION
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and
HVAC Refurbishment
07 6000 - 1 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL
SECTION 07 6000
FLASHING AND SHEET METAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Metal counterflashing and base flashing.
2. Metal wall flashing and expansion joints.
3. Built-in metal valley, gutters, and scuppers.
4. Gutters and downspouts.
5. Exposed metal trim/fascia units.
6. Miscellaneous sheet metal accessories.
7. Laminated and composition flashing.
8. Elastic flashing.
9. Sheet metal ducts.
B. Roofing accessories installed integral with roofing membrane are specified in this section and
installed in coordination with roofing work.
1.02 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Coordinate work of this section with interfacing and adjoining work for proper sequencing of
each installation. Ensure best possible weather resistance and durability of work and protection
of materials and finishes.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM MATERIALS
A. Galvanized Steel: Commercial quality 24 gage.
B. Lead: ASTM B 749, Type L51121, copper-bearing sheet lead, minimum 4 lbs./sq. ft.
(0.0625-inch thick) except not less than 6 lbs/sq. ft. (0.0937-inch thick) for burning (welding)
unless otherwise indicated.
2.02 MISCELLANEOUS COMPONENTS
A. Fasteners: Same metal as flashing/sheet metal or other non-corrosive metal as recommended
by sheet manufacturer. Match finish of exposed heads with material being fastened.
B. Bituminous Coating: SSPC - Paint 12, solvent-type bituminous mastic, nominally free of sulfur,
compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat.
C. Elastomeric Sealant: Generic type recommended by manufacturer of metal and fabricator of
components being sealed and complying with requirements for joint sealants indicated.
D. Adhesives: Type recommended by flashing sheet manufacturer for
waterproof/weather-resistant seaming and adhesive application of flashing sheet.
E. Paper Slip Sheet: 5-lb. rosin-sized building paper.
F. Polyethylene Underlayment: Minimum 6-mil carbonated polyethylene film resistant to decay
when tested in accordance with ASTM E 154.
G. Metal Accessories: Provide sheet metal clips, straps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory
units as required for installation of work, matching or compatible with material being installed,
non-corrosive, size and gauge required for performance.
H. Elastic Flashing Filler: Closed-cell polyethylene or other soft closed-cell material recommended
by elastic flashing manufacturer as filler under flashing loops to ensure movement with
minimum stress on flashing sheet.
I. Roofing Cement: ASTM D 2822, asphaltic.
2.03 FABRICATED UNITS
A. General Metal Fabrication: Shop-fabricate work to greatest extent possible. Comply with
details shown and with applicable requirements of SMACNA “Architectural Sheet Metal Manual”
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and
HVAC Refurbishment
07 6000 - 2 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL
and other recognized industry practices. Fabricate for waterproof and weather-resistant
performance, with expansion provisions for running work, sufficient to permanently prevent
leakage, damage, or deterioration of the work. Form work to fit substrates. Comply with
material manufacturer instructions and recommendations for forming material. Form exposed
sheet metal work without excessive oil-canning, buckling, and tool marks, true to line and levels
indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.
B. Seams: Fabricate non-moving seams in sheet metal with flat-lock seams. For metal other than
aluminum, tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder. Form aluminum seams with epoxy
seam sealer; rivet joints for additional strength where required.
C. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions in work cannot be
used or would not be sufficiently water/weatherproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing
hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints).
D. Sealant Joints: Where movable, non-expansion type joints are indicated or required for proper
performance of work, form metal to provide for proper installation of elastomeric sealant, in
compliance with SMACNA standards.
E. Separations: Provide for separation of metal from non-compatible metal or corrosive substrates
by coating concealed surfaces at locations of contact, with bituminous coating or other
permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer/fabricator.
F. Shop Finish, Rain Drainage: Remove oil and debris from all copper rain drainage units (gutters,
downspouts, and similar exposed units); clean as needed to provide installation of uniform,
clean, shiny, and neat appearance.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer’s installation instructions
and recommendations and with SMACNA “Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.” Anchor units of
work securely in place by methods indicated, providing for thermal expansion of metal units;
conceal fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work
with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weatherproof.
3.02 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean exposed metal surfaces, removing substances that might cause corrosion of metal or
deterioration of finishes.
END OF SECTION
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and
HVAC Refurbishment
07 6200 - 1 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND
TRIM
SECTION 07 6200
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Sheet metal flashing
2. Manufactured reglets with counterflashing.
1.03 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sheet metal flashing and trim layout and seams with sizes and locations of
penetrations to be flashed, and joints and seams in adjacent materials.
B. Coordinate sheet metal flashing and trim installation with adjoining roofing and wall materials,
joints, and seams to provide leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation.
1.04 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site and coordinate with roofing
preinstallation meeting.
1. Review construction schedule. Verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel,
equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.
2. Review special roof details, roof drainage, roof-penetration flashing, equipment curbs, and
conditions of other construction that affect sheet metal flashing and trim.
3. Review requirements for insurance and certificates if applicable.
4. Review sheet metal flashing observation and repair procedures after flashing installation.
1.05 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components
and profiles, and finishes for each manufactured product and accessory.
B. Shop Drawings: For sheet metal flashing and trim.
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.
2. Detail fabrication and installation layouts, expansion-joint locations, and keyed details.
Distinguish between shop- and field-assembled work.
3. Include identification of material, thickness, weight, and finish for each item and location in
Project.
4. Include details for forming, including profiles, shapes, seams, and dimensions.
5. Include details for joining, supporting, and securing, including layout and spacing of
fasteners, cleats, clips, and other attachments. Include pattern of seams.
6. Include details of termination points and assemblies.
7. Include details of roof-penetration flashing.
8. Include details of special conditions.
9. Include details of connections to adjoining work.
10. Detail formed flashing and trim at scale of not less than 3 inches per 12 inches.
1.06 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For fabricator.
B. Product Test Reports: For each product, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
C. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.
1.07 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For sheet metal flashing and trim and its accessories, to include in
maintenance manuals.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and
HVAC Refurbishment
07 6200 - 2 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND
TRIM
1.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications: Employs skilled workers who custom fabricate sheet metal flashing
and trim similar to that required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful
in-service performance.
1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materials in contact with other materials that might
cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. Store sheet metal flashing and trim materials
away from uncured concrete and masonry.
B. Protect strippable protective covering on sheet metal flashing and trim from exposure to sunlight
and high humidity, except to extent necessary for period of sheet metal flashing and trim
installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Sheet metal flashing and trim assemblies shall withstand wind loads, structural
movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to
defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Completed
sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight.
B. Sheet Metal Standard for Flashing and Trim: Comply with NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing Manual"
and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" requirements for dimensions and profiles
shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature
changes to prevent buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint
sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface
temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
2.02 SHEET METALS
A. General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying
strippable, temporary protective film before shipping.
B. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Provide zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet according to ASTM A
653/A 653M, G90 coating designation; prepainted by coil-coating process to comply with ASTM
A 755/A 755M.
1. Surface: Factory finish white or primed and painted white glossy for metal for visible sheet
metal flashing. Follow paint manufacturer’s instructions for exterior paint for metal
substrate.
2.03 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS
A. Felt: ASTM D 226/D 226M, Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felt; nonperforated.
B. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet: Minimum 30 mils thick, consisting of a slip-resistant
polyethylene- or polypropylene-film top surface laminated to a layer of butyl- or SBS-modified
asphalt adhesive, with release-paper backing; specifically designed to withstand high metal
temperatures beneath metal roofing. Provide primer according to written recommendations of
underlayment manufacturer.
1. Products <http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=5148&mf=04&src=wd>: Subject to
compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Tremco <http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456801048&mf=04&src=wd>;
ExoAir HTF or equal. Thermal Stability: ASTM D 1970; stable after testing at 240 deg F or
higher.
3. Low-Temperature Flexibility: ASTM D 1970; passes after testing at minus 20 deg F or
lower.
C. Slip Sheet: Rosin-sized building paper, 3 lb/100 sq. ft. minimum.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and
HVAC Refurbishment
07 6200 - 3 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND
TRIM
2.04 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, protective coatings, sealants, and
other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation
and as recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item unless
otherwise indicated.
B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and
bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and recommended by
manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item.
1. General: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex-washer head.
a. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using plastic caps or
factory-applied coating. Provide metal-backed EPDM or PVC sealing washers under
heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather side of metal.
b. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets suitable for metal
being fastened.
c. Spikes and Ferrules: Same material as gutter; with spike with ferrule matching
internal gutter width.
2. Fasteners for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel or hot-dip
galvanized steel according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329.
C. Solder:
1. For Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn50, 50 percent tin and 50
percent lead or Grade Sn60, 60 percent tin and 40 percent lead with maximum lead
content of 0.2 percent.
D. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound sealant tape
with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2
inch wide and 1/8 inch thick.
E. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polyurethane polymer sealant; of type, grade,
class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain
watertight.
F. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant;
polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited
movement.
G. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion according to ASTM D 1187.
H. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for application.
I. Foam Tape: PVC closed cell foam tape, 3/4 inch wide minimum, 1/2 inch thick minimum.
2.05 MANUFACTURED SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
A. If reglets need to be replaced: Reglets: Units of type, material, and profile required, formed to
provide secure interlocking of separate reglet and counterflashing pieces, and compatible with
flashing indicated with factory-mitered and -welded corners and junctions and with interlocking
counterflashing on exterior face, of same metal as reglet. Match same manufactuerer as
existing condition.
2.06 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with details shown and
recommendations in cited sheet metal standard that apply to design, dimensions, geometry,
metal thickness, and other characteristics of item required. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and
trim in shop to greatest extent possible.
1. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply with
performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and metal.
2. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication.
3. Form sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates without excessive oil canning, buckling,
and tool marks; true to line, levels, and slopes; and with exposed edges folded back to
form hems.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and
HVAC Refurbishment
07 6200 - 4 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND
TRIM
4. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Do not use exposed
fasteners on faces exposed to view.
B. Expansion Provisions: Form metal for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim.
1. Use lapped expansion joints only where indicated on Drawings.
C. Sealant Joints: Where movable, nonexpansion-type joints are required, form metal to provide
for proper installation of elastomeric sealant according to cited sheet metal standard.
D. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or
from compatible, noncorrosive metal.
E. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with
elastomeric sealant unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer for intended use.
F. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.
2.07 LOW-SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Counterflashing: Shop fabricate interior and exterior corners. Fabricate from the following
materials:
1. Galvanized Steel: 0.022 inch thick, minimum.
B. Equipment Cap: Fully soldered. Fabricate from the following materials:
1. Galvanized Steel: 0.030 inch thick, minimum.
C. Scupper: Fully soldered. Fabricate from the following materials:
D. Galvanized Steel: 0.030 inch thick, minimum.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances, substrate, and other conditions affecting performance
of the Work.
1. Verify compliance with requirements for installation tolerances of substrates.
2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely
anchored.
B. Proceed with installation only after inspection and unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.02 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION
A. Felt Underlayment: Install felt underlayment, wrinkle free, using adhesive to minimize use of
mechanical fasteners under sheet metal flashing and trim. Apply in shingle fashion to shed
water, with lapped joints of not less than 2 inches.
B. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install self-adhering sheet underlayment, wrinkle free.
Prime substrate if recommended by underlayment manufacturer. Comply with temperature
restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation; use primer for installing underlayment
at low temperatures. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with end laps of not less than 6
inches staggered 24 inches between courses. Overlap side edges not less than 3-1/2 inches.
Roll laps and edges with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days.
C. Apply slip sheet, wrinkle free, over underlayment before installing sheet metal flashing and trim.
3.03 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in
place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder, protective
coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet
metal flashing and trim system.
1. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line, levels, and slopes. Provide uniform, neat
seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and
HVAC Refurbishment
07 6200 - 5 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND
TRIM
2. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight
performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating
sheet metal.
3. Space cleats not more than 12 inches apart. Attach each cleat with at least two fasteners.
Bend tabs over fasteners.
4. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim without oil canning, and free of buckling and
tool marks.
5. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted.
6. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.
B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other, or where metal contacts
pressure-treated wood or other corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action or
corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation
as recommended by sheet metal manufacturer or cited sheet metal standard.
1. Underlayment: Where installing sheet metal flashing and trim directly on cementitious or
wood substrates, install underlayment and cover with slip sheet.
C. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space
movement joints at maximum of 10 feet with no joints within 24 inches of corner or intersection.
1. Use lapped expansion joints only where indicated on Drawings.
D. Fasteners: Use fastener sizes that penetrate wood blocking or sheathing not less than 1-1/4
inches for nails and not less than 3/4 inch for wood screws.
E. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible in exposed work and locate to
minimize possibility of leakage. Cover and seal fasteners and anchors as required for a tight
installation.
F. Seal joints as required for watertight construction.
1. Use sealant-filled joints unless otherwise indicated. Embed hooked flanges of joint
members not less than 1 inch into sealant. Form joints to completely conceal sealant.
When ambient temperature at time of installation is between 40 and 70 deg F, set joint
members for 50 percent movement each way. Adjust setting proportionately for installation
at higher ambient temperatures. Do not install sealant-type joints at temperatures below 40
deg F.
G. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pre-tin edges
of sheets with solder to width of 1-1/2 inches; however, reduce pre-tinning where pre-tinned
surface would show in completed Work.
1. Do not use torches for soldering.
2. Heat surfaces to receive solder, and flow solder into joint. Fill joint completely. Completely
remove flux and spatter from exposed surfaces.
H. Rivets: Rivet joints where necessary for strength.
3.04 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements and
cited sheet metal standard. Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to
line, levels, and slopes. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that are permanently watertight
and weather resistant.
B. Pipe or Post Counterflashing: Install counterflashing umbrella with close-fitting collar with top
edge flared for elastomeric sealant, extending minimum of 4 inches over base flashing. Install
stainless-steel draw band and tighten.
C. Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of base flashing.
Insert counterflashing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashing. Extend
counterflashing 4 inches over base flashing. Lap counterflashing joints minimum of 4 inches.
Secure in waterproof manner by means of snap-in installation and sealant or lead wedges and
sealant, interlocking folded seam or blind rivets and sealant, or anchor and washer at 36-inch
centers unless otherwise indicated.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and
HVAC Refurbishment
07 6200 - 6 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND
TRIM
D. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation of roof-penetration flashing with installation of
roofing and other items penetrating roof. Seal with elastomeric sealant and clamp flashing to
pipes where indicated.
3.05 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and
weathering.
B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder.
C. Clean off excess sealants.
D. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim
are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On
completion of sheet metal flashing and trim installation, remove unused materials and clean
finished surfaces as recommended by sheet metal flashing and trim manufacturer. Maintain
sheet metal flashing and trim in clean condition during construction.
E. Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have deteriorated
beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
3.06 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer’s Warranty:
1. Written warranty, signed by manufacturer and Installer, including
a. Repair or replace waterproofing or sheet flashings that do not comply with
requirements; that do not remain watertight; that fail in adhesion, cohesion, or general
durability; or that deteriorate in manner not clearly specified by submitted
waterproofing manufacturer’s data as inherent quality of material for application
indicated.
b. Removal and reinstallation of protection course, drainage panels, insulation and any
materials necessary to repair. Warranty includes replacing materials as necessary.
2. Warranty Period: 10 years after Substantial Completion date.
B. Installer’s Warranty:
1. Written warranty, signed by Installer, including
a. Repair or replace flashing that do not comply with requirements; that do not remain
watertight; that fail in adhesion, cohesion, or general durability; or that deteriorate in
manner not clearly specified by submitted waterproofing manufacturer’s data as
inherent quality of material for application indicated.
b. Removal and reinstallation of protection board, drainage panels, and insulation.
Warranty includes replacing materials as necessary.
c. Repair or replacement, to satisfaction of Owner, of other work or items which may
have been displaced or damaged as consequence of defective work.
d. Make immediate emergency repairs within 48 hours of notice of leakage.
2. Warranty Period: 2 years after Substantial Completion date.
END OF SECTION
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and
HVAC Refurbishment
07 7200 - 1 ROOF ACCESSORIES
SECTION 07 7200
ROOF ACCESSORIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Curbs.
B. Safety rails.
C. Roof penetrations mounting curbs.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. 29 CFR 1910.23 - Ladders; current edition.
B. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or
Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2015, with Editorial Revision
(2016).
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used.
1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.
2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
3. Installation methods.
4. Maintenance requirements.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit detailed layout developed for this project and provide dimensioned
location and number for each type of roof accessory.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ROOF CURBS
A. Roof Curbs Mounting Assemblies: Factory fabricated hollow sheet metal construction, internally
reinforced, and capable of supporting superimposed live and dead loads and designated
equipment load with fully mitered and sealed corner joints welded or mechanically fastened, and
integral counterflashing with top and edges formed to shed water.
1. Roof Curb Mounting Substrate: Curb substrate consists of standing seam metal roof panel
system.
2. Sheet Metal Material:
a. Galvanized Steel: Hot-dip zinc coated steel sheet complying with ASTM
A653/A653M, SS Grade 33 (230); G60 (Z180) coating designation; 18 gage, 0.048
inch (1.21 mm) thick.
3. Fabricate curb bottom and mounting flanges for installation directly on metal roof panel
system to match slope and configuration of system.
a. Extend side flange to next adjacent roof panel seam and conform to seam
configurations and seal connection, providing at least 6 inch (152 mm) clearance
between curb and metal roof panel flange allowing water to properly flow past curb.
b. Where side of curb aligns with metal roof panel flange, attach fasteners on upper
slope of flange to curb connection allowing water to flow past below fasteners, and
seal connection.
c. Maintain at least 12 inch (305 mm) clearance from curb, and lap upper curb flange on
underside of down sloping metal roof panel, and seal connection.
d. Lap lower curb flange overtop of down sloping metal roof panel and seal connection.
4. Provide for layouts and configurations as indicated on drawings.
2.02 ROOF HATCHES AND SKYLIGHT OSHA SAFETY RAIL
A. OSHA railing for Roof Hatch and skylights mounted at curb:
1. See Section 05 5213 - Pipe and Tube Railings.
B. Frames and Curbs: One-piece curb and frame with integral cap flashing to receive roof
flashings; extended bottom flange to suit mounting.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and
HVAC Refurbishment
07 7200 - 2 ROOF ACCESSORIES
1. Insulation: Manufacturer's standard; 1 inch (25 mm) rigid glass fiber, located on outside
face of curb.
2. Curb Height: 12 inches (305 mm) from finished surface of roof, minimum.
C. Safety Railing System: Manufacturer's standard accessory safety rail system mounted directly
to curb. See Section 05 5213 - Pipe and Tube Railings.
1. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.23, with a safety factor of two.
D. Hardware: Steel, zinc coated and chromate sealed, unless otherwise indicated or required by
manufacturer.
1. Lifting Mechanisms: Compression or torsion spring operator with shock absorbers that
automatically opens upon release of latch; capable of lifting covers despite 10 psf (475
kPa) load.
2. Hinges: Heavy duty pintle type.
3. Hold open arm with vinyl-coated handle for manual release.
4. Latch: Upon closing, engage latch automatically and reset manual release.
5. Manual Release: Pull handle on interior.
6. Locking: Padlock hasp on interior.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. Mechanical Contractor
must approve curbs and pads for mechanical equipment.
B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory
preparation before proceeding.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, in manner that maintains roofing system
weather-tight integrity.
END OF SECTION
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and
HVAC Refurbishment
07 8400 - 1 FIRESTOPPING
SECTION 07 8400
FIRESTOPPING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Firestopping systems must be replaced if disturbed. Make note of removal of firestopping if
disturbed.
B. Note fire rated walls/corridors on as-built construction drawings, and maintain fire rating if
disturbed, or removed. Maintain resistive integrity for penetrations through rated assemblies.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM E119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials;
2016a.
B. ASTM E814 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Penetration Firestop Systems; 2013a
(Reapproved 2017).
C. ITS (DIR) - Directory of Listed Products; current edition.
D. FM (AG) - FM Approval Guide; current edition.
E. SCAQMD 1168 - South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168; current edition.
F. UL 1479 - Standard for Fire Tests of Penetration Firestops; Current Edition, Including All
Revisions.
G. UL (DIR) - Online Certifications Directory; current listings at database.ul.com.
H. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; current edition.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire Testing: Provide firestopping assemblies of designs that provide the scheduled fire ratings
when tested in accordance with methods indicated.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in
this section with minimum three years documented experience.
C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section and:
1. Trained by manufacturer.
2. Verification of at least five satisfactorily completed projects of comparable size and type.
1.04 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Conform to firestopping manufacturer's recommendations for temperature and conditions
during and after installation; maintain minimum temperature before, during, and for three days
after installation of materials.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Firestopping Manufacturers:
1. Hilti, Inc: www.us.hilti.com/#sle.
2. Tremco Commercial Sealants & Waterproofing; TREMstop Acrylic:
www.tremcosealants.com/#sle.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Firestopping Materials: Any materials meeting requirements.
B. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content: Provide products having VOC content lower than
that required by SCAQMD 1168.
C. Primers, Sleeves, Forms, Insulation, Packing, Stuffing, and Accessories: Provide type of
materials as required for tested firestopping assembly.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and
HVAC Refurbishment
07 8400 - 2 FIRESTOPPING
2.03 FIRESTOPPING ASSEMBLY REQUIREMENTS
A. Through Penetration Firestopping: Use system that has been tested according to ASTM E814
to have fire resistance F Rating equal to required fire rating of penetrated assembly.
1. Temperature Rise: Provide systems that have been tested to show T Rating as indicated.
2. Air Leakage: Provide systems that have been tested to show L Rating as indicated.
3. Watertightness: Provide systems that have been tested to show W Rating as indicated.
4. Listing by FM (AG), ITS (DIR), UL (DIR), or UL (FRD) in their certification directories will be
considered evidence of successful testing.
2.04 FIRESTOPPING PENETRATIONS THROUGH GYPSUM BOARD WALLS
2.05 FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS
A. Firestopping: Any material meeting requirements.
1. Fire Ratings: Use system that is listed by FM (AG), ITS (DIR), or UL (FRD) and tested in
accordance with ASTM E814, ASTM E119, or UL 1479 with F Rating equal to fire rating of
penetrated assembly and minimum T Rating Equal to F Rating and in compliance with
other specified requirements.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify openings are ready to receive the work of this section.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrate surfaces of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material, or other materials that could
adversely affect bond of firestopping material.
B. Remove incompatible materials that could adversely affect bond.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install materials in manner described in fire test report and in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions, completely closing openings.
END OF SECTION
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and
HVAC Refurbishment
07 9200 - 1 JOINT SEALANTS
SECTION 07 9200
JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Nonsag gunnable joint sealants.
B. Self-leveling pourable joint sealants.
C. Joint backings and accessories.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM C661 - Standard Test Method for Indentation Hardness of Elastomeric-Type Sealants by
Means of a Durometer; 2015.
B. ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2018.
C. ASTM C1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2016.
D. ASTM C1521 - Standard Practice for Evaluating Adhesion of Installed Weatherproofing Sealant
Joints; 2013.
E. ASTM D412 - Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic
Elastomers--Tension; 2016.
F. SCAQMD 1168 - South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168; current edition.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data for Sealants: Submit manufacturer's technical data sheets for each product to be
used, that includes the following.
1. Physical characteristics, including movement capability, VOC content, hardness, cure time,
and color availability.
2. List of backing materials approved for use with the specific product.
3. Substrates that product is known to satisfactorily adhere to and with which it is compatible.
4. Substrates the product should not be used on.
B. Field Quality Control Plan: Submit at least two weeks prior to start of installation.
C. Installation Log: Submit filled out log for each length or instance of sealant installed.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in
this section with minimum three years documented experience.
B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section and with at
least three years of documented experience.
C. Testing Agency Qualifications: Independent firm specializing in performing testing and
inspections of the type specified in this section.
D. Field Quality Control Plan:
1. Field testing agency's qualifications.
2. Field Quality Control Log Form: Show same data fields as on Preinstallation Field
Adhesion Test Log, with known information filled out and lines for multiple tests per
sealant/substrate combinations; include visual inspection and specified field testing; allow
for possibility that more tests than minimum specified may be necessary.
1.05 WARRANTY
A. Correct defective work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion.
B. Warranty: Include coverage for installed sealants and accessories that fail to achieve
watertight seal , exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and
HVAC Refurbishment
07 9200 - 2 JOINT SEALANTS
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Non-Sag Sealants: Permits application in joints on vertical surfaces without sagging or
slumping.
1. Bostik Inc: www.bostik-us.com.
2. Fortifiber Building Systems Group: www.fortifiber.com/#sle.
3. Hilti, Inc: www.us.hilti.com/#sle.
4. Sika Corporation: www.usa-sika.com/#sle.
5. Tremco Commercial Sealants & Waterproofing: www.tremcosealants.com/#sle.
2.02 JOINT SEALANT APPLICATIONS
A. Scope:
1. Exterior Joints: Seal open joints, whether or not the joint is indicated on drawings, unless
specifically indicated not to be sealed. Exterior joints to be sealed include, but are not
limited to, the following items.
a. Wall expansion and control joints.
b. Joints between door, window, and other frames and adjacent construction.
c. Joints between different exposed materials.
d. Openings below ledge angles in masonry.
e. Other joints indicated below.
2. Interior Joints: Do not seal interior joints unless specifically indicated to be sealed. Interior
joints to be sealed include, but are not limited to, the following items.
a. Joints between door, window, and other frames and adjacent construction.
b. Other joints indicated below.
3. Do not seal the following types of joints.
a. Intentional weepholes in masonry.
b. Joints indicated to be treated with manufactured expansion joint cover or some other
type of sealing device.
c. Joints where sealant is specified to be provided by manufacturer of product to be
sealed.
d. Joints where installation of sealant is specified in another section.
e. Joints between suspended panel ceilings/grid and walls.
B. Type 1 - Exterior Joints: Use non-sag non-staining silicone sealant, unless otherwise indicated.
2.03 JOINT SEALANTS - GENERAL
A. Sealants and Primers: Provide products having lower volatile organic compound (VOC) content
than indicated in SCAQMD 1168.
2.04 NONSAG JOINT SEALANTS
A. Type 1 - Non-Staining Silicone Sealant: ASTM C920, Grade NS, Uses M and A; not expected
to withstand continuous water immersion or traffic.
1. Dirt Pick-Up: Reduced dirt pick-up compared to other silicone sealants.
2. Hardness Range: 15 to 35, Shore A, when tested in accordance with ASTM C661.
3. Color: Match adjacent finished surfaces.
4. Manufacturers:
a. Tremco Commercial Sealants & Waterproofing; Spectrem 1:
www.tremcosealants.com/#sle.
b. Tremco Commercial Sealants & Waterproofing; Spectrem 2:
www.tremcosealants.com/#sle.
c. Tremco Commercial Sealants & Waterproofing; Spectrem 3:
www.tremcosealants.com/#sle.
d. Tremco Commercial Sealants & Waterproofing; Spectrem 4-TS:
www.tremcosealants.com/#sle.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and
HVAC Refurbishment
07 9200 - 3 JOINT SEALANTS
e. Tremco Commercial Sealants & Waterproofing; Tremsil 200:
www.tremcosealants.com/#sle.
f. Tremco Commercial Sealants & Waterproofing; Tremsil 400:
www.tremcosealants.com/#sle.
g. Provide per roofing manufacturer's recommendations, if adjacent to roofing..
2.05 SELF-LEVELING SEALANTS
A. Type 2 - Self-Leveling Silicone Sealant: ASTM C920, Grade P, Uses M and A; single or
multicomponent, explicitly approved by manufacturer for traffic exposure when recessed below
traffic surface; not expected to withstand continuous water immersion.
1. Movement Capability: Plus 100 percent, minus 50 percent, minimum.
2. Manufacturers:
a. Tremco Commercial Sealants & Waterproofing; Spectrem 900SL:
www.tremcosealants.com/#sle.
b. Coordinate with manufacturer/roofing manufacturer's recommendations..
2.06 ACCESSORIES
A. Backer Rod: Cylindrical cellular foam rod with surface that sealant will not adhere to,
compatible with specific sealant used, and recommended by backing and sealant
manufacturers for specific application.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Nomaco, Inc; HBR: www.nomaco.com/#sle.
B. Backing Tape: Self-adhesive polyethylene tape with surface that sealant will not adhere to and
recommended by tape and sealant manufacturers for specific application.
C. Primers: Type recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application; non-staining.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that joints are ready to receive work.
B. Verify that backing materials are compatible with sealants.
C. Verify that backer rods are of the correct size.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Remove loose materials and foreign matter that could impair adhesion of sealant.
B. Clean joints, and prime as necessary, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Perform preparation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C1193.
D. Mask elements and surfaces adjacent to joints from damage and disfigurement due to sealant
work; be aware that sealant drips and smears may not be completely removable.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Perform work in accordance with sealant manufacturer's requirements for preparation of
surfaces and material installation instructions.
B. Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C1193.
C. Install bond breaker backing tape where backer rod cannot be used.
D. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags, and without
getting sealant on adjacent surfaces.
E. Do not install sealant when ambient temperature is outside manufacturer's recommended
temperature range, or will be outside that range during the entire curing period, unless
manufacturer's approval is obtained and instructions are followed.
F. Nonsag Sealants: Tool surface concave, unless otherwise indicated; remove masking tape
immediately after tooling sealant surface.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and
HVAC Refurbishment
07 9200 - 4 JOINT SEALANTS
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Remove and replace failed portions of sealants using same materials and procedures as
indicated for original installation.
END OF SECTION
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and
HVAC Refurbishment
08 6200 - 1 UNIT SKYLIGHTS
SECTION 08 6200
UNIT SKYLIGHTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Thermoformed plastic skylights with integral frame, coordinate curb mounted railing with
structural and coordinate manufacturer requirements for mounting.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 - North American Fenestration Standard/Specification for
windows, doors, and skylights; 2017.
B. ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads and Associated Criteria for Buildings and Other Structures;
2016.
C. ASHRAE Std 90.1 I-P - Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings;
2013, Including All Amendments and Errata.
D. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2014.
E. ASTM E2112 - Standard Practice for Installation of Exterior Windows, Doors and Skylights;
2007 (Reapproved 2016).
F. UL (DIR) - Online Certifications Directory; current listings at database.ul.com.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. See General Provisions, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide structural, thermal, and daylighting performance values.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate configurations, dimensions, locations, fastening methods, and
installation details.
D. Grade Substantiation: Prior to submitting shop drawings or starting fabrication, submit one of
the following showing compliance with specified grade:
1. Evidence of AAMA Certification.
2. Evidence of WDMA Certification.
3. Evidence of CSA Certification.
4. Test report(s) by independent testing agency itemizing compliance and acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in
this section with not less than three years documented experience.
B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified and with
at least three years documented experience.
1.05 WARRANTY
A. Provide five year manufacturer warranty, including coverage for leakage due to defective
skylight materials or construction.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Unit Skylights(square and round):(PLEASE NOTE PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS)
1. Wasco Products Inc; Curb Mount Unit: www.wascoskylights.com/sle.
2. Pyramid skylights by Bristolite or approved equal. AL-CM-2-P.
2.02 UNIT SKYLIGHTS
A. Unit Skylights: Factory-assembled glazing in aluminum frame, free of visual distortion, and
weathertight.
1. Shape: per plan.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and
HVAC Refurbishment
08 6200 - 2 UNIT SKYLIGHTS
2.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide unit skylights that comply with the following:
1. Grade: AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 requirements for specific skylight type:
2. Allow for expansion and contraction within system components caused by a cycling
surface temperature range of 170 degrees F (95 degrees C) without causing detrimental
effects to system or components.
3. For Plastic curb mounted skylights, the skylight must meet or exceed the following: Max U
factor must be 0.88, Area weighted performance rating 0.64 and maximum SRR% shall be
5%.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A. Anchorage Devices: Type recommended by manufacturer, exposed to view.
B. Counterflashings: Same metal type and finish as skylight frame.
C. Protective Back Coating: Zinc molybdate alkyd.
D. Sealant: Elastomeric, silicone or polyurethane, compatible with material being sealed .
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install skylight units and mount securely to curb assembly; install counterflashing as required.
B. Apply sealant to achieve watertight assembly.
3.02 CLEANING
A. Remove protective material from prefinished aluminum surfaces.
B. Wash down exposed surfaces; wipe surfaces clean.
C. Remove excess sealant.
END OF SECTION
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and
HVAC Refurbishment
09 5100 - 1 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
SECTION 09 5100
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. When damaged, replace Suspended metal grid ceiling system to match existing.
B. When damaged, replace Acoustical Ceiling Tile, match existing.
C. Damage shall be any broken tile, or tile where surface is cosmetically damaged.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM C636/C636M - Standard Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for
Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panels; 2013.
B. ASTM E580/E580M - Standard Practice for Installation of Ceiling Suspension Systems for
Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels in Areas Subject to Earthquake Ground Motions; 2017.
C. ASTM E1264 - Standard Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products; 2014.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. See General Provisions for submittal procedures.
B. Samples: Submit two full size samples illustrating material and finish of acoustical units to show
material will match existing.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT APPLICABLE)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.
B. Verify that layout of hangers will not interfere with other work.
3.02 INSTALLATION - SUSPENSION SYSTEM
A. Rigidly secure system, including integral mechanical and electrical components, for maximum
deflection of 1:360.
B. Install after major above-ceiling work is complete. Coordinate the location of hangers with other
work.
C. Hang suspension system independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit. Where
carrying members are spliced, avoid visible displacement of face plane of adjacent members.
D. Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers, reinforce the nearest
affected hangers and related carrying channels to span the extra distance.
E. Do not support components on main runners or cross runners if weight causes total dead load
to exceed deflection capability.
F. Support fixture loads using supplementary hangers located within 6 inches (150 mm) of each
corner, or support components independently.
G. Do not eccentrically load system or induce rotation of runners.
3.03 INSTALLATION - ACOUSTICAL UNITS
A. Install acoustical units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Fit acoustical units in place, free from damaged edges or other defects detrimental to
appearance and function.
C. Fit border trim neatly against abutting surfaces.
D. Install units after above-ceiling work is complete.
E. Install acoustical units level, in uniform plane, and free from twist, warp, and dents.
F. Cutting Acoustical Units:
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and
HVAC Refurbishment
09 5100 - 2 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
1. Make field cut edges of same profile as factory edges.
END OF SECTION
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and
HVAC Refurbishment
09 9000 - 1 PAINTING AND COATING
SECTION 09 9000
PAINTING AND COATING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Surface preparation and field painting of exposed exterior items and surfaces.Paint exposed
concrete at parapet areas. Match existing color painted at top of parapet.Prime plus two coats
exterior paint for concrete surfaces.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM D16 - Standard Terminology for Paint, Related Coatings, Materials, and Applications;
2016.
B. CAL (CDPH SM) - Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical
Emissions From Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers; 2017, v1.2.
C. CARB (SCM) - Suggested Control Measure for Architectural Coatings; California Air Resources
Board; 2007.
D. SCAQMD 1113 - South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1113; current edition.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each paint system indicated, including:
1. Material List: An inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate each material and
cross reference specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify each material by
manufacturer's catalog number and general classification.
2. Preparation instructions and recommendations.
3. Manufacturer's Information: Manufacturer's technical information, including label analysis
and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each coating material.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in applying paints and coatings similar
in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this project, whose work has resulted in
applications with a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating parts,
and labels.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to project site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers
bearing manufacturer's name and label.
B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum
ambient temperature of 45 degrees F (7 degrees C). Maintain storage containers in a clean
condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits
recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under
environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.
B. Apply waterborne paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air
are between 50 degrees F (10 degrees C) and 90 degrees F (32 degrees C).
C. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding
air are between 45 degrees F (7 degrees C) and 95 degrees F (35 degrees C).
D. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or
at temperatures less than 5 degrees F (3 degrees C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet
surfaces.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and
HVAC Refurbishment
09 9000 - 2 PAINTING AND COATING
1. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are
enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by manufacturer during application
and drying periods.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis of Design Manufacturer: PPG Paints, 400 Bertha Lamme Drive Cranberry, PA 16066.
Toll Free Tel: 888-PPG-IDEA. Web: www.ppgpaints.com/#sle.
2.02 PAINT MATERIALS - GENERAL
A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, and finish-coat materials that are
compatible with one another and with the substrates indicated under conditions of service and
application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
B. VOC Classification: Provide high-performance coating materials, including primers, undercoats,
and finish-coat materials, that meet the applicable local, state or federal VOC requirements.
2.03 EXTERIOR PRIMERS
A. Exterior Concrete and Masonry Primer: Factory-formulated alkali-resistant acrylic-latex primer
for exterior application.
1. PPG Paints; 17-921 Seal Grip Acrylic Universal Primer (84 g/L VOC).
a. Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils (0.041 mm).
2.04 EXTERIOR FINISH COATS
A. Exterior Flat Acrylic Paint: Factory-formulated flat acrylic-emulsion latex paint for exterior
application.
1. PPG Paints; 2210-0100G Series Ultra-Hide 150 Exterior 100 percent Acrylic Latex Flat
Paint (less than 50 g/L VOC).
a. Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils (0.036 mm).
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.
B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory
preparation before proceeding.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting
fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or
impossible because of size or weight of the item, provide surface-applied protection before
surface preparation and painting.
1. After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items removed using
workers skilled in the trades involved.
B. Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean substrates of substances
that could impair bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease before cleaning.
1. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process
will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces.
C. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's
written instructions for each substrate condition and as specified.
1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime.
2. Cementitious Substrates: Prepare concrete, brick, concrete masonry block, and cement
plaster surfaces to be coated. Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and
release agents. Roughen as required to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers have been
used to improve curing, use mechanical methods to prepare surfaces.
a. Use abrasive blast-cleaning methods if recommended by coating manufacturer.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and
HVAC Refurbishment
09 9000 - 3 PAINTING AND COATING
b. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing appropriate tests.
If surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause the finish paint to blister and burn, correct
this condition before application. Do not coat surfaces if moisture content exceeds
that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.
D. Material Preparation: Carefully mix and prepare coating materials according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying coatings in a clean condition, free of
foreign materials and residue.
2. Stir materials before applying to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required
during application. Do not stir surface film into the material. Remove film and, if necessary,
strain coating material before using.
3. Use only the type of thinners approved by manufacturer and only within recommended
limits.
4. Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to simplify identification of each coat when
multiple coats of same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the finish
coat, but provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate
coat.
3.03 APPLICATION
A. General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use applicators and
techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied.
B. Application Procedures: Apply coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
1. The number of coats and film thickness required is the same regardless of application
method.
2. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove,
refinish, or recoat work that does not comply with specified requirements.
END OF SECTION
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 0500 - 1 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
SECTION 23 0500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and General Provisions apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems.
2. Transition fittings.
3. Dielectric fittings.
4. Mechanical sleeve seals.
5. Sleeves.
6. Escutcheons.
7. Grout.
8. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections.
9. Painting and finishing.
10. Concrete bases.
11. Supports and anchorages.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings,
unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.
B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied
spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.
C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient
temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.
D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by
building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in duct shafts.
E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions
and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 0500 - 2 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
F. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials:
1. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic.
2. CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic.
3. PE: Polyethylene plastic.
4. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.
G. The following are industry abbreviations for rubber materials:
1. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.
2. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Transition fittings.
2. Dielectric fittings.
3. Mechanical sleeve seals.
4. Escutcheons.
B. Welding certificates.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."
B. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping."
2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved
and that certification is current.
C. Electrical Characteristics for Mechanical Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical
characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If
minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping,
storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.
B. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 0500 - 3 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of
construction, to allow for mechanical installations.
B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and other structural components as they
are constructed.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
manufacturers specified.
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
manufacturers specified.
2.2 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS
A. Refer to individual Division 23 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining methods.
B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.
2.3 JOINING MATERIALS
A. Refer to individual Division 23 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.
B. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system
contents.
1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless
thickness or specific material is indicated.
a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges.
b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.
2. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated; and full-face or
ring type, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813.
F. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BcuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty brazing, unless otherwise indicated; and AWS A5.8, BAg1, silver alloy for refrigerant piping,
unless otherwise indicated.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 0500 - 4 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
G. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
H. Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping:
1. ABS Piping: ASTM D 2235.
2. CPVC Piping: ASTM F 493.
3. PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656.
4. PVC to ABS Piping Transition: ASTM D 3138.
I. Fiberglass Pipe Adhesive: As furnished or recommended by pipe manufacturer.
2.4 TRANSITION FITTINGS
A. AWWA Transition Couplings: Same size as, and with pressure rating at least equal to and with
ends compatible with, piping to be joined.
1. Available Manufacturers:
a. Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co. b. Dresser Industries, Inc.; DMD Div.
c. Ford Meter Box Company, Incorporated (The); Pipe Products Div. d. JCM Industries. e. Smith-Blair, Inc. f. Viking Johnson.
2. Underground Piping NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Manufactured fitting or coupling.
3. Underground Piping NPS 2 and Larger: AWWA C219, metal sleeve-type coupling.
4. Aboveground Pressure Piping: Pipe fitting.
B. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Fittings: CPVC and PVC one-piece fitting with manufacturer's
Schedule 80 equivalent dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert, and one solvent-cement-joint end.
1. Available Manufacturers:
a. Eslon Thermoplastics.
C. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Adaptors: One-piece fitting with manufacturer's SDR 11 equivalent dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert, and one solvent-cement-joint end.
1. Available Manufacturers:
a. Thompson Plastics, Inc.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 0500 - 5 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
D. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Unions: MSS SP-107, [CPVC] [PVC] [CPVC and PVC] four-part union. Include brass end, solvent-cement-joint end, rubber O-ring, and union nut.
1. Available Manufacturers:
a. NIBCO INC.
b. NIBCO, Inc.; Chemtrol Div.
2.5 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
A. Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder-joint, plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials.
B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.
C. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly, for 250-psig minimum working pressure at 180 deg F.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Capitol Manufacturing Co. b. Central Plastics Company.
c. Eclipse, Inc. d. Epco Sales, Inc.
e. Hart Industries, International, Inc. f. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
g. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Wilkins Div.
D. Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly, for 150- or 300-psig
minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures.
1. Available Manufacturers:
a. Capitol Manufacturing Co. b. Central Plastics Company.
c. Epco Sales, Inc. d. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
E. Dielectric-Flange Kits: Companion-flange assembly for field assembly. Include flanges, full-face- or ring-type neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or polyethylene bolt sleeves, phenolic
washers, and steel backing washers.
1. Available Manufacturers:
a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. b. Calpico, Inc.
c. Central Plastics Company. d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.
2. Separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts shall have 150- or 300-psig minimum working pressure where required to suit system pressures.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 0500 - 6 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
F. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; threaded ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.
1. Available Manufacturers:
a. Calpico, Inc.
b. Lochinvar Corp.
G. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining;
plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.
1. Available Manufacturers:
a. Perfection Corp. b. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.
c. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Co., Inc.
2.6 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS
A. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between pipe and sleeve.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Thunderline Link Seal
b. Calpico, Inc. c. Metraflex Co.
2. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.
3. Pressure Plates: Stainless steel. Include two for each sealing element.
4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates to
sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.
2.7 SLEEVES
A. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint.
B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.
C. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends
and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include
clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing.
1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws.
E. Molded PVC: Permanent, with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.
F. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.
G. Molded PE: Reusable, PE, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth-outer surface with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 0500 - 7 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
2.8 ESCUTCHEONS
A. Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely
fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers opening.
B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with polished chrome-plated finish.
C. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With set screw.
1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated.
D. Split-Casting, Cast-Brass Type: With concealed hinge and set screw.
1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated.
E. One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With set screw and chrome-plated finish.
F. Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Type: With concealed hinge, set screw, and chrome-plated finish.
G. One-Piece, Floor-Plate Type: Cast-iron floor plate.
H. Split-Casting, Floor-Plate Type: Cast brass with concealed hinge and set screw.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 23 Sections specifying piping
systems.
B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping
systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.
C. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.
D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right
angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.
E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.
F. Install piping to permit valve servicing.
G. Install piping at indicated slopes.
H. Install piping free of sags and bends.
I. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
J. Install piping to allow application of insulation.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 0500 - 8 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
K. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.
L. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors according to the following:
1. New Piping:
a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-pattern type. b. Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated
finish. c. Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type with spring clips. d. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated finish. e. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel type.
f. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated finish. g. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated finish.
h. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, cast-brass type. i. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, floor-plate type.
M. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.
N. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by removable PE sleeves.
O. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls and concrete floor and roof slabs.
P. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board partitions, and concrete floor and roof slabs.
1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.
a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or other
wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified.
2. Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed.
3. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between
sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials:
a. Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than NPS 6.
b. Steel Sheet Sleeves: For pipes NPS 6 and larger, penetrating gypsum-board partitions.
c. Stack Sleeve Fittings: For pipes penetrating floors with membrane waterproofing. Secure flashing between clamping flanges. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to
extend sleeve to 2 inches above finished floor level. Refer to Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashing.
1) Seal space outside of sleeve fittings with grout.
4. Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or
pipe insulation, using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Refer to Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials and installation.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 0500 - 9 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
Q. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between
pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches in diameter.
2. Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches and larger in diameter.
3. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements required
for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure
plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.
R. Underground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Seal pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
1. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve
seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.
S. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Refer to Division 7 Section
"Firestopping" for materials.
T. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.
U. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in requirements.
3.2 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 23 Sections
specifying piping systems.
B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.
D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using
lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.
E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube"
Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.
F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut
threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified.
2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 0500 - 10 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
G. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.
H. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.
I. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following:
1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements.
2. ABS Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2235 and ASTM D 2661 Appendixes.
3. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix.
4. PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number ASTM D 1785, PVC pipe and PVC socket fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other-than-schedule-number PVC pipe and socket
fittings according to ASTM D 2855.
5. PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855.
6. PVC to ABS Nonpressure Transition Fittings: Join according to ASTM D 3138 Appendix.
J. Plastic Pressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3139.
K. Plastic Nonpressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3212.
L. PE Piping Heat-Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or
paper towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657.
1. Plain-End Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion.
2. Plain-End Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion.
M. Fiberglass Bonded Joints: Prepare pipe ends and fittings, apply adhesive, and join according
to pipe manufacturer's written instructions.
3.3 PIPING CONNECTIONS
A. Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection
to each piece of equipment.
2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final
connection to each piece of equipment.
3. Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials of
dissimilar metals.
4. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping
materials of dissimilar metals.
3.4 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are not indicated.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 0500 - 11 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other
installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.
D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.
3.5 PAINTING
A. Painting of mechanical systems, equipment, and components is specified in Division 9.
B. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials and procedures to match original factory finish.
3.6 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES
A. Refer to Division 5 Section "Pipe and Tube Railings" for structural steel.
B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor mechanical materials and equipment.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.
END OF SECTION
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 0513 - 1 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC
SECTION 23 0513 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and General Provisions apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes basic requirements for factory installed motors.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Factory-Installed Motor: A motor installed by motorized-equipment manufacturer as a
component of equipment.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that motors, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 23 Section " Vibration and
Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment”. Include the following:
1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of
assembled components or on calculation.
a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified." b. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any
parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."
2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.
B. Qualification Data: For testing agency.
C. Source quality-control test reports.
D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For motors to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 0513 - 2 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices and features that comply
with the following:
1. Compatible with the following:
a. Magnetic controllers. b. Multispeed controllers.
c. Reduced-voltage controllers. d. Variable speed drive.
2. Designed and labeled for use with variable frequency controllers, and suitable for use throughout speed range without overheating.
3. Matched to torque and horsepower requirements of the load.
4. Matched to ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MOTOR REQUIREMENTS
A. Motor requirements apply to factory installed motors except as follows:
1. Different ratings, performance, or characteristics for motor are specified in another Section.
2. Motorized-equipment manufacturer requires ratings, performance, or characteristics, other
than those specified in this Section, to meet performance specified.
2.2 MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS
A. Motors 3/4 HP and Larger: Three phase.
B. Motors Smaller Than 3/4 HP: Single phase.
C. Frequency Rating: 60 Hz.
D. Voltage Rating: NEMA standard voltage selected to operate on nominal circuit voltage to which
motor is connected.
E. Service Factor: 1.15 for open drip-proof and totally enclosed motors.
F. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 105 deg F and at altitude of 3300 feet above sea level.
G. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating
sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor.
H. Enclosure:
1. Open drip-proof (ODP) for indoor applications.
2. Totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) for outdoor applications.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 0513 - 3 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC
2.3 POLYPHASE MOTORS
A. Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor.
B. Efficiency: Premium, as defined in NEMA MG 1.
C. Stator: Copper windings, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Multi-speed motors shall have separate winding for each speed.
D. Rotor: Squirrel cage, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Bearings: Double-shielded, pre-lubricated ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.
F. Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating, unless otherwise indicated.
G. Insulation: Class F, unless otherwise indicated.
H. Code Letter Designation:
1. Motors 15 HP and Larger: NEMA starting Code F or Code G.
2. Motors Smaller Than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic.
I. Enclosure: Cast iron for motors 7.5 hp and larger; rolled steel for motors smaller than 7.5 hp.
1. Finish: Gray enamel.
2.4 POLYPHASE MOTORS WITH ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Motors Used with Reduced-Inrush Controllers: Match wiring connection requirements for
controller with required motor leads. Provide terminals in motor terminal box, suited to control method.
B. Motors Used with Variable Frequency Controllers: Ratings, characteristics, and features coordinated with and approved by controller manufacturer.
1. Designed with critical vibration frequencies outside operating range of controller output.
2. Temperature Rise: Matched to rating for Class B insulation.
3. Insulation: Class H.
4. Thermal Protection: Comply with NEMA MG 1 requirements for thermally protected
motors.
2.5 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS
A. Type: One of the following, to suit starting torque and requirements of specific motor application:
1. Permanent-split capacitor.
2. Split-phase start, capacitor run.
3. Capacitor start, capacitor run.
B. Shaded-Pole Motors: For motors 1/20 hp and smaller only.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 0513 - 4 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC
C. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor insulation. Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns to normal range.
D. Bearings: Ball type for belt-connected motors and other motors with high radial forces on motor shaft; sealed, prelubricated-sleeve type for other single-phase motors.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas to receive motors for compliance with requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Examine roughing-in for conduit systems to verify actual locations of conduit connections before motor installation.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
END OF SECTION
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 0529 - 1 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
SECTION 23 0529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and General Provisions apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following hangers and supports for mechanical system piping and equipment:
1. Steel pipe hangers and supports.
2. Trapeze pipe hangers.
3. Metal framing systems.
4. Thermal-hanger shield inserts.
5. Fastener systems.
6. Pipe stands.
7. Pipe positioning systems.
8. Equipment supports.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society for The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.
B. Terminology: As defined in MSS SP-90, "Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and Supports."
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Delegated Design: Design trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports, including
comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.
B. Structural Performance: Hangers and supports for HVAC piping and equipment shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated.
1. Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe stands, capable of supporting combined weight of support systems, system contents, and test water.
2. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components.
3. Design seismic-restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 0529 - 2 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Steel pipe hangers and supports.
2. Thermal-hanger shield inserts.
3. Powder-actuated fastener systems.
4. Pipe positioning systems.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following:
1. Trapeze pipe hangers. Include Product Data for components.
2. Metal framing systems. Include Product Data for components.
3. Pipe stands. Include Product Data for components.
4. Equipment supports.
C. Welding certificates.
D. Calculations: Complete calculations required to provide support system for vertical and lateral loads as required by the California Building code – 2016. Seismic loads shall be determined in accordance with the California Building Code – 2016.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."
2. AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code--Aluminum."
3. AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel."
4. AWS D1.4, "Structural Welding Code--Reinforcing Steel."
5. ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
manufacturers specified.
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 0529 - 3 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
2.2 STEEL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components. Refer to Part 3
"Hanger and Support Applications" Article for where to use specific hanger and support types.
B. Available Manufacturers:
1. AAA Technology & Specialties Co., Inc.
2. Bergen-Power Pipe Supports.
3. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
4. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc.
5. Empire Industries, Inc.
6. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co.
7. Hilti, Inc.
8. Globe Pipe Hanger Products, Inc.
9. Grinnell Corp.
10. GS Metals Corp.
11. National Pipe Hanger Corporation.
12. PHD Manufacturing, Inc.
13. PHS Industries, Inc.
14. Piping Technology & Products, Inc.
15. Tolco Inc.
C. Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped.
D. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.
E. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion for support of
bearing surface of piping.
2.3 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS
A. Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from structural-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-bolts.
2.4 METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS
A. Description: MFMA-3, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made of steel channels
and other components.
B. Available Manufacturers:
1. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
2. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co.; ERISTRUT Div.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 0529 - 4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
3. GS Metals Corp.
4. Power-Strut Div.; Tyco International, Ltd.
5. Thomas & Betts Corporation.
6. Tolco Inc.
7. Unistrut Corp.; Tyco International, Ltd.
C. Coatings: Manufacturer's standard finish, unless bare metal surfaces are indicated.
D. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.
2.5 THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS
A. Description: 100-psig- minimum, compressive-strength insulation insert encased in sheet metal shield.
B. Available Manufacturers:
1. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc.
2. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co.
3. PHS Industries, Inc.
4. Pipe Shields, Inc.
5. Rilco Manufacturing Company, Inc.
6. Value Engineered Products, Inc.
C. Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium
silicate with vapor barrier.
D. Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping: Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium
silicate.
E. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe.
F. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.
G. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient
air temperature.
2.6 FASTENER SYSTEMS
A. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and
building materials where used.
1. Available Manufacturers:
a. Hilti, Inc. b. ITW Ramset/Red Head.
c. Masterset Fastening Systems, Inc. d. MKT Fastening, LLC.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 0529 - 5 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
e. Powers Fasteners.
B. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type [zinc-coated] [stainless] steel, for use in
hardened portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.
1. Manufacturers:
a. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
b. Empire Industries, Inc. c. Hilti, Inc. d. ITW Ramset/Red Head. e. MKT Fastening, LLC. f. Powers Fasteners.
2.7 PIPE STAND FABRICATION
A. Pipe Stands, General: Shop or field-fabricated assemblies made of manufactured corrosion-resistant components to support outdoor and roof-mounted piping.
B. Compact Pipe Stand: One-piece plastic unit with integral-rod-roller, pipe clamps, or V-shaped cradle to support pipe, for roof installation without membrane penetration.
1. Available Manufacturers:
a. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co.
b. MIRO Industries.
C. Low-Type, Single-Pipe Stand: One-piece plastic base unit with plastic roller, for roof installation
without membrane penetration.
1. Available Manufacturers:
a. MIRO Industries.
D. High-Type, Single-Pipe Stand: Assembly of base, vertical and horizontal members, and pipe
support, for roof installation without membrane penetration.
1. Available Manufacturers:
a. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co. b. MIRO Industries.
c. Portable Pipe Hangers.
2. Base: Plastic.
3. Vertical Members: Two or more cadmium-plated-steel or stainless-steel, continuous-thread rods.
4. Horizontal Member: Cadmium-plated-steel or stainless-steel rod with plastic or stainless-steel, roller-type pipe support.
E. High-Type, Multiple-Pipe Stand: Assembly of bases, vertical and horizontal members, and pipe supports, for roof installation without membrane penetration.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Portable Pipe Hangers.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 0529 - 6 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
2. Bases: One or more plastic.
3. Vertical Members: Two or more protective-coated-steel channels.
4. Horizontal Member: Protective-coated-steel channel.
5. Pipe Supports: Galvanized-steel, clevis-type pipe hangers.
F. Curb-Mounting-Type Pipe Stands: Shop- or field-fabricated pipe support made from structural-steel shape, continuous-thread rods, and rollers for mounting on permanent stationary roof curb.
2.8 PIPE POSITIONING SYSTEMS
A. Description: IAPMO PS 42, system of metal brackets, clips, and straps for positioning piping in pipe spaces for plumbing fixtures for commercial applications.
B. Available Manufacturers:
1. C & S Mfg. Corp.
2. HOLDRITE Corp.; Hubbard Enterprises.
3. Samco Stamping, Inc.
2.9 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A. Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural-steel
shapes.
2.10 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS
A. Specific hanger and support requirements are specified in Sections specifying piping systems and equipment.
B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.
C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized, metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will not have field-applied finish.
D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing.
E. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.
F. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified
in piping system Sections, install the following types:
1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or
insulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 0529 - 7 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
2. Yoke-Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of 120 to 450 deg F pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 16, requiring up to 4 inches of insulation.
3. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 24, requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches of insulation.
4. Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of cold and hot pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 24, if little or no insulation is required.
5. Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 4, to allow off-center closure for hanger installation before pipe erection.
6. Adjustable Swivel Split- or Solid-Ring Hangers (MSS Type 6): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 8.
7. Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.
8. Adjustable Band Hangers (MSS Type 9): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.
9. Adjustable Swivel-Ring Band Hangers (MSS Type 10): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 2.
10. Split Pipe-Ring with or without Turnbuckle-Adjustment Hangers (MSS Type 11): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/8 to NPS 8.
11. Extension Hinged or 2-Bolt Split Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 12): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/8 to NPS 3.
12. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.
13. Clips (MSS Type 26): For support of insulated pipes not subject to expansion or
contraction.
14. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel
pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange.
15. Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel
pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange and with U-bolt to retain pipe.
16. Adjustable Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion-type support for pipes,
NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 36, if vertical adjustment is required, with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange.
17. Single Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1 to NPS 30, from 2 rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur.
18. Adjustable Roller Hangers (MSS Type 43): For suspension of pipes, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 20, from single rod if horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur.
19. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 42, if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur but vertical adjustment is not
necessary.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 0529 - 8 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
20. Pipe Roll and Plate Units (MSS Type 45): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 24, if small horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur and vertical
adjustment is not necessary.
21. Adjustable Pipe Roll and Base Units (MSS Type 46): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 30, if vertical and lateral adjustment during installation might be required in addition to expansion and contraction.
G. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:
1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to NPS 20.
2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to NPS 20, if longer ends are required for riser clamps.
H. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:
1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads.
2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.
3. Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings.
4. Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types of
building attachments.
5. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.
I. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:
1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.
2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist construction to attach to top flange of structural shape.
3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams, channels, or angles.
4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams.
5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads are
considerable and rod sizes are large.
6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes.
7. Top-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required tangent to flange edge.
8. Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams.
9. Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of steel I-
beams for heavy loads.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 0529 - 9 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
10. Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of steel I-beams for heavy loads, with link extensions.
11. Malleable Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to structural steel.
12. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below, or for suspending from above by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:
a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb. b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb.
c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb.
13. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams.
14. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required.
15. Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to linear
horizontal movement where headroom is limited.
J. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections, install the following types:
1. Steel Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with insulation
that matches adjoining insulation.
2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer to
prevent crushing insulation.
3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.
K. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:
1. Restraint-Control Devices (MSS Type 47): Where indicated to control piping movement.
2. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed 1-
1/4 inches.
3. Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41 roll hanger with
springs.
4. Spring Sway Braces (MSS Type 50): To retard sway, shock, vibration, or thermal
expansion in piping systems.
5. Variable-Spring Hangers (MSS Type 51): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor
to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from hanger.
6. Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit variability
factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from base support.
7. Variable-Spring Trapeze Hangers (MSS Type 53): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from
trapeze support.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 0529 - 10 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
8. Constant Supports: For critical piping stress and if necessary to avoid transfer of stress from one support to another support, critical terminal, or connected equipment. Include auxiliary stops for erection, hydrostatic test, and load-adjustment capability. These supports include the following types:
a. Horizontal (MSS Type 54): Mounted horizontally. b. Vertical (MSS Type 55): Mounted vertically. c. Trapeze (MSS Type 56): Two vertical-type supports and one trapeze member.
L. Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.
M. Comply with MFMA-102 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.
N. Use powder-actuated fasteners or mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building
attachments where required in concrete construction.
O. Use pipe positioning systems in pipe spaces behind plumbing fixtures to support supply and
waste piping for plumbing fixtures.
3.2 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Steel Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building
structure.
B. Trapeze Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange for
grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping and support together on field-fabricated trapeze pipe hangers.
1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above for individual
pipe hangers.
2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel shapes selected for loads being supported.
Weld steel according to AWS D1.1.
C. Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping and support
together on field-assembled metal framing systems.
D. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.
E. Fastener System Installation:
1. Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs less than
4 inches thick in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners according to
powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual.
2. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely
cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.
F. Pipe Stand Installation:
1. Pipe Stand Types except Curb-Mounting Type: Assemble components and mount on smooth roof surface. Do not penetrate roof membrane.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 0529 - 11 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
2. Curb-Mounting-Type Pipe Stands: Assemble components or fabricate pipe stand and mount on permanent, stationary roof curb. Refer to Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories"
for curbs.
G. Pipe Positioning System Installation: Install support devices to make rigid supply and waste piping connections to each plumbing fixture. Refer to Division 22000 Section "Plumbing Fixtures" for plumbing fixtures.
H. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories.
I. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.
J. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.
K. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.
L. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 and larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed;
fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.
M. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so piping live and dead loads and stresses
from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.
N. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maximum
pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.1 (for power piping) and ASME B31.9 (for building services piping) are not exceeded.
O. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following:
1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.
a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through insulation.
b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.
c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.1 for power piping and ASME B31.9 for building services piping.
2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.
3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees.
a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.
4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:
a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 0529 - 12 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
b. NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick. c. NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick. d. NPS 8 to NPS 14: 24 inches long and 0.075 inch thick. e. NPS 16 to NPS 24: 24 inches long and 0.105 inch thick.
5. Pipes NPS 8 and Larger: Include inserts.
6. Insert Material: Length at least as long as protective shield.
7. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.
3.3 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support equipment above floor.
B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make smooth bearing surface.
C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.
3.4 METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment
supports.
B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be
shop welded because of shipping size limitations.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for shielded metal arc welding, appearance
and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, and with the following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and contours of
welded surfaces match adjacent contours.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe.
B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches.
3.6 PAINTING
A. Touch Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop
painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.
1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.
B. Touch Up: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Division 9.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 0529 - 13 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 0548 - 1 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
SECTION 23 0548 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and General Provisions apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Elastomeric isolation pads and mounts.
2. Restrained elastomeric isolation mounts.
3. Freestanding and restrained spring isolators.
4. Housed spring mounts.
5. Elastomeric hangers.
6. Spring hangers.
7. Spring hangers with vertical-limit stops.
8. Thrust limits.
9. Pipe riser resilient supports.
10. Resilient pipe guides.
11. Seismic snubbers.
12. Restraining cables.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Av: Effective peak velocity related acceleration coefficient.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include load deflection curves for each vibration isolation device.
B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Include the following:
1. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and seismic
restraints and for designing vibration isolation bases. Seismic loads shall be determined in accordance with the California Building Code – 2016.
2. Riser Supports: Include riser diagrams and calculations showing anticipated expansion and contraction at each support point, initial and final loads on building structure, spring
deflection changes, and seismic loads. Include certification that riser system has been examined for excessive stress and that none will exist.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 0548 - 2 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
3.Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication, including anchorages and attachmentsto structure and to supported equipment. Include auxiliary motor slides and rails, baseweights, equipment static loads, power transmission, component misalignment, andcantilever loads.
4.Seismic-Restraint Details: Detail fabrication and attachment of seismic restraints andsnubbers. Show anchorage details and indicate quantity, diameter, and depth ofpenetration of anchors.
5.Submittals for Interlocking Snubbers: Include load deflection curves up to 1/2-inchdeflection in x, y, and z planes.
C.Welding certificates.
D.Air-Mounting System Performance Certification: Include natural frequency, load, and dampingtests performed by an independent laboratory or acoustician.
E.Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that all specifiedequipment will withstand seismic forces identified in "Performance Requirements" Article
above. Include the following:
1.Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of
assembled components or on calculations.
a.The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any
parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified."b.The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any
parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit willbe fully operational after the seismic event."
2.Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate anddescribe mounting and anchorage provisions.
3.Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is basedand their installation requirements.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Seismic-restraint devices shall have horizontal and vertical load testing and analysis and shall
bear anchorage preapproval "R" number, from an agency acceptable to authorities havingjurisdiction, showing maximum seismic-restraint ratings. If preapproved ratings are not
available, submittals based on calculations (including combining shear and tensile loads) tosupport seismic-restraint designs must be prepared and signed and sealed by a qualified
professional engineer. Testing and calculations must include both shear and tensile loads and1 test or analysis at 45 degrees to the weakest mode.
B.Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."
1.6 COORDINATION
A.
B.Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These itemsare specified in Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories."
Not used.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 0548 - 3 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following
requirements apply for product selection:
1. Basis of Design Product: The design for each product is based on manufacturer named on the drawings. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either named product or a comparable equivalent product by on of the other manufacturers specified.
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified.
2.2 VIBRATION ISOLATORS
A. Manufacturers:
1. M.W. Sausse.
2. Mason Industries, Inc.
3. Amber/Booth Company, Inc.
4. Ace Mounting Co., Inc.
2.3 VIBRATION ISOLATION EQUIPMENT
Provide vibration isolation equipment for all mechanical equipment and piping as specified herein and indicated on the drawings. The vibration isolation system shall be installed in a manner to prevent the transmission of vibration to the structure. No rigid connections between rotating or
oscillating equipment or piping and the building will be permitted. Vibration isolation shall be as manufactured by M.W. Sausse and Co., Mason Industries, Amber Booth or equal.
A. General Requirements:
1. Vibration isolation manufacturer shall furnish written instructions covering the installation and
adjustment of all isolators. The manufacturer shall replace any isolation that has been improperly sized. Piping supports in the penthouse equipment areas shall be designed by the
vibration isolation manufacturer.
2. Contractor shall coordinate his work with the other trades. Contractor following him, such as
plastering or electrical, shall be notified and instructed to avoid any contact with his installation that would reduce the effectiveness of the system.
3. Inspections: Vibration isolation manufacturer shall make an inspection of the vibration installation, and inform the Contracting Officer in writing of any necessary corrections and/or
adjustments.
4. All isolators shall be selected to perform their function without undue stress or overloading. All
isolators shall have a method for leveling and have a 1/4" thick ribbed neoprene acoustical pad under the spring baseplate.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 0548 - 4 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
5. All isolators shall be designed to operate in the linear portion of their load versus deflection curve. Load versus deflection curves shall be furnished by the manufacturer, and must be linear over a deflection range of not less than 50 percent above the design deflection. The ratio of lateral to vertical stiffness shall be not less than 0.8 nor greater than 1.5. Isolators shall be designed to be non-resonant with equipment forcing frequencies or support structure natural frequencies. Design isolators for positive anchorage against uplift and overturning.
6. Unless otherwise indicated, all equipment mounted on vibration bases shall have a minimum operating clearance of 1" between structural steel base and floor or support base beneath.
The minimum operating clearance between concrete inertia bases and housekeeping pads shall be 2 inches. Check clearance space after installation to ensure that no debris has been
left to possibly short circuit isolation bases.
7. Bases: Where called for in the specifications and on the drawings, all structural steel bases, including concrete pouring form bases, shall be designed and fabricated by the vibration isolation manufacturer. The concrete for the pouring form bases shall be by others.
8. Vibration isolation shall be manufactured by a single manufacturer. All isolation shall be in strict accordance with the following specifications. The isolation manufacturer shall include in
the submittal the following information:
a. Specific vibration isolators and seismic restraints to be utilized showing compliance with
the specifications, including deflection, free height, and physical characteristics. b. Isolation frame construction for each machine including dimensions, structural member
sizes, support points and restraint locations and details. c. Methods for isolation and restraint of suspended piping, ductwork, and equipment.
d. Methods for guides and isolation of piping risers.
B. Technical Requirements:
1. Isolators shall be designed or treated for resistance to corrosion. Structural steel bases shall be cleaned of welding slag and painted with a coat of red lead primer-finish composed of basic
lead silicon chromate. All nuts, bolts and washers shall be zinc-electroplated.
2. All equipment shall be equipped with seismic restraints in accordance with the requirements of
all governing agencies. These restraints shall be designed and supplied by the vibration isolation manufacturer. Suspended equipment and piping shall be restrained by steel cable.
This cable and the method of installation shall be the responsibility of the contractor. The cable restraints shall be installed in such a manner as to not short circuit the vibration isolation.
The contractor shall submit details for approval.
a. Seismic restraints for pipes and ducts shall be as per the 4 SMACNA Guidelines for
seismic Restraint of Mechanical Systems. b. Seismic restraints for equipment shall be designed to meet the criteria established in the
California Code of Regulations latest edition. c. The manufacturer of Vibration Isolation and Seismic Control Equipment shall have the
following responsibilities: 1) Determine adequate vibration isolation and seismic restraint sizes and
locations. 2) Provide piping and equipment isolation systems and seismic restraints as
scheduled and/or specified. 3) Provide installation instructions and drawings to assure proper installation and
performance.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 0548 - 5 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
e. Seismic restraint calculations signed and stamped by an engineer licensed in the State of California and experienced in the design of isolation and seismic restraint for flexibly
mounted equipment.
C. Products:
1. Vibration Isolator Types:
a. Type A: Air Spring: A complete vibration isolation system consisting of a minimum of
three airsprings, a total of three height sensing valves and associated interconnecting air tubing. Air tubing and connection shall also be provided to a source of compressed air providing a minimum 100 psi. If the building uses a pneumatic control system, the air compressor for that system may be used for this system if it is sized properly. Otherwise, an adequately-sized air compressor is a part of this work. One height control valve shall be provided at each isolator mounting location. If there are two or
more air springs per location, they shall be connected to the outlet of the height control valve in parallel. The air spring shall operate at its normal operating height and the maximum pressure shall not exceed the manufacturer's recommendations. The air system shall maintain an elevation of + 1/8", once adjusted. Height limit stops shall be
provided to preclude more than 1/4" rise in the event of failure. The vertical natural frequency of the airspring system shall not exceed 1.5 Hertz. The ratio of lateral to
vertical stiffness shall meet the general requirements. b. Type B: Unhoused Spring: Springs shall be designed and installed so their ends are parallel before and after installation and during equipment operation. All mounts shall have equipment leveling bolts. Each isolator shall have a steel base plate with
mounting bolt holes and a ribbed or waffled neoprene friction pad permanently adhered to the bottom. The pad shall be 5/16 to 1/2 inch thick, 40 durometer hardness, and
sized for a load of 60 psi. c. Type C: Spring with Seismic Restraint and Vertical Travel Limit: Same as Mount B with
the addition of steel columns on either side of the spring to provide seismic restraint and accommodate vertical travel limit stops. Mount shall resist a seismic acceleration in any
direction of at least 0.5 G or as required by the relevant codes. Travel limit stops shall be capable of serving as blocking during erection of the equipment. A minimum
clearance of 1/4 inch shall be maintained around restraining bolts and between the limit stops and the spring so as not to interfere with the spring action. Each isolator
assembly shall have a friction pad of ribbed or waffled neoprene permanently adhered to the bottom. The pad shall be 5/16 to 1/2 inch thick, 40 durometer hardness, and
sized for a load of 60 psi. d. Type D: Isolator shall be an individual semi-housed steel spring isolator complete with
vertical motion limit stops incorporating seismic restraints, leveling, and ribbed neoprene pad bonded to the baseplate.
e. Type E: Neoprene Pad(s) and Bearing Plate(s): Neoprene pad shall be ribbed or waffled, 5/16 to 1/2 inch thick, 40 durometer, with a minimum 1/16-inch-thick steel
bearing plate on top. Size pad and bearing plate to receive 60 psi load. Provide single or multiple pads and plates in series as specified, with 1/16-inch-thick steel shim
between layers. f. Type F: Spring Hanger: Vibration isolation hangers shall contain a laterally-stable steel
spring set in a neoprene cup manufactured with a bushing to prevent short-circuiting of the hanger rod as it passes through the hanger housing. The cup shall contain a steel
washer designed to properly distribute the spring load on the neoprene and prevent its crushing. Spring diameters and hanger housing lower hole sizes shall be large enough to permit the hanger rod to swing through a 30o arc before contacting the housing. Neoprene cup shall be minimum 1/4 inch thick and maximum 50 durometer.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 0548 - 6 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
g. Type G: Same as "Type F" with the addition of a neoprene element in series to isolate the upper connection. h. Type P3: Neoprene Bushing for Bolt Holes in Pads: Bushings shall be minimum 3/16" thick in all places and maximum 40 durometer. Provide steel washer to distribute bolt head loads to bushing. i. Mount BEQ: Neoprene Mount with Integral Seismic Restraint: A neoprene isolator with
concentric steel elements separated by neoprene no harder than 50 durometer. Mount capable of acting in tension, compression or shear. j. Type C2: Vibration Isolation Curb: Vibration isolation curbs shall be a prefabricated assembly consisting of a lower frame of steel tubes topped by steel springs resting on neoprene pads in turn topped with an upper frame which provides continuous equipment support. Upper frame and spring connections to be adjustable and to
include resilient snubbing to resist wind and seismic forces. Springs to be galvanized, accessible and stable. Springs shall be placed no less than 7' apart along the 2 long sides of the curb. The static deflection of any individual spring shall differ from the others by no more than 10%. It shall be possible to replace individual springs while the
isolated equipment is operating normally, without affecting its performance. Provide "RSC" by Mason or approved equal.
k. Type H3: Felt-lined Clevis Hanger: Clevis hanger to be lined with minimum 1/4" thick felt to prevent the contact between piping and metal parts of hanger. Hangers to be spaced to prevent crushing of the felt liner by more than 1/8".
2. Equipment Rails and Bases:
a. Type 1: Steel Frame for Floor Mounting: Steel frames for floor-mounted equipment
shall consist of structural steel sections sized, spaced, and connected to form a rigid base that will not twist, rack, deform, or deflect in any manner that will negatively affect
the equipment or isolation mounts. Frames shall be adequately sized to support basic equipment units and motors plus any associated pipe elbow supports, duct elbow
supports, electrical control elements, or other components closely related and requiring resilient support in order to prevent vibration transfer to the building structure. Frames
may be rectangular or tee-shaped in plan. The depth of steel frame base members shall be minimum one-tenth the isolator spacing. Frame bases shall include side-
mounting height-saving brackets for attachment to vibration isolators. b. Type 2: Steel Frame for Suspended Equipment: Steel base frames for ceiling-
suspended equipment shall consist of structural steel sections sized, spaced, and connected to form a rigid base that will not twist, rack, deform, or deflect in any manner
that will negatively affect the operation of the supported equipment or vibration isolators. Frames shall be adequately sized to support basic equipment units and motors plus any
associated ducts or pipes or electrical elements closely related and requiring resilient support in order to prevent vibration transfer to the building. The depth of the steel
frame base members shall be no less than one-twentieth the longest dimension of the base. Equipment shall be rigidly attached to top of frames.
3. Seismic Restraints: Restraints shall be capable of safely accepting external forces as specified in the applicable codes without failure. Restraints shall maintain equipment, duct,
and piping in a captive position during an earthquake. Restraints shall not short circuit vibration isolation systems or transmit objectionable vibration or noise under normal operating
conditions. Seismic restraints shall be provided on all equipment as scheduled on the drawings. Submit calculations by a California registered structural engineer to verify restraint capacities.
a. Type S1: Seismic restraint shall be constructed of steel plate, concentric steel pipes, and structural members in an all welded assembly. All contact points shall be
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 0548 - 7 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
cushioned with minimum 1/4" thick resilient pad. Restraints shall be O.S.H.P.D pre-approved type R-0029. b. Type S2: Seismic restraints shall be constructed of 7x19 strand galvanized aircraft cable. Cable assembly shall come complete with minimum (2) "U" bolt clamps per end and thimbles to protect cable from chafing. Allowed loads shall be the cable breaking strength with a safety factor of three. Actual loads shall be calculated with the worst
case of all load applied to one cable and anchor pattern. Cable shall be installed with 1/4" slack to prevent the transmission of vibration to the structure. 4. Risers and Anchors:
a. Vertical riser piping support/suspension. Pipe clamps, supported on each side from structure through appropriate isolator and static deflection. Single point of support
desired. Multiple points of support acceptable, but must be engineered, complete with detailed installation and adjustment instruction by supplier.
b. Vertical riser guides. Double deflection neoprene guides at mid or multiple locations along riser to preclude swing motion. Points to comply with local codes regarding normal attachment points. c. Pipe anchors, vertical or horizontal. Resilient anchor points in piping to preclude direct
contact of piping with structure, yet provide a neutral point for expansion/contraction of piping.
d. Trisolators. Sheet metal sleeve with felt insert to be installed at attachment points of hangers or piping. Semco, Elcen, or equal shop fabricated device.
e. Type RPAG: Resilient Pipe Anchor or Guide: These units shall be the standard product of the vibration isolation mounting manufacturer, incorporating neoprene isolation
elements that are specifically designed for providing resilient vertical and/or horizontal support when serving as a pipe anchor or guide. Minimum neoprene thickness 1/4 inch.
Maximum neoprene durometer 50. f. Type RPS1: Resilient Pipe Sleeve at Support or Construction Penetration: Sleeve shall
consist of a formed and stiffened galvanized steel sleeve lined on the inside with moisture and vermin resistant felt bonded to the metal sleeve and 1/4 inch thick for pipe
diameters up to 2 inches and 1/2 inch for larger pipe diameters. Sleeve inside diameter shall equal pipe outside diameter in each application. Sleeve shall be split longitudinally
so it can be snapped over pipes and re-closed without damage. Sleeve lengths shall be as recommended by the manufacturer for the given diameters, but shall not be less than
3 inches. g. Type RPS2: Resilient Pipe Sleeve at Construction Penetration: This unit shall consist
of two bolted pipe halves with 3/4 inch or thicker neoprene sponge bonded to the inner faces. The seal shall be tightenable around the pipe to eliminate clearance between the
inner sponge face and the piping. Sleeve shall be 2 inches longer than the thickness of the construction it penetrates. Where pipe temperatures exceed 240oF, use 10-pcf-density glass fiber insulation in lieu of sponge neoprene.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation and seismic-control devices for compliance with requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Examine roughing-in of reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual locations before installation.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 0548 - 8 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations as specified in Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories."
B. Install thrust limits at centerline of thrust, symmetrical on either side of equipment.
C. Install seismic snubbers on isolated equipment. Locate snubbers as close as possible to vibration isolators and bolt to equipment base and supporting structure.
D. Install restraining cables at each trapeze and individual pipe hanger. At trapeze anchor locations, shackle piping to trapeze. Install cables so they do not bend across sharp edges of adjacent equipment or building structure.
E. Install steel angles or channel, sized to prevent buckling, clamped with ductile-iron clamps to hanger rods for trapeze and individual pipe hangers. At trapeze anchor locations, shackle
piping to trapeze. Requirements apply equally to hanging equipment. Do not weld angles to rods.
F. Install resilient bolt isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform the following field quality-control testing:
B. Testing: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform the following field quality-control testing:
C. Testing: Perform the following field quality-control testing:
1. Isolator seismic-restraint clearance.
2. Isolator deflection.
3. Snubber minimum clearances.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust isolators after piping systems have been filled and equipment is at operating weight.
B. Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating height.
After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of contact during normal operation.
C. Attach thrust limits at centerline of thrust and adjust to a maximum of 1/4-inch movement during start and stop.
D. Adjust air spring leveling mechanism.
E. Adjust active height of spring isolators.
F. Adjust snubbers according to manufacturer's written recommendations.
G. Adjust seismic restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode of
operation.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 0548 - 9 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
H. Torque anchor bolts according to equipment manufacturer's written recommendations to resist seismic forces.
3.5 CLEANING
A. After completing equipment installation, inspect vibration isolation and seismic-control devices.
Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris.
END OF SECTION
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 0553 - 1 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
SECTION 23 0553 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and General Provisions apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following mechanical identification materials and their installation:
1. Equipment nameplates.
2. Equipment markers.
3. Equipment signs.
4. Access panel and door markers.
5. Pipe markers.
6. Duct markers.
7. Stencils.
8. Valve tags.
9. Valve schedules.
10. Warning tags.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Valve numbering scheme.
C. Valve Schedules: For each piping system. Furnish extra copies (in addition to mounted copies) to include in maintenance manuals.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME A13.1, "Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems," for letter size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of identification
devices for piping.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.
B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.
C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 0553 - 2 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION DEVICES
A. Equipment Nameplates: Metal, with data engraved or stamped, for permanent attachment on
equipment.
1. Data:
a. Manufacturer, product name, model number, and serial number. b. Capacity, operating and power characteristics, and essential data.
c. Labels of tested compliances.
2. Location: Accessible and visible.
3. Fasteners: As required to mount on equipment.
B. Equipment Markers: Engraved, color-coded laminated plastic. Include contact-type,
permanent adhesive.
1. Terminology: Match schedules as closely as possible.
2. Data:
a. Name and plan number.
b. Equipment service. c. Design capacity.
d. Other design parameters such as pressure drop, entering and leaving conditions, and speed.
3. Size: 2-1/2 by 4 inches for control devices, dampers, and valves; 4-1/2 by 6 inches for equipment.
C. Equipment Signs: ASTM D 709, Type I, cellulose, paper-base, phenolic-resin-laminate engraving stock; Grade ES-2, black surface, black phenolic core, with white melamine subcore,
unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate in sizes required for message. Provide holes for mechanical fastening.
1. Data: Instructions for operation of equipment and for safety procedures.
2. Engraving: Manufacturer's standard letter style, of sizes and with terms to match
equipment identification.
3. Thickness: 1/16 inch for units up to 20 sq. in. or 8 inches in length, and 1/8 inch for larger
units.
4. Fasteners: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or contact-type, permanent adhesive.
D. Access Panel and Door Markers: 1/16-inch- thick, engraved laminated plastic, with abbreviated terms and numbers corresponding to identification. Provide 1/8-inch center hole for
attachment.
1. Fasteners: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or contact-type, permanent adhesive.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 0553 - 3 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
2.2 PIPING IDENTIFICATION DEVICES
A. Manufactured Pipe Markers, General: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating service,
and showing direction of flow.
1. Colors: Comply with ASME A13.1, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Lettering: Use piping system terms indicated and abbreviate only as necessary for each application length.
3. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches: Full-band pipe markers extending 360 degrees around pipe at each location.
4. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches and Larger: Either full-band or strip-type pipe markers at least three times letter height and of length required for label.
5. Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both directions; or as separate unit on each pipe marker to indicate direction of flow.
B. Pretensioned Pipe Markers: Precoiled semirigid plastic formed to cover full circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe without adhesive.
C. Shaped Pipe Markers: Preformed semirigid plastic formed to partially cover circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe with mechanical fasteners that do not penetrate insulation vapor
barrier.
D. Self-Adhesive Pipe Markers: Plastic with pressure-sensitive, permanent-type, self-adhesive
back.
E. Plastic Tape: Continuously printed, vinyl tape at least 3 mils thick with pressure-sensitive,
permanent-type, self-adhesive back.
1. Width for Markers on Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches: 3/4 inch
minimum.
2. Width for Markers on Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches or Larger: 1-1/2 inches
minimum.
2.3 DUCT IDENTIFICATION DEVICES
A. Duct Markers: Engraved, color-coded laminated plastic. Include direction and quantity of airflow and duct service (such as supply, return, and exhaust). Include contact-type, permanent
adhesive.
2.4 STENCILS
A. Stencils: Prepared with letter sizes according to ASME A13.1 for piping; minimum letter height of 1-1/4 inches for ducts; and minimum letter height of 3/4 inch for access panel and door
markers, equipment markers, equipment signs, and similar operational instructions.
1. Stencil Material: Metal or fiberboard.
2. Stencil Paint: Exterior, gloss, black, unless otherwise indicated. Paint may be in pressurized spray-can form.
3. Identification Paint: Exterior, in colors according to ASME A13.1, unless otherwise indicated.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 0553 - 4 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
2.5 VALVE TAGS
A. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2-
inch numbers, with numbering scheme approved by Architect or Engineer. Provide 5/32-inch hole for fastener.
1. Material: 0.032-inch- thick brass.
2. Valve-Tag Fasteners: Brass wire-link or beaded chain; or S-hook.
2.6 VALVE SCHEDULES
A. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on standard-size bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve (room or space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations for
identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses.
1. Valve-Schedule Frames: Glazed display frame for removable mounting on masonry walls
for each page of valve schedule. Include mounting screws.
2. Frame: Extruded aluminum.
3. Glazing: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1, Glazing Quality B, 2.5-mm, single-thickness glass.
2.7 WARNING TAGS
A. Warning Tags: Preprinted or partially preprinted, accident-prevention tags; of plasticized card
stock with matte finish suitable for writing.
1. Size: 3 by 5-1/4 inches minimum.
2. Fasteners: Brass grommet and wire.
3. Nomenclature: Large-size primary caption such as DANGER, CAUTION, or DO NOT
OPERATE.
4. Color: Yellow background with black lettering.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATIONS, GENERAL
A. Products specified are for applications referenced in other Division 15 Sections. If more than
single-type material, device, or label is specified for listed applications, selection is Installer's option.
3.2 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
A. Install and permanently fasten equipment nameplates on each major item of mechanical
equipment that does not have nameplate or has nameplate that is damaged or located where not easily visible. Locate nameplates where accessible and visible. Include nameplates for the
following general categories of equipment:
1. Fuel-burning units, including boilers, furnaces, heaters, stills, and absorption units.
2. Pumps, compressors, chillers, condensers, and similar motor-driven units.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 0553 - 5 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
3. Heat exchangers, coils, evaporators, cooling towers, heat recovery units, and similar equipment.
4. Fans, blowers, primary balancing dampers, and mixing boxes.
5. Packaged HVAC central-station and zone-type units.
B. Install equipment markers with permanent adhesive on or near each major item of mechanical equipment. Data required for markers may be included on signs, and markers may be omitted
if both are indicated.
1. Letter Size: Minimum 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches,
1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size
of principal lettering.
2. Data: Distinguish among multiple units, indicate operational requirements, indicate safety
and emergency precautions, warn of hazards and improper operations, and identify units.
3. Locate markers where accessible and visible. Include markers for the following general
categories of equipment:
a. Main control and operating valves, including safety devices and hazardous units such as gas outlets. b. Fire department hose valves and hose stations.
c. Meters, gages, thermometers, and similar units. d. Fuel-burning units, including boilers, furnaces, heaters, stills, and absorption units.
e. Pumps, compressors, chillers, condensers, and similar motor-driven units. f. Heat exchangers, coils, evaporators, cooling towers, heat recovery units, and similar
equipment. g. Fans, blowers, primary balancing dampers, and mixing boxes.
h. Packaged HVAC central-station and zone-type units. i. Tanks and pressure vessels.
j. Strainers, filters, humidifiers, water-treatment systems, and similar equipment.
C. Stenciled Equipment Marker Option: Stenciled markers may be provided instead of laminated-
plastic equipment markers, at Installer's option, if lettering larger than 1 inch high is needed for proper identification because of distance from normal location of required identification.
D. Install equipment signs with screws or permanent adhesive on or near each major item of mechanical equipment. Locate signs where accessible and visible.
1. Identify mechanical equipment with equipment markers in the following color codes:
a. Green: For cooling equipment and components.
b. Yellow: For heating equipment and components. c. Green and Yellow: For combination cooling and heating equipment and
components. d. Brown: For energy-reclamation equipment and components.
2. Letter Size: Minimum 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for
greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.
3. Data: Distinguish among multiple units, indicate operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, warn of hazards and improper operations, and identify units.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 0553 - 6 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
4. Include signs for the following general categories of equipment:
a. Main control and operating valves, including safety devices and hazardous units such
as gas outlets. b. Fuel-burning units, including boilers, furnaces, heaters, stills, and absorption units. c. Pumps, compressors, chillers, condensers, and similar motor-driven units. d. Heat exchangers, coils, evaporators, cooling towers, heat recovery units, and similar equipment. e. Fans, blowers, primary balancing dampers, and mixing boxes.
f. Packaged HVAC central-station and zone-type units. g. Tanks and pressure vessels.
h. Strainers, filters, humidifiers, water-treatment systems, and similar equipment.
E. Stenciled Equipment Sign Option: Stenciled signs may be provided instead of laminated-plastic equipment signs, at Installer's option, if lettering larger than 1 inch high is needed for proper identification because of distance from normal location of required identification.
F. Install access panel markers with screws on equipment access panels.
3.3 PIPING IDENTIFICATION
A. Install manufactured pipe markers indicating service on each piping system. Install with flow indication arrows showing direction of flow.
1. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches: Pretensioned pipe markers. Use size to ensure a tight fit.
2. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches and Larger: Shaped pipe markers. Use size to match pipe and secure with fasteners.
B. Stenciled Pipe Marker Option: Stenciled markers may be provided instead of manufactured pipe markers, at Installer's option. Install stenciled pipe markers with painted, color-coded
bands or rectangles on each piping system.
1. Identification Paint: Use for contrasting background.
2. Stencil Paint: Use for pipe marking.
C. Locate pipe markers and color bands where piping is exposed in finished spaces; machine
rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior nonconcealed locations as follows:
1. Near each valve and control device.
2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units.
Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch.
3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and nonaccessible enclosures.
4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping.
5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in areas of congested piping and equipment.
7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced markers.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 0553 - 7 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
3.4 DUCT IDENTIFICATION
A. Install duct markers with permanent adhesive on air ducts in the following color codes:
1. Green: For cold-air supply ducts.
2. Yellow: For hot-air supply ducts.
3. Blue: For exhaust-, outside-, relief-, return-, and mixed-air ducts.
4. ASME A13.1 Colors and Designs: For hazardous material exhaust.
5. Letter Size: Minimum 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.
B. Stenciled Duct Marker Option: Stenciled markers, showing service and direction of flow, may be provided instead of laminated-plastic duct markers, at Installer's option, if lettering larger
than 1 inch high is needed for proper identification because of distance from normal location of required identification.
C. Locate markers near points where ducts enter into concealed spaces and at maximum intervals of 20 feet in each space where ducts are exposed or concealed by removable ceiling system.
3.5 VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION
A. Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves; valves within
factory-fabricated equipment units; plumbing fixture supply stops; shutoff valves; faucets; convenience and lawn-watering hose connections; and HVAC terminal devices and similar
roughing-in connections of end-use fixtures and units. List tagged valves in a valve schedule.
B. Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color scheme and
with captions similar to those indicated in the following:
1. Valve-Tag Size and Shape:
a. Cold Water: 1-1/2 inches, round. b. Hot Water: 1-1/2 inches, round.
c. Fire Protection: 1-1/2 inches, round. d. Gas: 1-1/2 inches, round.
e. Steam: 1-1/2 inches, round.
2. Valve-Tag Color:
a. Cold Water: Natural. b. Hot Water: Red.
c. Fire Protection: Black. d. Gas: Green.
e. Chilled Water: Blue. f. Condenser Water: Yellow.
g. Heating Hot Water: Red.
3. Letter Color:
a. Cold Water: Black. b. Hot Water: White.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 0553 - 8 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
c. Fire Protection: White. d. Gas: White. e. Chilled Water: White. f. Condenser Water: Black. g. Heating Hot Water: White.
3.6 VALVE-SCHEDULE INSTALLATION
A. Mount valve schedule on wall in accessible location in each major equipment room.
3.7 WARNING-TAG INSTALLATION
A. Write required message on, and attach warning tags to, equipment and other items where required.
3.8 ADJUSTING
A. Relocate mechanical identification materials and devices that have become visually blocked by
other work.
3.9 CLEANING
A. Clean faces of mechanical identification devices and glass frames of valve schedules.
END OF SECTION
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 0593 - 1 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
SECTION 23 0593 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and General Provisions apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes TAB to produce design objectives for the following:
1. Air Systems:
a. Constant-volume air systems.
b. Variable-air-volume systems.
2. Hydronic Piping Systems:
a. Constant-flow systems. b. Variable-flow systems.
3. HVAC equipment quantitative-performance settings.
4. Space pressurization testing and adjusting.
5. Vibration measuring.
6. Stair-tower pressurization testing and adjusting.
7. Smoke-control systems testing and adjusting.
8. Indoor-air quality measuring.
9. Verifying that automatic control devices are functioning properly.
10. Reporting results of activities and procedures specified in this Section.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Adjust: To regulate fluid flow rate and air patterns at the terminal equipment, such as to reduce
fan speed or adjust a damper.
B. Balance: To proportion flows within the distribution system, including submains, branches, and
terminals, according to indicated quantities.
C. Barrier or Boundary: Construction, either vertical or horizontal, such as walls, floors, and
ceilings that are designed and constructed to restrict the movement of airflow, smoke, odors, and other pollutants.
D. Draft: A current of air, when referring to localized effect caused by one or more factors of high air velocity, low ambient temperature, or direction of airflow, whereby more heat is withdrawn
from a person's skin than is normally dissipated.
E. NC: Noise criteria.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 0593 - 2 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
F. Procedure: An approach to and execution of a sequence of work operations to yield repeatable results.
G. RC: Room criteria.
H. Report Forms: Test data sheets for recording test data in logical order.
I. Smoke-Control System: An engineered system that uses fans to produce airflow and pressure differences across barriers to limit smoke movement.
J. Smoke-Control Zone: A space within a building that is enclosed by smoke barriers and is a part of a zoned smoke-control system.
K. Stair Pressurization System: A type of smoke-control system that is intended to positively pressurize stair towers with outdoor air by using fans to keep smoke from contaminating the
stair towers during an alarm condition.
L. Static Head: The pressure due to the weight of the fluid above the point of measurement. In a
closed system, static head is equal on both sides of the pump.
M. Suction Head: The height of fluid surface above the centerline of the pump on the suction side.
N. System Effect: A phenomenon that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system.
O. System Effect Factors: Allowances used to calculate a reduction of the performance ratings of a fan when installed under conditions different from those presented when the fan was
performance tested.
P. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.
Q. Terminal: A point where the controlled medium, such as fluid or energy, enters or leaves the distribution system.
R. Test: A procedure to determine quantitative performance of systems or equipment.
S. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing (TAB) Firm: The entity responsible for performing and
reporting TAB procedures.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: Within 30 days from Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit 6 copies of evidence that TAB firm and this Project's TAB team members meet the qualifications specified
in "Quality Assurance" Article.
B. Contract Documents Examination Report: Within 30 days from Contractor's Notice to Proceed,
submit 6 copies of the Contract Documents review report as specified in Part 3.
C. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 30 days from Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit 6
copies of TAB strategies and step-by-step procedures as specified in Part 3 "Preparation" Article. Include a complete set of report forms intended for use on this Project.
D. Certified TAB Reports: Submit two copies of reports prepared, as specified in this Section, on approved forms certified by TAB firm.
E. Sample Report Forms: Submit two sets of sample TAB report forms.
F. Warranties specified in this Section.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 0593 - 3 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. TAB Firm Qualifications: Engage a TAB firm certified by either AABC or NEBB.
B. TAB Conference: Meet with Owner's and Architect's representatives on approval of TAB strategies and procedures plan to develop a mutual understanding of the details. Ensure the
participation of TAB team members, equipment manufacturers' authorized service representatives, HVAC controls installers, and other support personnel. Provide seven days'
advance notice of scheduled meeting time and location.
1. Agenda Items: Include at least the following:
a. Submittal distribution requirements. b. The Contract Documents examination report. c. TAB plan. d. Work schedule and Project-site access requirements.
e. Coordination and cooperation of trades and subcontractors. f. Coordination of documentation and communication flow.
C. Certification of TAB Reports: Certify TAB field data reports. This certification includes the following:
1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified TAB reports.
2. Certify that TAB team complied with approved TAB plan and the procedures specified and
referenced in this Specification.
D. TAB Report Forms: Use standard forms from AABC's "National Standards for Testing and
Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems." or NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems."
E. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, and Accuracy: As described in AABC's "National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems or NEBB's
"Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems," Section II, "Required Instrumentation for NEBB Certification."
F. Instrumentation Calibration: Calibrate instruments at least every six months or more frequently if required by instrument manufacturer.
1. Keep an updated record of instrument calibration that indicates date of calibration and the name of party performing instrument calibration.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy the site and existing building during entire TAB
period. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's operations.
B. Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner may occupy completed areas of building before Substantial Completion. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's
operations.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate the efforts of factory-authorized service representatives for systems and equipment, HVAC controls installers, and other mechanics to operate HVAC systems and equipment to
support and assist TAB activities.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 0593 - 4 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
B. Notice: Provide seven days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates and times.
C. Perform TAB after leakage and pressure tests on air and water distribution systems have been satisfactorily completed.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. National Project Performance Guarantee: Provide a guarantee on AABC's "National Standards
for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems" forms stating that AABC will assist in completing requirements of the Contract Documents if TAB firm fails to
comply with the Contract Documents. Guarantee includes the following provisions:
B. Special Guarantee: Provide a guarantee on NEBB forms stating that NEBB will assist in completing requirements of the Contract Documents if TAB firm fails to comply with the Contract Documents. Guarantee shall include the following provisions:
1. The certified TAB firm has tested and balanced systems according to the Contract Documents.
2. Systems are balanced to optimum performance capabilities within design and installation limits.
PART 2 PRODUCTS –– ((Not Applicable)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover
conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment.
1. Contract Documents are defined in the General and Supplementary Conditions of Contract.
2. Verify that balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are required by
the Contract Documents. Verify that quantities and locations of these balancing devices are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and
equipment operation.
B. Examine approved submittal data of HVAC systems and equipment.
C. Examine design data, including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of philosophies and
assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls.
D. Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves. Relate performance
data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system. Calculate
system effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment when installed under conditions different from those presented when the equipment was performance tested at the
factory. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," Sections 7 through 10; or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems--Duct Design,"
Sections 5 and 6. Compare this data with the design data and installed conditions.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 0593 - 5 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
E. Examine system and equipment installations to verify that they are complete and that testing, cleaning, adjusting, and commissioning specified in individual Sections have been performed.
F. Examine system and equipment test reports.
G. Examine HVAC system and equipment installations to verify that indicated balancing devices,
such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are properly installed, and that their locations are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and equipment operation.
H. Examine systems for functional deficiencies that cannot be corrected by adjusting and balancing.
I. Examine HVAC equipment to ensure that clean filters have been installed, bearings are greased, belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for
operation.
J. Examine terminal units, such as variable-air-volume boxes, to verify that they are accessible
and their controls are connected and functioning.
K. Examine plenum ceilings used for supply air to verify that they are airtight. Verify that pipe
penetrations and other holes are sealed.
L. Examine strainers for clean screens and proper perforations.
M. Examine three-way valves for proper installation for their intended function of diverting or mixing fluid flows.
N. Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins.
O. Examine system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in the suction piping.
P. Examine equipment for installation and for properly operating safety interlocks and controls.
Q. Examine automatic temperature system components to verify the following:
1. Dampers, valves, and other controlled devices are operated by the intended controller.
2. Dampers and valves are in the position indicated by the controller.
3. Integrity of valves and dampers for free and full operation and for tightness of fully closed and fully open positions. This includes dampers in multizone units, mixing boxes, and
variable-air-volume terminals.
4. Automatic modulating and shutoff valves, including two-way valves and three-way mixing
and diverting valves, are properly connected.
5. Thermostats and humidistats are located to avoid adverse effects of sunlight, drafts, and
cold walls.
6. Sensors are located to sense only the intended conditions.
7. Sequence of operation for control modes is according to the Contract Documents.
8. Controller set points are set at indicated values.
9. Interlocked systems are operating.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 0593 - 6 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
10. Changeover from heating to cooling mode occurs according to indicated values.
R. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe
and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from indicated values.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures.
B. Complete system readiness checks and prepare system readiness reports. Verify the following:
1. Permanent electrical power wiring is complete.
2. Hydronic systems are filled, clean, and free of air.
3. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational.
4. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed.
5. Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open.
6. Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational.
7. Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments are required and access to balancing devices is provided.
8. Windows and doors can be closed so indicated conditions for system operations can be met.
3.3 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING
A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures
contained in AABC's "National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems" or NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and
Balancing of Environmental Systems" and this Section.
B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the
minimum extent necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures. After testing and balancing, close probe holes and patch insulation with new materials identical to those
removed. Restore vapor barrier and finish according to insulation Specifications for this Project.
C. Mark equipment and balancing device settings with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material, including damper-control positions, valve position indicators, fan-speed-
control levers, and similar controls and devices, to show final settings.
D. Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound (IP) units.
3.4 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS
A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and
recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with required fan volumes.
B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 0593 - 7 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
C. For variable-air-volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity.
D. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct airflow measurements.
E. Check airflow patterns from the outside-air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaust-air dampers, through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.
F. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.
G. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.
H. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.
I. Check for airflow blockages.
J. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning.
K. Check for proper sealing of air-handling unit components.
L. Check for proper sealing of air duct system.
3.5 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS
A. Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by fan manufacturer.
1. Measure fan static pressures to determine actual static pressure as follows:
a. Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practicable and upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions. b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection.
c. Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the fan as possible, upstream from flexible connection and downstream from duct restrictions.
d. Measure inlet static pressure of double-inlet fans through the wall of the plenum that houses the fan.
2. Measure static pressure across each component that makes up an air-handling unit, rooftop unit, and other air-handling and -treating equipment.
a. Simulate dirty filter operation and record the point at which maintenance personnel must change filters.
3. Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices such as sound traps, heat recovery equipment, and air washers, under final balanced conditions.
4. Compare design data with installed conditions to determine variations in design static pressures versus actual static pressures. Compare actual system effect factors with
calculated system effect factors to identify where variations occur. Recommend corrective action to align design and actual conditions.
5. Obtain approval from Architect for adjustment of fan speed higher or lower than indicated speed. Make required adjustments to pulley sizes, motor sizes, and electrical connections
to accommodate fan-speed changes.
6. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment
manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan-motor amperage to ensure that no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full cooling, full
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 0593 - 8 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
heating, economizer, and any other operating modes to determine the maximum required brake horsepower.
B. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances.
1. Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper and adjust volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved.
a. Where sufficient space in submain and branch ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate
the total airflow for that zone.
2. Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Continue to
adjust submain and branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances.
C. Measure terminal outlets and inlets without making adjustments.
1. Measure terminal outlets using a direct-reading hood or outlet manufacturer's written instructions and calculating factors.
D. Adjust terminal outlets and inlets for each space to indicated airflows within specified tolerances of indicated values. Make adjustments using volume dampers rather than extractors and the
dampers at air terminals.
1. Adjust each outlet in same room or space to within specified tolerances of indicated quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed by the Contract Documents.
2. Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts.
3.6 PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS
A. Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data:
1. Manufacturer, model, and serial numbers.
2. Motor horsepower rating.
3. Motor rpm.
4. Efficiency rating.
5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase.
6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase.
7. Starter thermal-protection-element rating.
B. Motors Driven by Variable-Frequency Controllers: Test for proper operation at speeds varying from minimum to maximum. Test the manual bypass for the controller to prove proper
operation. Record observations, including controller manufacturer, model and serial numbers, and nameplate data.
3.7 PROCEDURES FOR TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENTS
A. During TAB, report the need for adjustment in temperature regulation within the automatic
temperature-control system.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 0593 - 9 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
B. Measure indoor wet- and dry-bulb temperatures every other hour for a period of two successive eight-hour days, in each separately controlled zone, to prove correctness of final temperature
settings. Measure when the building or zone is occupied.
C. Measure outside-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures.
3.8 PROCEDURES FOR SPACE PRESSURIZATION MEASUREMENTS AND ADJUSTMENTS
A. Before testing for space pressurization, observe the space to verify the integrity of the space
boundaries. Verify that windows and doors are closed and applicable safing, gaskets, and sealants are installed. Report deficiencies and postpone testing until after the reported
deficiencies are corrected.
B. Measure, adjust, and record the pressurization of each room, each zone, and each building by
adjusting the supply, return, and exhaust airflows to achieve the indicated conditions.
C. Measure space pressure differential where pressure is used as the design criteria, and measure airflow differential where differential airflow is used as the design criteria for space pressurization.
1. For pressure measurements, measure and record the pressure difference between the intended spaces at the door with all doors in the space closed. Record the high-pressure
side, low-pressure side, and pressure difference between each adjacent space.
2. For applications with cascading levels of space pressurization, begin in the most critical
space and work to the least critical space.
3. Test room pressurization first, then zones, and finish with building pressurization.
D. To achieve indicated pressurization, set the supply airflow to the indicated conditions and adjust the exhaust and return airflow to achieve the indicated pressure or airflow difference.
E. For spaces with pressurization being monitored and controlled automatically, observe and adjust the controls to achieve the desired set point.
1. Compare the values of the measurements taken to the measured values of the control system instruments and report findings.
2. Check the repeatability of the controls by successive tests designed to temporarily alter the ability to achieve space pressurization. Test overpressurization and underpressurization,
and observe and report on the system's ability to revert to the set point.
3. For spaces served by variable-air-volume supply and exhaust systems, measure space
pressurization at indicated airflow and minimum airflow conditions.
F. In spaces that employ multiple modes of operation, such as normal mode and emergency
mode or occupied mode and unoccupied mode, measure, adjust, and record data for each operating mode.
G. Record indicated conditions and corresponding initial and final measurements. Report deficiencies.
3.9 PROCEDURES FOR INDOOR-AIR QUALITY MEASUREMENTS
A. After air balancing is complete and with HVAC systems operating at indicated conditions,
perform indoor-air quality testing.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 0593 - 10 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
B. Observe and record the following conditions for each HVAC system:
1. The distance between the outside-air intake and the closest exhaust fan discharge, cooling
tower, flue termination, or vent termination.
2. Specified filters are installed. Check for leakage around filters.
3. Cooling coil drain pans have a positive slope to drain.
4. Cooling coil condensate drain trap maintains an air seal.
5. Evidence of water damage.
6. Insulation in contact with the supply, return, and outside air is dry and clean.
C. Measure and record indoor conditions served by each HVAC system. Make measurements at multiple locations served by the system if required to satisfy the following:
1. Most remote area.
2. One location per floor.
3. One location for every 5000 sq. ft.
D. Measure and record the following indoor conditions for each location two times at two-hour
intervals, and in accordance with ASHRAE 113:
1. Temperature.
2. Relative humidity.
3. Air velocity.
4. Concentration of carbon dioxide (ppm).
5. Concentration of carbon monoxide (ppm).
6. Nitrogen oxides (ppm).
7. Formaldehyde (ppm).
3.10 TOLERANCES
A. Set HVAC system airflow and water flow rates within the following tolerances:
1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus 5 to plus 10 percent.
2. Air Outlets and Inlets: 0 to minus 10 percent.
3. Heating-Water Flow Rate: 0 to minus 10 percent.
4. Cooling-Water Flow Rate: 0 to minus 5 percent.
3.11 REPORTING
A. Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as
specified in "Examination" Article, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for systems' balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems' balancing devices to
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 0593 - 11 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
facilitate proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and additions to HVAC systems and general construction to allow access for performance measuring and
balancing devices.
B. Status Reports: As Work progresses, prepare reports to describe completed procedures, procedures in progress, and scheduled procedures. Include a list of deficiencies and problems found in systems being tested and balanced. Prepare a separate report for each system and each building floor for systems serving multiple floors.
3.12 FINAL REPORT
A. General: Typewritten, or computer printout in letter-quality font, on standard bond paper, in three-ring binder, tabulated and divided into sections by tested and balanced systems.
B. Include a certification sheet in front of binder signed and sealed by the certified testing and balancing engineer.
1. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.
C. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field report data, include the following:
1. Pump curves.
2. Fan curves.
3. Manufacturers' test data.
4. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers.
5. Other information relative to equipment performance, but do not include Shop Drawings and Product Data.
D. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data in the final report, as applicable:
1. Title page.
2. Name and address of TAB firm.
3. Project name.
4. Project location.
5. Architect's name and address.
6. Engineer's name and address.
7. Contractor's name and address.
8. Report date.
9. Signature of TAB firm who certifies the report.
10. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report.
Number each page in the report.
11. Summary of contents including the following:
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 0593 - 12 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
a. Indicated versus final performance. b. Notable characteristics of systems.
c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract Documents.
12. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment.
13. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer, type size, and fittings.
14. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports varies from indicated values.
15. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following:
a. Settings for outside-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers. b. Conditions of filters. c. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions.
d. Face and bypass damper settings at coils. e. Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter. f. Inlet vane settings for variable-air-volume systems. g. Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller.
h. Other system operating conditions that affect performance.
E. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems. Present
each system with single-line diagram and include the following:
1. Quantities of outside, supply, return, and exhaust airflows.
2. Water and steam flow rates.
3. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes.
4. Pipe and valve sizes and locations.
5. Terminal units.
6. Balancing stations.
7. Position of balancing devices.
F. Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following:
1. Fan Data:
a. System identification. b. Location.
c. Make and type. d. Model number and size.
e. Manufacturer's serial number. f. Arrangement and class.
g. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. h. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center, and amount of adjustments in inches.
2. Motor Data:
a. Make and frame type and size.
b. Horsepower and rpm. c. Volts, phase, and hertz.
d. Full-load amperage and service factor.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 0593 - 13 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
e. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. f. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center, and amount of adjustments in inches.
g. Number of belts, make, and size.
3. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):
a. Total airflow rate in cfm. b. Total system static pressure in inches wg. c. Fan rpm. d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg. e. Suction static pressure in inches wg.
G. Round, Flat-Oval, and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports: Include a diagram with a grid representing the duct cross-section and record the following:
1. Report Data:
a. System and air-handling unit number. b. Location and zone.
c. Traverse air temperature in deg F. d. Duct static pressure in inches wg.
e. Duct size in inches. f. Duct area in sq. ft. g. Indicated airflow rate in cfm. h. Indicated velocity in fpm.
i. Actual airflow rate in cfm. j. Actual average velocity in fpm.
k. Barometric pressure in psig.
H. Vibration Measurement Reports:
1. Date and time of test.
2. Vibration meter manufacturer, model number, and serial number.
3. Equipment designation, location, equipment, speed, motor speed, and motor horsepower.
4. Diagram of equipment showing the vibration measurement locations.
5. Measurement readings for each measurement location.
6. Calculate isolator efficiency using measurements taken.
7. Description of predominant vibration source.
I. Indoor-Air Quality Measurement Reports for Each HVAC System:
1. HVAC system designation.
2. Date and time of test.
3. Outdoor temperature, relative humidity, wind speed, and wind direction at start of test.
4. Room number or similar description for each location.
5. Measurements at each location.
6. Observed deficiencies.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 0593 - 14 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
J. Instrument Calibration Reports:
1. Report Data:
a. Instrument type and make. b. Serial number.
c. Application. d. Dates of use.
e. Dates of calibration.
3.13 INSPECTIONS
A. Initial Inspection:
1. After testing and balancing are complete, operate each system and randomly check
measurements to verify that the system is operating according to the final test and balance readings documented in the Final Report.
2. Randomly check the following for each system:
a. Measure airflow of at least 10 percent of air outlets.
b. Measure water flow of at least 5 percent of terminals. c. Measure room temperature at each thermostat/temperature sensor. Compare the reading to the set point. d. Measure sound levels at two locations.
e. Measure space pressure of at least 10 percent of locations. f. Verify that balancing devices are marked with final balance position.
g. Note deviations to the Contract Documents in the Final Report.
B. Final Inspection:
1. After initial inspection is complete and evidence by random checks verifies that testing and balancing are complete and accurately documented in the final report, request that a final
inspection be made by Architect.
2. TAB firm test and balance engineer shall conduct the inspection in the presence of
Architect.
3. Architect shall randomly select measurements documented in the final report to be
rechecked. The rechecking shall be limited to either 10 percent of the total measurements recorded, or the extent of measurements that can be accomplished in a normal 8-hour
business day.
4. If the rechecks yield measurements that differ from the measurements documented in the
final report by more than the tolerances allowed, the measurements shall be noted as “FAILED.”
5. If the number of “FAILED” measurements is greater than 10 percent of the total measurements checked during the final inspection, the testing and balancing shall be
considered incomplete and shall be rejected.
6. TAB firm shall recheck all measurements and make adjustments. Revise the final report
and balancing device settings to include all changes and resubmit the final report.
7. Request a second final inspection. If the second final inspection also fails, Owner shall
contract the services of another TAB firm to complete the testing and balancing in
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 0593 - 15 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
accordance with the Contract Documents and deduct the cost of the services from the final payment.
3.14 ADDITIONAL TESTS
A. Within 90 days of completing TAB, perform additional testing and balancing to verify that
balanced conditions are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions.
B. Seasonal Periods: If initial TAB procedures were not performed during near-peak summer and
winter conditions, perform additional testing, inspecting, and adjusting during near-peak summer and winter conditions.
END OF SECTION
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 0700 - 1 HVAC INSULATION
SECTION 23 0700 HVAC INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and General Provisions apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Insulation Materials:
a. Cellular glass. b. Flexible elastomeric. c. Mineral fiber.
d. Phenolic.
2. Adhesives.
3. Mastics.
4. Lagging adhesives.
5. Sealants.
6. Factory-applied jackets.
7. Field-applied jackets.
8. Tapes.
9. Securements.
10. Corner angles.
11. Related Sections:
a. Division 23 Section “HVAC Ductwork - Metal Ducts” for duct liners.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied, if any).
B. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
C. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets, with requirements indicated. Include
dates of tests and test methods employed.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 0700 - 2 HVAC INSULATION
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Insulation and related materials shall have fire-test-
response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less.
2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed index of 150 or less.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate
ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Division 23 Section "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application, duct Installer for duct insulation application, and equipment Installer for equipment insulation application. Before preparing piping and ductwork Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and
for space required for maintenance.
C. Coordinate installation and testing of heat tracing.
1.7 SCHEDULING
A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after
installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have satisfactory test results.
B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Comply with requirements in Part 3 schedule articles for where insulating materials shall be
applied.
B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.
B. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.
C. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable according to ASTM C 795.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 0700 - 3 HVAC INSULATION
D. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process.
E. Cellular Glass: Inorganic, incombustible, foamed or cellulated glass with annealed, rigid, hermetically sealed cells. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied
Jackets" Article.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Cell-U-Foam Corporation; Ultra-CUF.
b. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation; Foamglas Super K.
2. Block Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type I.
3. Special-Shaped Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type III.
4. Board Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type IV.
5. Preformed Pipe Insulation without Jacket: Comply with ASTM C 552, Type II, Class 1.
6. Preformed Pipe Insulation with Factory-Applied ASJ-SSL: Comply with ASTM C 552, Type
II, Class 2.
7. Factory fabricate shapes according to ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585.
F. Flexible Elastomeric: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply with ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aerocel. b. Armacell LLC; AP Armaflex.
c. RBX Corporation; Insul-Sheet 1800 and Insul-Tube 180.
G. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.
Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1290, Type III with factory-applied FSK jacket. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. CertainTeed Corp.; Duct Wrap.
b. Johns Manville; Microlite. c. Knauf Insulation; Duct Wrap.
d. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley Wrap. e. Owens Corning; All-Service Duct Wrap.
H. Mineral-Fiber Board Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 612, Type IA or Type IB. For duct and plenum applications, provide
insulation with factory-applied FSK jacket. For equipment applications, provide insulation with factory-applied ASJ. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied
Jackets" Article.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. CertainTeed Corp.; Commercial Board.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 0700 - 4 HVAC INSULATION
b. Johns Manville; 800 Series Spin-Glas. c. Knauf Insulation; Insulation Board.
d. Owens Corning; Fiberglas 700 Series.
I. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Johns Manville; Micro-Lok.
b. Knauf Insulation; 1000 Pipe Insulation. c. Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe Insulation.
2. Type I, 850 deg F Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with factory-applied ASJ-SSL. Factory-applied
jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.
J. Mineral-Fiber, Pipe and Tank Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Semirigid board material with factory-applied ASJ jacket complying with ASTM C 1393, Type II or Type IIIA Category 2, or with properties similar to ASTM C 612, Type IB. Nominal
density is 2.5 lb/cu. ft. or more. Thermal conductivity (k-value) at 100 deg F is 0.29 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F or less. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied
Jackets" Article.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. CertainTeed Corp.; CrimpWrap. b. Johns Manville; MicroFlex.
c. Knauf Insulation; Pipe and Tank Insulation. d. Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe and Tank Insulation.
K. Phenolic:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Kingspan Corp.; Koolphen K.
2. Preformed pipe insulation of rigid, expanded, closed-cell structure. Comply with ASTM C 1126, Type III, Grade 1.
3. Block insulation of rigid, expanded, closed-cell structure. Comply with ASTM C 1126, Type II, Grade 1.
4. Factory fabricate shapes according to ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585.
5. Factory-Applied Jacket: Requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.
a. Preformed Pipe Insulation: ASJ. b. Board for Duct and Plenum Applications: ASJ.
c. Board for Equipment Applications: ASJ.
M. Calcium Silicate.
2.2 ADHESIVES
A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding
insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 0700 - 5 HVAC INSULATION
B. Calcium Silicate Adhesive: Fibrous, sodium-silicate-based adhesive with a service temperature range of 50 to 800 deg F.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-97. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 81-27/81-93. c. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 290. d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-30. e. Vimasco Corporation; 760.
C. Cellular-Glass, Phenolic, Polyisocyanurate, and Polystyrene Adhesive: Solvent-based resin adhesive, with a service temperature range of minus 75 to plus 300 deg F.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-96.
b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 81-33.
D. Flexible Elastomeric and Polyolefin Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-24179A, Type II, Class I.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aeroseal. b. Armacell LCC; 520 Adhesive.
c. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85-75. d. RBX Corporation; Rubatex Contact Adhesive.
E. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-82.
b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85-20. c. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; S-90/80.
d. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 225. e. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25.
F. Polystyrene Adhesive: Solvent- or water-based, synthetic resin adhesive with a service temperature range of minus 20 to plus 140 deg F.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-96. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 97-13.
2.3 MASTICS
A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with
MIL-C-19565C, Type II.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 0700 - 6 HVAC INSULATION
B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on below ambient services.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-35. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 30-90. c. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; CB-50. d. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 590. e. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 55-40. f. Vimasco Corporation; 749.
2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43-mil dry film thickness.
3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F.
4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 59 percent by volume and 71 percent by weight.
5. Color: White.
2.4 LAGGING ADHESIVES
A. Description: Comply with MIL-A-3316C Class I, Grade A and shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-52. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 81-42.
c. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 130. d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 11-30.
e. Vimasco Corporation; 136.
2. Fire-resistant, water-based lagging adhesive and coating for use indoors to adhere fire-
resistant lagging cloths over duct, equipment, and pipe insulation.
3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 180 deg F.
4. Color: White.
2.5 SEALANTS
A. Joint Sealants:
1. Joint Sealants for Cellular-Glass, Phenolic, and Polyisocyanurate Products: Subject to
compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-76. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 30-45.
c. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 405. d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 44-05.
e. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation; Pittseal 444. f. Vimasco Corporation; 750.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 0700 - 7 HVAC INSULATION
2.6 TAPES
A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive,
complying with ASTM C 1136.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0835.
b. Compac Corp.; 104 and 105. c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 428 AWF ASJ.
d. Venture Tape; 1540 CW Plus, 1542 CW Plus, and 1542 CW Plus/SQ.
2. Width: 3 inches.
3. Thickness: 11.5 mils.
4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width.
5. Elongation: 2 percent.
6. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width.
7. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.
B. FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive;
complying with ASTM C 1136.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0827. b. Compac Corp.; 110 and 111. c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 491 AWF FSK.
d. Venture Tape; 1525 CW, 1528 CW, and 1528 CW/SQ.
2. Width: 3 inches.
3. Thickness: 6.5 mils.
4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width.
5. Elongation: 2 percent.
6. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width.
7. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape.
C. PVC Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching field-applied PVC jacket with acrylic adhesive.
Suitable for indoor and outdoor applications.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0555.
b. Compac Corp.; 130. c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 370 White PVC tape.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 0700 - 8 HVAC INSULATION
d. Venture Tape; 1506 CW NS.
2. Width: 2 inches.
3. Thickness: 6 mils.
4. Adhesion: 64 ounces force/inch in width.
5. Elongation: 500 percent.
6. Tensile Strength: 18 lbf/inch in width.
D. Aluminum-Foil Tape: Vapor-retarder tape with acrylic adhesive.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0800.
b. Compac Corp.; 120. c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 488 AWF.
d. Venture Tape; 3520 CW.
2. Width: 2 inches.
3. Thickness: 3.7 mils.
4. Adhesion: 100 ounces force/inch in width.
5. Elongation: 5 percent.
6. Tensile Strength: 34 lbf/inch in width.
2.7 SECUREMENTS
A. Bands:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Childers Products; Bands. b. PABCO Metals Corporation; Bands.
c. RPR Products, Inc.; Bands.
2. Aluminum: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14, 0.020 inch thick,
3/4 inch wide with wing or closed seal.
3. Springs: Twin spring set constructed of stainless steel with ends flat and slotted to accept
metal bands. Spring size determined by manufacturer for application.
B. Insulation Pins and Hangers:
1. Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.135-inch-diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation
indicated.
a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) AGM Industries, Inc.; CWP-1.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 0700 - 9 HVAC INSULATION
2) GEMCO; CD. 3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; CD.
4) Nelson Stud Welding; TPA, TPC, and TPS.
2. Cupped-Head, Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.135-inch- diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated with integral 1-1/2-inch galvanized carbon-steel washer.
a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) AGM Industries, Inc.; CWP-1. 2) GEMCO; Cupped Head Weld Pin.
3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Cupped Head. 4) Nelson Stud Welding; CHP.
3. Metal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following requirements:
a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1) AGM Industries, Inc.; Tactoo Insul-Hangers, Series T. 2) GEMCO; Perforated Base.
3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Spindle. b. Baseplate: Perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches
square. c. Spindle: Copper- or zinc-coated, low carbon steel, fully annealed, 0.106-inch-
diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated. d. Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with demonstrated
capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation, hangers, and substrates.
4. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch- thick, galvanized-steel sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in
place but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter.
a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) AGM Industries, Inc.; RC-150.
2) GEMCO; R-150. 3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; WA-150.
4) Nelson Stud Welding; Speed Clips. b. Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to
ensure permanent retention of cap in exposed locations.
C. Wire: 0.080-inch nickel-copper alloy or 0.062-inch soft-annealed, stainless steel.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
a. C & F Wire.
b. Childers Products. c. PABCO Metals Corporation.
d. RPR Products, Inc.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 0700 - 10 HVAC INSULATION
2.8 CORNER ANGLES
A. Aluminum Corner Angles: 0.040 inch thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, aluminum according to ASTM
B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105 or 5005; Temper H-14.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.
1. Verify that systems and equipment to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects.
2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.
3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application.
B. Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing. Comply with requirements for heat tracing that apply to insulation.
C. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water.
3.3 GENERAL APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Apply insulation materials, accessories, and finishes according to the manufacturer's written
instructions; with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of piping, including fittings, valves, and specialties.
B. Refer to schedules at the end of this Section for materials, forms, jackets, and thicknesses required for each piping system.
C. Use accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Use accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or
dry state.
D. Apply insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal pipe runs.
E. Apply multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.
G. Seal joints and seams with vapor-retarder mastic on insulation indicated to receive a vapor retarder.
H. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
I. Apply insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with
adhesive recommended by the insulation material manufacturer.
J. Apply insulation with the least number of joints practical.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 0700 - 11 HVAC INSULATION
K. Apply insulation over fittings, valves, and specialties, with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated. Refer to special instructions for applying
insulation over fittings, valves, and specialties.
L. Hangers and Anchors: Where vapor retarder is indicated, seal penetrations in insulation at
hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-retarder mastic.
1. Apply insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.
2. For insulation application where vapor retarders are indicated, extend insulation on anchor legs at least 12 inches from point of attachment to pipe and taper insulation ends. Seal tapered ends with a compound recommended by the insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor retarder.
3. Install insert materials and apply insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by the insulation
material manufacturer.
4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over
jacket, arranged to protect the jacket from tear or puncture by the hanger, support, and shield.
L. Insulation Terminations: For insulation application where vapor retarders are indicated, taper insulation ends. Seal tapered ends with a compound recommended by the insulation material
manufacturer to maintain vapor retarder.
M. Apply adhesives and mastics at the manufacturer's recommended coverage rate.
N. Apply insulation with integral jackets as follows:
1. Pull jacket tight and smooth.
2. Circumferential Joints: Cover with 3-inch- wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip and
spaced 4 inches o.c.
3. Longitudinal Seams: Overlap jacket seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Apply insulation with
longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 4 inches o.c.
a. Exception: Do not staple longitudinal laps on insulation having a vapor retarder.
4. Vapor-Retarder Mastics: Where vapor retarders are indicated, apply mastic on seams and
joints and at ends adjacent to flanges, unions, valves, and fittings.
5. At penetrations in jackets for thermometers and pressure gages, fill and seal voids with
vapor-retarder mastic.
O. Roof Penetrations: Apply insulation for interior applications to a point even with top of roof
flashing.
1. Seal penetrations with vapor-retarder mastic.
2. Apply insulation for exterior applications tightly joined to interior insulation ends.
3. Extend metal jacket of exterior insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of
roof flashing.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 0700 - 12 HVAC INSULATION
4. Seal metal jacket to roof flashing with vapor-retarder mastic.
P. Exterior Wall Penetrations: For penetrations of below-grade exterior walls, terminate insulation
flush with mechanical sleeve seal. Seal terminations with vapor-retarder mastic.
Q. Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through walls and floors.
R. Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions.
1. Firestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers are specified in Division 7 Section "Firestopping."
S. Floor Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through floor assembly.
1. For insulation with vapor retarders, seal insulation with vapor-retarder mastic where floor supports penetrate vapor retarder.
3.4 MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION APPLICATION
A. Apply insulation to straight pipes and tubes as follows:
1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire, tape, or bands without
deforming insulation materials.
2. Where vapor retarders are indicated, seal longitudinal seams and end joints with vapor-retarder mastic. Apply vapor retarder to ends of insulation at intervals of 15 to 20 feet to form a vapor retarder between pipe insulation segments.
3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets, secure laps with outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c.
4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets with vapor retarders, do not staple longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by the insulation material
manufacturer and seal with vapor-retarder mastic.
B. Apply insulation to flanges as follows:
1. Apply preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
2. Make width of insulation segment the same as overall width of the flange and bolts, plus
twice the thickness of the pipe insulation.
3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of
adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation.
4. Apply canvas jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlapping
seams at least 1 inch, and seal joints with vapor-retarder mastic.
C. Apply insulation to fittings and elbows as follows:
1. Apply premolded insulation sections of the same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions.
2. When premolded insulation elbows and fittings are not available, apply mitered sections of pipe insulation, or glass-fiber blanket insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe
insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire, tape, or bands.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 0700 - 13 HVAC INSULATION
3. Cover fittings with standard PVC fitting covers.
4. Cover fittings with heavy PVC fitting covers. Overlap PVC covers on pipe insulation jackets
at least 1 inch at each end. Secure fitting covers with manufacturer's attachments and accessories. Seal seams with tape and vapor-retarder mastic.
D. Apply insulation to valves and specialties as follows:
1. Apply premolded insulation sections of the same material as straight segments of pipe
insulation when available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions.
2. When premolded insulation sections are not available, apply glass-fiber blanket insulation
to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. For check valves, arrange insulation for access to strainer
basket without disturbing insulation.
3. Apply insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
4. Use preformed heavy PVC fitting covers for valve sizes where available. Secure fitting covers with manufacturer's attachments and accessories. Seal seams with tape and vapor-
retarder mastic.
5. For larger sizes where PVC fitting covers are not available, seal insulation with canvas
jacket and sealing compound recommended by the insulation material manufacturer.
3.5 CELLULAR-GLASS INSULATION APPLICATION
A. Apply insulation to straight pipes and tubes as follows:
1. Secure each layer of insulation to pipe with wire, tape, or bands without deforming
insulation materials.
2. Where vapor retarders are indicated, seal longitudinal seams and end joints with vapor-
retarder mastic.
3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets, secure laps with outward clinched staples at 6
inches o.c.
4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets with vapor retarders, do not staple longitudinal
tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by the insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-retarder mastic.
B. Apply insulation to flanges as follows:
1. Apply preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
2. Make width of insulation segment the same as overall width of the flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of the pipe insulation.
3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of cellular-glass block insulation of the
same thickness as pipe insulation.
4. Apply canvas jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlapping
seams at least 1 inch, and seal joints with vapor-retarder mastic.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 0700 - 14 HVAC INSULATION
C. Apply insulation to fittings and elbows as follows:
1. Apply premolded insulation sections of the same material as straight segments of pipe
insulation when available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions.
2. When premolded sections of insulation are not available, apply mitered sections of cellular-
glass insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire, tape, or bands.
3. Cover fittings with heavy PVC fitting covers. Overlap PVC covers on pipe insulation jackets
at least 1 inch at each end. Secure fitting covers with manufacturer's attachments and accessories. Seal seams with tape and vapor-retarder mastic.
D. Apply insulation to valves and specialties as follows:
1. Apply premolded segments of cellular-glass insulation or glass-fiber blanket insulation to
valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. For check valves, arrange insulation for access to strainer
basket without disturbing insulation.
2. Apply insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
3. Use preformed standard PVC fitting covers for valve sizes where available. Secure fitting covers with manufacturer's attachments and accessories. Seal seams with tape and vapor-
retarder mastic.
4. Use preformed heavy PVC fitting covers for valve sizes where available. Secure fitting covers with manufacturer's attachments and accessories. Seal seams with tape and vapor-retarder mastic.
5. For larger sizes where PVC fitting covers are not available, seal insulation with canvas jacket and sealing compound recommended by the insulation material manufacturer.
3.6 CLOSED-CELL PHENOLIC-FOAM INSULATION APPLICATION
A. Apply insulation to straight pipes and tubes as follows:
1. Secure each layer of insulation to pipe with wire, tape, or bands without deforming insulation materials.
2. Where vapor retarders are indicated, seal longitudinal seams and end joints with vapor-retarder mastic.
3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets, secure laps with outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c.
4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets with vapor retarders, do not staple longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by the insulation material
manufacturer and seal with vapor-retarder mastic.
B. Apply insulation to flanges as follows:
1. Apply preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
2. Make width of insulation segment the same as overall width of the flange and bolts, plus
twice the thickness of the pipe insulation.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 0700 - 15 HVAC INSULATION
3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of block insulation of the same material
and thickness as pipe insulation.
4. Apply canvas jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlapping
seams at least 1 inch, and seal joints with vapor-retarder mastic.
C. Apply insulation to fittings and elbows as follows:
1. Apply premolded insulation sections of the same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions.
2. When premolded sections of insulation are not available, apply mitered sections of phenolic-foam insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire, tape, or bands.
3. Cover fittings with heavy PVC fitting covers. Overlap PVC covers on pipe insulation jackets at least 1 inch at each end. Secure fitting covers with manufacturer's attachments and
accessories. Seal seams with tape and vapor-retarder mastic.
D. Apply insulation to valves and specialties as follows:
1. Apply premolded insulation sections of the same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions.
2. When premolded sections of insulation are not available, apply mitered segments of phenolic-foam insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. For check valves, arrange insulation for access to strainer basket without disturbing insulation.
3. Apply insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
4. Use preformed heavy PVC fitting covers for valve sizes where available. Secure fitting
covers with manufacturer's attachments and accessories. Seal seams with tape and vapor-retarder mastic.
5. For larger sizes where PVC fitting covers are not available, seal insulation with canvas jacket and sealing compound recommended by the insulation material manufacturer.
3.7 FINISHES
A. Glass-Cloth Jacketed Insulation: Paint insulation finished with glass-cloth jacket as specified in
Division 9 Section "Painting."
B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of the
insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.
C. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual
inspection of the completed Work.
3.8 PIPING SYSTEM APPLICATIONS
A. Insulation materials and thicknesses are specified in schedules at the end of this Section.
B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not apply insulation to the following
systems, materials, and equipment:
1. Flexible connectors.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 0700 - 16 HVAC INSULATION
2. Vibration-control devices.
3. Fire-suppression piping.
4. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces, unless otherwise indicated.
5. Below-grade piping, unless otherwise indicated.
6. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings, unless potential for personnel injury.
7. Air chambers, unions, strainers, check valves, plug valves, and flow regulators.
3.9 INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A. Refer to insulation application schedules for required insulation materials, vapor retarders, and
field-applied jackets.
B. Application schedules identify piping system and indicate pipe size ranges and material,
thickness, and jacket requirements.
3.10 INTERIOR INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE
A. Indoor Duct and Plenum Application Schedule:
1. Service: Round, supply-air ducts, concealed.
a. Material: Mineral-fiber blanket. b. Thickness: 1-1/2 inch to achieve the minimum code required thermal (R) value.
c. Number of Layers: One. d. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes.
2. Service: Round, return-air ducts, concealed.
a. Material: Mineral-fiber blanket.
b. Thickness: 1-1/2 inch to achieve the minimum code required thermal (R) value. c. Number of Layers: One.
d. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes.
3. Service: Rectangular, supply-air ducts, concealed.
a. Material: Mineral-fiber blanket. b. Thickness: 1-1/2 inch to achieve the minimum code required thermal (R) value.
c. Number of Layers: One. d. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes.
4. Service: Rectangular, return-air ducts, concealed.
a. Material: Mineral-fiber blanket.
b. Thickness: 1-1/2 inch to achieve the minimum code required thermal (R) value. c. Number of Layers: One.
d. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes.
5. Service: Round, supply-air ducts, exposed.
a. Material: Mineral-fiber blanket. b. Thickness: 1-1/2 inch to achieve the minimum code required thermal (R) value.
c. Number of Layers: One.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 0700 - 17 HVAC INSULATION
d. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes.
6. Service: Round, return-air ducts, exposed.
a. Material: Mineral-fiber blanket. b. Thickness: 1-1/2 inch to achieve the minimum code required thermal (R) value.
c. Number of Layers: One. d. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes.
7. Service: Rectangular, supply-air ducts, exposed.
a. Material: Mineral-fiber insulation board.
b. Thickness: 1 inch to achieve the minimum code required thermal (R) value. c. Number of Layers: One.
d. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes.
8. Service: Rectangular, return-air ducts, exposed.
a. Material: Mineral-fiber insulation board. b. Thickness: 1 inch to achieve the minimum code required thermal (R) value. c. Number of Layers: One. d. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes.
B. Service: Chilled-water supply and return.
1. Operating Temperature: 35 to 75 deg F.
2. Insulation Material: Mineral fiber, Pre-formed pipe insulation
3. Insulation Thickness: Apply the following insulation thicknesses:
a. Copper Pipe, Up to 1-1/2”: 1” thick. b. Steel and Copper Pipe, 2”-8”: 1” thick.
4. Field-Applied Jacket: FSK or ASJ Vapor Retarder
5. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes.
6. Finish: Painted.
C. Service: Refrigerant suction and hot-gas piping.
1. Operating Temperature: 35 to 50 deg F.
2. Insulation Material: Closed-cell phenolic foam.
3. Insulation Thickness: Apply the following insulation thicknesses:
a. Copper Pipe, Up to 1-1/2”: 1-1/2” thick.
4. Field-Applied Jacket: Aluminum.
5. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes.
6. Finish: None.
D. Service: Heating hot-water supply and return.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 0700 - 18 HVAC INSULATION
1. Operating Temperature: 100 to 200 deg F.
2. Insulation Material: Mineral fiber, Pre-formed pipe insulation.
3. Insulation Thickness: Apply the following insulation thicknesses:
a. Copper Pipe, 1” & less: 1-1/2” thick. b. Copper Pipe, 1-1/4” – 2”: 1-1/2” thick. 4. Field-Applied Jacket: FSK or ASJ Vapor Retarder
5. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes.
6. Finish: Painted.
3.11 EXTERIOR INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE
A. This application schedule is for aboveground insulation outside the building.
B. Service Rectangular, supply-air ducts.
1. Material: Mineral-fiber insulation board.
2. Thickness: 2 inch to achieve the minimum code required thermal (R) value.
3. Number of Layers: One.
4. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes.
C. Service: Rectangular, return air-ducts.
1. Material Mineral-fiber insulation board.
2. Thickness: 2 inch to achieve the minimum code required thermal (R) value.
3. Number of Layers: One.
4. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes.
D. Service: Refrigerant suction.
1. Operating Temperature: 35 to 50 deg F.
2. Insulation Material: Closed-cell phenolic foam.
3. Insulation Thickness: Apply the following insulation thicknesses:
a. Copper Pipe, Up to 1-1/2”: 1-1/2” thick.
4. Field-Applied Jacket: Aluminum.
5. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes.
6. Finish: Painted.
E. Service: Chilled-water supply and return.
1. Operating Temperature: 35 to 75 deg F.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 0700 - 19 HVAC INSULATION
2. Insulation Material: Mineral fiber, Pre-formed pipe insulation.
3. Insulation Thickness: Apply the following insulation thicknesses:
a. Copper Pipe, Up to 1-1/2”: 1” thick. b. Steel and Copper Pipe, 2”-8”: 1” thick.
4. Field-Applied Jacket: Aluminum.
5. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes.
6. Finish: Painted.
F. Service: Heating hot-water supply and return.
1. Operating Temperature: 100 to 220 deg F.
2. Insulation Material: Mineral fiber, Pre-formed pipe insulation.
3. Insulation Thickness: Apply the following insulation thicknesses:
a. Copper Pipe, 1” & less: 1-1/2” thick.
b. Copper Pipe, 1-1/4” – 2”: 1-1/2” thick. c. Steel Pipe, 2-1/2” – 4”: 1-1/2” thick.
d. Steel Pipe, 6”: 1-1/2” thick.
4. Field-Applied Jacket: Aluminum.
5. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes.
6. Finish: Painted.
3.12 EQUIPMENT APPLICATIONS
A. Insulation materials and thicknesses are specified in schedules at the end of this Section.
B. Materials and thicknesses for systems listed below are specified in schedules at the end of this Section.
END OF SECTION
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and
HVAC Refurbishment
23 2300 - 1 REFRIGERATION PIPING
SECTION 23 2300 REFRIGERATION PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes refrigerant piping used for air-conditioning and refrigeration applications.
1.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Hot gas bypass shall only be used when directed by the City.
B. Line Test Pressure for Refrigerant R-410A:
1. Suction Lines for Air-Conditioning Applications: 300 psig. 2. Suction Lines for Heat-Pump Applications: 535 psig. 3. Hot-Gas and Liquid Lines: 535 psig.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of valve and refrigerant piping specialty indicated. Include pressure drop, based on manufacturer's test data, for the following:
1. Thermostatic expansion valves. 2. Solenoid valves. 3. Hot-gas bypass valves.
4. Filter dryers. 5. Strainers. 6. Pressure-regulating valves.
B. Shop Drawings: Show layout of refrigerant piping and specialties, including pipe, tube, and fitting sizes, flow capacities, valve arrangements and locations, slopes of horizontal runs, oil traps, double risers, wall and floor penetrations, and equipment connection details. Show interface and
spatial relationships between piping and equipment.
1. Shop Drawing Scale: 1/4 inch equals 1 foot. 2. Refrigerant piping indicated on Drawings is schematic only. Size piping and design actual piping layout, including oil traps, double risers, specialties, and pipe and tube sizes to accommodate, as a minimum, equipment provided, elevation difference between compressor and evaporator, and length of piping to ensure proper operation and
compliance with warranties of connected equipment.
C. Welding certificates.
D. Field quality-control test reports.
E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For refrigerant valves and piping specialties to include in maintenance manuals.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
B. Comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for Refrigeration Systems."
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and
HVAC Refurbishment
23 2300 - 2 REFRIGERATION PIPING
C. Comply with ASME B31.5, "Refrigeration Piping and Heat Transfer Components."
D. Equipment Manufacturer: Comply with equipment manufacturer’s requirements for piping installation, routing, sizing, and piping system accessories. Coordinate pipe sizes with manufacturer based upon equivalent length of pipe, pipe routing, and installed piping accessories.
1.05 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe stands, capable of supporting combined weight
of supported systems, system contents, and test water.
B. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components.
C. Design seismic-restraint hangers and supports shop drawing for piping and equipment in accordance with CBC.
D. Structural Seismic Performance: Refer to Division 23 Section “Vibration and Seismic Controls for
HVAC Piping and Equipment.”
1.06 PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Store piping in a clean and protected area with end caps in place to ensure that piping interior and exterior are clean when installed.
1.07 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of refrigerant piping and suspension system components with
other construction, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression-system components, and partition assemblies.
B. Coordinate pipe sleeve installations for foundation wall penetrations.
C. Coordinate pipe fitting pressure classes with products specified in related Sections.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Refrigerants:
a. Allied Signal, Inc./Fluorine Products; Genetron Refrigerants. b. DuPont Company; Fluorochemicals Div. c. Elf Atochem North America, Inc.; Fluorocarbon Div. d. ICI Americas Inc./ICI KLEA; Fluorochemicals Bus.
e. Or equal.
2. Refrigerant Valves and Specialties:
a. Climate & Industrial Controls Group; Parker-Hannifin Corp.; Refrigeration & Air Conditioning Division. b. Danfoss Electronics, Inc. c. Emerson Electric Company; Alco Controls Div.
d. Henry Valve Company. e. Sporlan Valve Company. f. Or equal.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and
HVAC Refurbishment
23 2300 - 3 REFRIGERATION PIPING
B. Or Equal: Where products are specified by manufacturers name and accompanied by the term "or equal", comply with provisions in Division 01. Specific procedures must be followed before use of an unnamed product or manufacturer.
2.02 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS
A. Copper Tube: ASTM B 280, Type ACR.
B. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22.
C. Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME B16.22.
D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32. Use 95-5 tin antimony or alloy HB solder to join copper socket fittings on copper pipe.
E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8.
F. Flexible Connectors:
1. Body: Tin-bronze bellows with woven, flexible, tinned-bronze-wire-reinforced protective jacket. 2. End Connections: Socket ends. 3. Offset Performance: Capable of minimum 3/4-inch misalignment in minimum 7-inch- long assembly. 4. Pressure Rating: Factory test at minimum 500 psig. 5. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F.
2.03 REFRIGERANTS
A. ASHRAE 34, R-410A: Pentafluoroethane/Difluoromethane.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PIPING APPLICATIONS
A. Copper, Type ACR, annealed-temper tubing and wrought-copper fittings with soldered joints.
3.02 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems; indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings.
B. Install refrigerant piping according to ASHRAE 15.
C. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms
and service areas.
D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.
E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.
F. Install piping adjacent to machines to allow service and maintenance.
G. Install piping free of sags and bends.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and
HVAC Refurbishment
23 2300 - 4 REFRIGERATION PIPING
H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
I. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.
J. Install piping as short and direct as possible, with a minimum number of joints, elbows, and fittings.
K. Arrange piping to allow inspection and service of refrigeration equipment. Install valves and specialties in accessible locations to allow for service and inspection.
L. Install refrigerant piping in rigid or flexible conduit in locations where exposed to mechanical injury.
M. Slope refrigerant piping as follows:
1. Install horizontal hot-gas discharge piping with a uniform slope downward away from compressor. 2. Install horizontal suction lines with a uniform slope downward to compressor. 3. Install traps and double risers to entrain oil in vertical runs.
4. Liquid lines may be installed level.
N. When brazing or soldering, remove solenoid-valve coils and sight glasses; also remove valve stems, seats, and packing, and accessible internal parts of refrigerant specialties. Do not apply heat near expansion-valve bulb.
O. Install pipe sleeves at penetrations in exterior walls and floor assemblies.
P. Install piping with adequate clearance between pipe and adjacent walls and hangers or between
pipes for insulation installation.
Q. Install sleeves through floors, walls, or ceilings, sized to permit installation of full-thickness insulation.
R. Install refrigerant safety relief valve discharge piping in compliance with CMC Chapter 11, including pipe diameter size according to refrigerant type, discharge location, and required clearances from discharge point.
3.03 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.
B. Soldered Joints: Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."
C. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," Chapter "Pipe and Tube."
1. Use Type BcuP, copper-phosphorus alloy for joining copper socket fittings with copper
pipe. 2. Use Type BAg, cadmium-free silver alloy for joining copper with bronze or steel.
3.04 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Piping hangers and supports must accommodate expansion and contraction, vibration, dead load of piping and its contents, and seismic-bracing requirements.
B. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:
1. NPS 1/2: Maximum span, 60 inches; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 2. NPS 5/8: Maximum span, 60 inches; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and
HVAC Refurbishment
23 2300 - 5 REFRIGERATION PIPING
3. NPS 1: Maximum span, 72 inches; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.
C. Support multi-floor vertical runs at least at each floor.
3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
B. Tests and Inspections:
1. Comply with ASME B31.5, Chapter VI. 2. Test refrigerant piping, specialties, and receivers. Isolate compressor, condenser, evaporator, and safety devices from test pressure if they are not rated above the test pressure. 3. Test high- and low-pressure side piping of each system separately at not less than the pressures indicated in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article.
a. Fill system with nitrogen to the required test pressure.
b. System shall maintain test pressure at the manifold gage throughout duration of test. c. Test joints and fittings with electronic leak detector or by brushing a small amount of soap and glycerin solution over joints. d. Remake leaking joints using new materials, and retest until satisfactory results are achieved.
3.06 SYSTEM CHARGING
A. Charge system using the following procedures:
1. Install core in filter dryers after leak test but before evacuation. 2. Evacuate entire refrigerant system with a vacuum pump to 500 micrometers. If vacuum holds for 12 hours, system is ready for charging. 3. Break vacuum with refrigerant gas, allowing pressure to build up to 2 psig. 4. Charge system with a new filter-dryer core in charging line.
3.07 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust thermostatic expansion valve to obtain proper evaporator superheat.
B. Adjust high- and low-pressure switch settings to avoid short cycling in response to fluctuating suction pressure.
C. Adjust set-point temperature of air-conditioning or chilled-water controllers to the system design temperature.
D. Perform the following adjustments before operating the refrigeration system, according to manufacturer's written instructions:
1. Open shutoff valves in condenser water circuit. 2. Verify that compressor oil level is correct. 3. Open compressor suction and discharge valves. 4. Open refrigerant valves except bypass valves that are used for other purposes.
5. Check open compressor-motor alignment and verify lubrication for motors and bearings.
E. Replace core of replaceable filter dryer after system has been adjusted and after design flow rates and pressures are established.
END OF SECTION
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 3113 - 1 HVAC DUCTWORK – METAL DUCTS
SECTION 23 3113 HVAC DUCTWORK – METAL DUCTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and General Provisions apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes metal ducts for supply, return, outside, and exhaust air-distribution systems in pressure classes from minus 2- to plus 10-inch wg. Metal ducts include the following:
1. Rectangular ducts and fittings.
2. Single-wall, round, and flat-oval spiral-seam ducts and formed fittings.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound-control devices, duct-
mounting access doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. FRP: Fiberglass-reinforced plastic.
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Duct system design, as indicated, has been used to select size and type of air-moving and -distribution equipment and other air system components. Changes to layout or configuration of
duct system must be specifically approved in writing by Architect.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: CAD-generated and drawn to 1/4 inch equals 1 foot scale. Show fabrication and installation details for metal ducts.
1. Fabrication, assembly, and installation, including plans, elevations, sections, components, and attachments to other work.
2. Duct layout indicating sizes and pressure classes.
3. Elevations of top and bottom of ducts.
4. Dimensions of main duct runs from building grid lines.
5. Fittings.
6. Reinforcement and spacing.
7. Seam and joint construction.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 3113 - 2 HVAC DUCTWORK – METAL DUCTS
8. Penetrations through fire-rated and other partitions.
9. Equipment installation based on equipment being used on Project.
10. Duct accessories, including access doors and panels.
11. Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and building attachment, vibration isolation, and seismic restraints.
B. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved:
1. Ceiling suspension assembly members.
2. Other systems installed in same space as ducts.
3. Ceiling- and wall-mounting access doors and panels required to provide access to dampers and other operating devices.
4. Ceiling-mounting items, including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers, access panels, and special moldings.
C. Welding certificates.
D. Field quality-control test reports.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. NFPA Compliance:
1. NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems."
2. NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."
B. Comply with NFPA 96, "Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking Operations," Ch. 3, "Duct System," for range hood ducts, unless otherwise indicated.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified.
2.2 SHEET METAL MATERIALS
A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods, unless otherwise
indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 3113 - 3 HVAC DUCTWORK – METAL DUCTS
B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality; complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M and having G90 coating designation; ducts shall have mill-phosphatized finish for surfaces exposed to
view.
C. Carbon-Steel Sheets: ASTM A 366/A 366M, cold-rolled sheets; commercial quality; with oiled,
matte finish for exposed ducts.
D. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 480/A 480M, Type 304.
E. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on galvanized sheet metal ducts.
F. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.
2.3 DUCT LINER
A. Fibrous-Glass Liner: Comply with NFPA 90A, NFPA 90B, NAIMA AH124 and State of
California Title-24 Energy Conservation Standards, latest edition, as a minimum.
1. Manufacturers:
a. CertainTeed Corp.; Insulation Group. b. Johns Manville International, Inc.
c. Knauf Fiber Glass GmbH. d. Owens Corning.
2. Materials: ASTM C 1071; surfaces exposed to airstream shall be coated to prevent erosion of glass fibers.
a. Thickness: 1 inch indoor and 2 inch for outdoor application. b. Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): 0.26 at 75 deg F mean temperature.
c. Fire-Hazard Classification: Maximum flame-spread index of 25 and smoke-developed index of 50 when tested according to ASTM E 84.
d. Liner Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and with ASTM C 916. e. Mechanical Fasteners: Galvanized steel suitable for adhesive attachment,
mechanical attachment, or welding attachment to duct without damaging liner when applied as recommended by manufacturer and without causing leakage in duct.
1) Tensile Strength: Indefinitely sustain a 50-lb- tensile, dead-load test perpendicular to duct wall.
2) Fastener Pin Length: As required for thickness of insulation and without projecting more than 1/8 inch into airstream.
3) Adhesive for Attaching Mechanical Fasteners: Comply with fire-hazard classification of duct liner system.
2.4 SEALANT MATERIALS
A. Joint and Seam Sealants, General: The term "sealant" is not limited to materials of adhesive or
mastic nature but includes tapes and combinations of open-weave fabric strips and mastics.
B. Joint and Seam Tape: 2 inches wide; glass-fiber-reinforced fabric.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 3113 - 4 HVAC DUCTWORK – METAL DUCTS
C. Tape Sealing System: Woven-fiber tape impregnated with gypsum mineral compound and modified acrylic/silicone activator to react exothermically with tape to form hard, durable, airtight
seal.
D. Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant: Flexible, adhesive sealant, resistant to UV light when
cured, UL 723 listed, and complying with NFPA requirements for Class 1 ducts.
E. Solvent-Based Joint and Seam Sealant: One-part, nonsag, solvent-release-curing,
polymerized butyl sealant formulated with a minimum of 75 percent solids.
F. Flanged Joint Mastic: One-part, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric joint sealant complying with
ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use O.
G. Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer.
2.5 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel
fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached.
1. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes or for
slabs more than 4 inches thick.
2. Exception: Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate
concretes or for slabs less than 4 inches thick.
B. Hanger Materials: Galvanized sheet steel or threaded steel rod.
1. Hangers Installed in Corrosive Atmospheres: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rods or galvanized rods with threads painted with zinc-chromate primer after installation.
2. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards-Metal and Flexible" for steel sheet width and thickness and for steel rod diameters.
3. Galvanized-steel straps attached to aluminum ducts shall have contact surfaces painted with zinc-chromate primer.
C. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible with duct materials.
D. Trapeze and Riser Supports: Steel shapes complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M.
1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates.
2. Supports for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless-steel support materials.
3. Supports for Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum support materials unless materials are
electrolytically separated from ducts.
2.6 RECTANGULAR DUCT FABRICATION
A. Fabricate ducts, elbows, transitions, offsets, branch connections, and other construction according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" and
complying with requirements for metal thickness, reinforcing types and intervals, tie-rod applications, and joint types and intervals.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 3113 - 5 HVAC DUCTWORK – METAL DUCTS
1. Lengths: Fabricate rectangular ducts in lengths appropriate to reinforcement and rigidity class required for pressure class.
2. Deflection: Duct systems shall not exceed deflection limits according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible."
B. Transverse Joints: Prefabricated slide-on joints and components constructed using manufacturer's guidelines for material thickness, reinforcement size and spacing, and joint
reinforcement.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Ductmate Industries, Inc. b. Nexus Inc.
c. Ward Industries, Inc.
C. Formed-On Flanges: Construct according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--
Metal and Flexible," Figure 1-4, using corner, bolt, cleat, and gasket details.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Ductmate Industries, Inc. b. Lockformer.
2. Duct Size: Maximum 30 inches wide and up to 2-inch wg pressure class.
3. Longitudinal Seams: Pittsburgh lock sealed with noncuring polymer sealant.
D. Cross Breaking or Cross Beading: Cross break or cross bead duct sides 19 inches and larger and 0.0359 inch thick or less, with more than 10 sq. ft. of nonbraced panel area unless ducts
are lined.
E. Secure insulation between perforated sheet metal inner duct of same thickness as specified for
outer shell. Use mechanical fasteners that maintain inner duct at uniform distance from outer shell without compressing insulation.
1. Sheet Metal Inner Duct Perforations: 3/32-inch diameter, with an overall open area of 23 percent.
2.7 ROUND AND FLAT-OVAL DUCT AND FITTING FABRICATION
A. Diameter as applied to flat-oval ducts in this Article is the diameter of a round duct with a
circumference equal to the perimeter of a given size of flat-oval duct.
B. Round, Spiral Lock-Seam Ducts: Fabricate supply ducts of galvanized steel according to
SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible."
C. Flat-Oval, Spiral Lock-Seam Ducts: Fabricate supply ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC
Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible. Fabricate ducts larger than 72 inches in diameter with butt-welded longitudinal seams.
D. Duct Joints:
1. Ducts up to 20 Inches in Diameter: Interior, center-beaded slip coupling, sealed before and
after fastening, attached with sheet metal screws.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 3113 - 6 HVAC DUCTWORK – METAL DUCTS
2. Ducts 21 to 72 Inches in Diameter: Three-piece, gasketed, flanged joint consisting of two internal flanges with sealant and one external closure band with gasket.
3. Ducts Larger Than 72 Inches in Diameter: Companion angle flanged joints per SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-2.
4. Round Ducts: Prefabricated connection system consisting of double-lipped, EPDM rubber gasket. Manufacture ducts according to connection system manufacturer's tolerances.
a. Manufacturers: 1) Ductmate Industries, Inc.
2) Lindab Inc.
5. Flat-Oval Ducts: Prefabricated connection system consisting of two flanges and one
synthetic rubber gasket.
a. Manufacturers: 1) Ductmate Industries, Inc. 2) McGill AirFlow Corporation.
3) SEMCO Incorporated.
E. 90-Degree Tees and Laterals and Conical Tees: Fabricate to comply with SMACNA's "HVAC
Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible," with metal thicknesses specified for longitudinal-seam straight ducts.
F. Diverging-Flow Fittings: Fabricate with reduced entrance to branch taps and with no excess material projecting from fitting onto branch tap entrance.
G. Fabricate elbows using die-formed, pleated, or mitered construction. Bend radius of die-formed, and pleated elbows shall be 1-1/2 times duct diameter. Unless elbow construction type
is indicated, fabricate elbows as follows:
1. Mitered-Elbow Radius and Number of Pieces: Welded construction complying with
SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible," unless otherwise indicated.
2. Round Mitered Elbows: Welded construction with the following metal thickness for pressure classes from minus 2- to plus 2-inch wg:
a. Ducts 3 to 36 Inches in Diameter: 0.034 inch. b. Ducts 37 to 50 Inches in Diameter: 0.040 inch.
c. Ducts 52 to 60 Inches in Diameter: 0.052 inch. d. Ducts 62 to 84 Inches in Diameter: 0.064 inch.
3. Round Mitered Elbows: Welded construction with the following metal thickness for pressure classes from 2- to 10-inch wg:
a. Ducts 3 to 26 Inches in Diameter: 0.034 inch. b. Ducts 27 to 50 Inches in Diameter: 0.040 inch.
c. Ducts 52 to 60 Inches in Diameter: 0.052 inch. d. Ducts 62 to 84 Inches in Diameter: 0.064 inch.
4. Flat-Oval Mitered Elbows: Welded construction with same metal thickness as longitudinal-seam flat-oval duct.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 3113 - 7 HVAC DUCTWORK – METAL DUCTS
5. 90-Degree, 2-Piece, Mitered Elbows: Use only for supply systems or for material-handling Class A or B exhaust systems and only where space restrictions do not permit using radius
elbows. Fabricate with single-thickness turning vanes.
6. Round Elbows 8 Inches and Less in Diameter: Fabricate die-formed elbows for 45- and 90-degree elbows and pleated elbows for 30, 45, 60, and 90 degrees only. Fabricate nonstandard bend-angle configurations or nonstandard diameter elbows with gored construction.
7. Round Elbows 9 through 14 Inches in Diameter: Fabricate gored or pleated elbows for 30, 45, 60, and 90 degrees unless space restrictions require mitered elbows. Fabricate nonstandard bend-angle configurations or nonstandard diameter elbows with gored
construction.
8. Round Elbows Larger Than 14 Inches in Diameter and All Flat-Oval Elbows: Fabricate
gored elbows unless space restrictions require mitered elbows.
9. Die-Formed Elbows for Sizes through 8 Inches in Diameter and All Pressures 0.040 inch
thick with 2-piece welded construction.
10. Flat-Oval Elbow Metal Thickness: Same as longitudinal-seam flat-oval duct specified
above.
11. Pleated Elbows for Sizes through 14 Inches in Diameter and Pressures through 10-Inch
wg: 0.022 inch.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 DUCT APPLICATIONS
A. Static-Pressure Classes: Unless otherwise indicated, construct ducts according to the following:
1. Main Supply Ducts: 4-inch wg, medium pressure.
2. Supply Ducts (before Air Terminal Units): 4-inch wg, medium pressure.
3. Supply Ducts (after Air Terminal Units): 2-inch wg, low pressure.
4. Return Ducts (Negative Pressure): 2-inch wg, low pressure
5. Exhaust Ducts (Negative Pressure): 4-inch wg, medium pressure.
6. Outside Air Ducts: 4-inch wg, medium pressure.
3.2 DUCT INSTALLATION
A. Construct and install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards-Metal
and Flexible," unless otherwise indicated.
B. Install round and flat-oval ducts in lengths not less than 12 feet unless interrupted by fittings.
C. Install ducts with fewest possible joints.
D. Install fabricated fittings for changes in directions, size, and shape and for connections.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 3113 - 8 HVAC DUCTWORK – METAL DUCTS
E. Install couplings tight to duct wall surface with a minimum of projections into duct. Secure couplings with sheet metal screws. Install screws at intervals of 12 inches, with a minimum of 3
screws in each coupling.
F. Install ducts, unless otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally and parallel and
perpendicular to building lines; avoid diagonal runs.
G. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and
permanent enclosure elements of building.
H. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness.
I. Conceal ducts from view in finished spaces. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions unless specifically indicated.
J. Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling, fire- and smoke-control dampers, lighting layouts, and similar finished work.
K. Seal all joints and seams. Apply sealant to male end connectors before insertion, and afterward to cover entire joint and sheet metal screws.
L. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment spaces and enclosures.
M. Non-Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior walls and are exposed to view, conceal spaces between construction openings and ducts or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as ducts. Overlap openings on 4 sides by at least 1-1/2 inches.
N. Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior walls, install appropriately rated fire dampers, sleeves, and firestopping sealant. Fire and
smoke dampers are specified in Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories." Firestopping materials and installation methods are specified in Division 7 Section "Firestopping."
O. Protect duct interiors from the elements and foreign materials until building is enclosed. Follow SMACNA's "Duct Cleanliness for New Construction."
P. Paint interiors of metal ducts, that do not have duct liner, for 24 inches upstream of registers and grilles. Apply one coat of flat, black, latex finish coat over a compatible galvanized-steel
primer. Paint materials and application requirements are specified in Division 9 painting Sections.
Q. Prime and paint interiors and exteriors of exhaust and outside ducts and risers including all joints to prevent corrosion. Refer to Division 9 specification for paint materials and application
requirements.
3.3 SEAM AND JOINT SEALING
A. Seal duct seams and joints according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for duct pressure class indicated.
1. For pressure classes lower than 2-inch wg, seal transverse joints.
B. Seal ducts before external insulation is applied.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 3113 - 9 HVAC DUCTWORK – METAL DUCTS
3.4 HANGING AND SUPPORTING
A. Support horizontal ducts within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch
intersection.
B. Support vertical ducts at maximum intervals of 16 feet and at each floor.
C. Install upper attachments to structures with an allowable load not exceeding one-fourth of failure (proof-test) load.
D. Install concrete inserts before placing concrete.
E. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured.
1. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes or for slabs less than 4 inches thick.
3.5 CONNECTIONS
A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors according to Division 15 Section "Duct
Accessories."
B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for branch,
outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections.
3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following field tests and inspections according to SMACNA's "HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual" and prepare test reports:
1. Disassemble, reassemble, and seal segments of systems to accommodate leakage testing and for compliance with test requirements.
2. Conduct tests at static pressures equal to maximum design pressure of system or section being tested. If pressure classes are not indicated, test entire system at maximum system
design pressure. Do not pressurize systems above maximum design operating pressure. Give seven days' advance notice for testing.
3. Maximum Allowable Leakage: Comply with requirements for Leakage Class 3 for round and flat-oval ducts, Leakage Class 12 for rectangular ducts in pressure classes lower than
and equal to 2-inch wg (both positive and negative pressures), and Leakage Class 6 for pressure classes from 2- to 10-inch wg.
4. Remake leaking joints and retest until leakage is equal to or less than maximum allowable.
5. Per Section 909 of 2016 CBC, duct system used as part of smoke control system shall be
pressure tested to 1.5 times maximum design pressure.
3.7 CLEANING NEW SYSTEMS
A. Mark position of dampers and air-directional mechanical devices before cleaning, and perform cleaning before air balancing.
B. Use service openings, as required, for physical and mechanical entry and for inspection.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 3113 - 10 HVAC DUCTWORK – METAL DUCTS
1. Create other openings to comply with duct standards.
2. Disconnect flexible ducts as needed for cleaning and inspection.
3. Remove and reinstall ceiling sections to gain access during the cleaning process.
C. Vent vacuuming system to the outside. Include filtration to contain debris removed from HVAC systems, and locate exhaust down wind and away from air intakes and other points of entry into building.
D. Clean the following metal duct systems by removing surface contaminants and deposits:
1. Air outlets and inlets (registers, grilles, and diffusers).
2. Supply, return, and exhaust fans including fan housings, plenums (except ceiling supply and return plenums), scrolls, blades or vanes, shafts, baffles, dampers, and drive assemblies.
3. Air-handling unit internal surfaces and components including mixing box, coil section, air
wash systems, spray eliminators, condensate drain pans, humidifiers and dehumidifiers, filters and filter sections, and condensate collectors and drains.
4. Coils and related components.
5. Return-air ducts, dampers, and actuators except in ceiling plenums and mechanical
equipment rooms.
6. Supply-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes.
E. Mechanical Cleaning Methodology:
1. Clean metal duct systems using mechanical cleaning methods that extract contaminants
from within duct systems and remove contaminants from building.
2. Use vacuum-collection devices that are operated continuously during cleaning. Connect
vacuum device to downstream end of duct sections so areas being cleaned are under negative pressure.
3. Use mechanical agitation to dislodge debris adhered to interior duct surfaces without damaging integrity of metal ducts, duct liner, or duct accessories.
4. Clean fibrous-glass duct liner with HEPA vacuuming equipment; do not permit duct liner to get wet.
5. Clean coils and coil drain pans according to NADCA 1992. Keep drain pan operational. Rinse coils with clean water to remove latent residues and cleaning materials; comb and
straighten fins.
F. Cleanliness Verification:
1. Visually inspect metal ducts for contaminants.
2. Where contaminants are discovered, re-clean and reinspect ducts.
END OF SECTION
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 3300 - 1 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
SECTION 23 3300 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
L. Drawings and General Provisions apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Backdraft dampers.
2. Volume dampers.
3. Volume damper remote control cable assemblies.
4. Motorized control dampers.
5. Fire dampers.
6. Ceiling fire dampers.
7. Combination fire and smoke dampers.
8. Turning vanes.
9. Duct-mounting access doors.
10. Flexible connectors.
11. Flexible ducts.
12. Duct accessory hardware.
13. Duct silencers.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Backdraft dampers.
2. Volume dampers.
3. Motorized control dampers.
4. Fire dampers.
5. Ceiling fire dampers.
6. Combination fire and smoke dampers.
7. Turning vanes.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 3300 - 2 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
8. Duct-mounting access doors.
9. Flexible connectors.
10. Flexible ducts.
11. Duct Accessory hardware.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.
1. Special fittings.
2. Manual-volume damper installations.
3. Motorized-control damper installations.
4. Fire-damper, smoke-damper, and combination fire- and smoke-damper installations, including sleeves and duct-mounting access doors.
5. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
M. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale and coordinating penetrations
and ceiling-mounting items. Show ceiling-mounting access panels and access doors required for access to duct accessories.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and
NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
manufacturers specified.
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified.
2.2 SHEET METAL MATERIALS
A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods, unless otherwise
indicated.
B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality; complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M and having
G90 coating designation; ducts shall have mill-phosphatized finish for surfaces exposed to view.
C. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 480/A 480M.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 3300 - 3 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
N. Aluminum Sheets: ASTM B 209, alloy 3003, temper H14; with mill finish for concealed ducts and standard, 1-side bright finish for exposed ducts.
O. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221, alloy 6063, temper T6.
P. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on
galvanized sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts.
Q. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch
minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.
2.3 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Air Balance, Inc.
2. Greenheck.
3. Penn Ventilation Company, Inc.
4. Ruskin Company.
B. Description: Multiple-blade, parallel action gravity balanced, with center-pivoted blades of
maximum 6-inch width, with sealed edges, assembled in rattle-free manner with 90-degree stop, steel ball bearings, and axles; adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential
static pressure.
C. Frame: 0.052-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel, with welded corners and mounting flange.
D. Blades: 0.025-inch- thick, roll-formed aluminum.
E. Blade Seals: Vinyl or Neoprene.
F. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel.
G. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.
R. Return Spring: Adjustable tension.
2.4 VOLUME DAMPERS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Air Balance, Inc.
2. Greenheck
3. Penn Ventilation Company, Inc.
4. Ruskin Company.
B. General Description: Factory fabricated, with required hardware and accessories. Stiffen
damper blades for stability. Include locking device to hold single-blade dampers in a fixed position without vibration. Close duct penetrations for damper components to seal duct
consistent with pressure class.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 3300 - 4 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
1. Pressure Classes of 3-Inch wg or Higher: End bearings or other seals for ducts with axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft.
C. Standard Volume Dampers: Multiple- or single-blade, parallel- or opposed-blade design as indicated, standard leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream, and suitable for horizontal or
vertical applications.
1. Steel Frames: Hat-shaped, galvanized sheet steel channels, minimum of 0.064 inch thick, with mitered and welded corners; frames with flanges where indicated for attaching to walls and flangeless frames where indicated for installing in ducts.
2. Roll-Formed Steel Blades: 0.064-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel.
3. Aluminum Frames: Hat-shaped, 0.10-inch- thick, aluminum sheet channels; frames with flanges where indicated for attaching to walls; and flangeless frames where indicated for installing in ducts.
4. Roll-Formed Aluminum Blades: 0.10-inch- thick aluminum sheet.
5. Extruded-Aluminum Blades: 0.050-inch- thick extruded aluminum.
6. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel.
7. Bearings: Oil-impregnated bronze.
8. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.
D. Low-Leakage Volume Dampers: Multiple- or single-blade, parallel- or opposed-blade design as
indicated, low-leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream, and suitable for horizontal or vertical applications.
1. Steel Frames: Hat-shaped, galvanized sheet steel channels, minimum of 0.064 inch thick, with mitered and welded corners; frames with flanges where indicated for attaching to walls
and flangeless frames where indicated for installing in ducts.
2. Roll-Formed Steel Blades: 0.064-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel.
3. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel.
4. Bearings: Oil-impregnated bronze thrust or ball.
5. Blade Seals: Vinyl or Neoprene.
6. Jamb Seals: Cambered stainless steel.
7. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.
E. Jackshaft: 1-inch- diameter, galvanized-steel pipe rotating within pipe-bearing assembly
mounted on supports at each mullion and at each end of multiple-damper assemblies.
1. Length and Number of Mountings: Appropriate to connect linkage of each damper in
multiple-damper assembly.
F. Damper Hardware: Zinc-plated, die-cast core with dial and handle made of 3/32-inch- thick
zinc-plated steel, and a 3/4-inch hexagon locking nut. Include center hole to suit damper operating-rod size. Include elevated platform for insulated duct mounting.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 3300 - 5 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
2.5 VOLUME DAMPER CONTROL CABLE ASSEMBLIES
A. Manufacturer:
1. Young Regulator Company.
B. Concealed Ceiling Regulator:
1. Damper controller and cable shall be concealed above the ceiling. Cable to consist of Bowden cable .054" stainless steel control wire encapsulated in 1-16" flexible galvanized spiral wire sheath. Control kit shall consist of 2-5/8" diameter die cast aluminum housing with 3" diameter zinc plated (polished chrome is optional) cover and 14 gauge steel rack
and pinion gear drive converting rotary motion to push-pull motion. Control shaft shall be D-style flatted and 1/4" diameter with 265-degree rotation providing graduations for positive locking and control, and 1-1/2" linear travel capability. Control kit is designed to be imbedded in the ceiling flush with the finished surface. Control kit shall be manually
operated using Young Regulator Model 030-12 wrench. Control kit shall be Young Regulator Model 270-301.
C. Controller Mounted in Plenum of Slot Diffusers:
1. Damper controller and cable shall be concealed above the ceiling. Cable to consist of
Bowden cable .054" stainless steel control wire encapsulated in 1/16" flexible galvanized spiral wire sheath. Control kit shall be designed for use with internally or externally
controlled round or rectangular dampers and shall consist of 14 gauge steel rack and pinion gear drive converting rotary motion to push-pull motion. Control shaft shall be D-style flatted and 1/4" diameter with 265-degree rotation providing 1-1/2" linear travel capability. Control kit mounting bracket be field mounted on ceiling framework, behind grilles on or
inside plenum slot diffusers and other various types of diffusers. Control kit shall be manually operated using Young Regulator Model 030-12 wrench. Control kit shall be
Young Regulator Model 270-275.
2. Damper(s) to be constructed of heavy duty galvanized steel spiral shell design with rolled-in
stiffening beads for superior rigidity. Spiral shell shall have one crimped end and one straight end for ease of installation. Damper to include "V" style 20 gauge galvanized steel
blade secured with 1/2" diameter steel shafts and high strength Teflon bushings requiring no lubrication. Damper shall include all necessary hardware to ensure compatibility with
Bowden remote cable control system. Damper(s) shall be Young Regulator Model 5020-CC.
2.6 MOTORIZED CONTROL DAMPERS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Air Balance, Inc.
2. Greenheck.
3. Penn Ventilation Company, Inc.
4. Ruskin Company.
B. General Description: AMCA-rated, opposed-blade design; minimum of 0.1084-inch- thick, galvanized-steel frames with holes for duct mounting; minimum of 0.0635-inch- thick,
galvanized-steel damper blades with maximum blade width of 8 inches.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 3300 - 6 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
1. Secure blades to 1/2-inch- diameter, zinc-plated axles using zinc-plated hardware, with nylon blade bearings, blade-linkage hardware of zinc-plated steel and brass, ends sealed against spring-stainless-steel blade bearings, and thrust bearings at each end of every blade.
2. Operating Temperature Range: From minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.
3. Provide closed-cell neoprene edging.
4. Dampers used as part of smoke control system shall meet the requirements of 2016 CBC, Section 909.
2.7 FIRE DAMPERS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Air Balance, Inc.
2. Greenheck.
3. Penn Ventilation Company, Inc.
4. Ruskin Company.
B. Fire dampers shall be labeled according to UL 555.
C. Fire Rating: 1-1/2 or 3 hours.
D. Frame: Curtain type with blades outside airstream; fabricated with roll-formed, 0.034-inch- thick galvanized steel; with mitered and interlocking corners.
E. Mounting Sleeve: Factory- or field-installed, galvanized sheet steel.
1. Minimum Thickness: 0.052 or 0.138 inch thick as indicated and of length to suit
application.
2. Exceptions: Omit sleeve where damper frame width permits direct attachment of perimeter
mounting angles on each side of wall or floor, and thickness of damper frame complies with sleeve requirements.
F. Mounting Orientation: Vertical or horizontal as indicated.
G. Blades: Roll-formed, interlocking, 0.034-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel. In place of
interlocking blades, use full-length, 0.034-inch- thick, galvanized-steel blade connectors.
H. Horizontal Dampers: Include blade lock and stainless-steel closure spring.
I. Fusible Links: Replaceable, 165 deg F rated.
2.8 CEILING FIRE DAMPERS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Air Balance, Inc.
2. Greenheck.
3. McGill AirFlow Corporation.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 3300 - 7 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
4. METALAIRE, Inc.
5. Nailor Industries Inc.
6. Penn Ventilation Company, Inc.
7. Ruskin Company.
B. General Description: Labeled according to UL 555C; comply with construction details for tested floor- and roof-ceiling assemblies as indicated in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory."
C. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, round or rectangular, style to suit ceiling construction.
D. Blades: Galvanized sheet steel with refractory insulation.
E. Fusible Links: Replaceable, 165 deg F rated.
2.9 COMBINATION FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Air Balance, Inc.
2. Greenheck.
3. Penn Ventilation Company, Inc.
4. Ruskin Company.
B. Model: FSD-300 series combination fire smoke dampers.
C. Ratings:
1. Fire Resistance: Dampers shall have a UL 555 fire resistance rating of 1-1/2 hours.
2. Fire Closure Temperature: Each combination fire smoke damper shall be equipped with a factory installed heat responsive device rated to close the damper when the temperature at
the damper reaches 165°.
3. Elevated Operational Temperature: Dampers shall have a UL 555S elevated temperature
rating of 350°F.
4. Leakage: Dampers shall have a UL555S leakage rating of Leakage Class II.
5. Velocity: Dampers shall have a minimum UL 555S velocity rating of 3000 fpm.
D. Construction:
1. Frame: Damper frame shall be 16 ga. galvanized steel formed into a 5” x 1” structural hat channel. Top and bottom frame members on dampers less than 17” high shall be low
profile design to maximize the free area of these smaller dampers. Frame shall be 4-piece construction with 1-1/2” (minimum) integral overlapping gusset reinforcements in each
corner to assure square corners and provide maximum resistance to racking.
2. Blades: Damper blades shall be 16 ga. galvanized steel with full length structural
reinforcement and a double skin airfoil shape. Each blade shall be symmetrical relative to its axle pivot point, presenting identical performance characteristics with air flowing in either
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 3300 - 8 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
direction through the damper. Provide symmetrical blades of varying size as required to completely fill the damper opening.
3. Blade Stops: Each blade stop (at top and bottom of damper frame) shall occupy no more than 1/2” of the damper opening area to allow for maximum free area and to minimize
pressure loss across the damper.
4. Seals:
a. Blade Edge: Blade seals shall be extruded silicone rubber permanently bonded to the appropriate blade edges.
b. Jamb: Flexible stainless steel compression type.
5. Linkage: Concealed in jamb.
6. Retaining Angles: Damper shall be supplied with factory retaining angles sized to provide installation overlap in accordance with the manufacturer’s UL listing.
7. Axles: Minimum ½ inch dia. plated steel.
8. Bearings: Axle bearings shall be sintered bronze sleeve type rotating in polished extruded
holes in the damper frame.
9. Sleeve: Damper shall be supplied as a single assembly with a factory sleeve.
E. Actuators:
1. Type: Electric, 120V AC, 2-position
2. Mounting: External
F. Damper shall be furnished with temperature limited override equivalent to Greenheck TOR.
2.10 TURNING VANES
A. Fabricate to comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible"
for vanes and vane runners. Vane runners shall automatically align vanes.
B. Manufactured Turning Vanes: Fabricate 1-1/2-inch- wide, double-vane, curved blades of
galvanized sheet steel set 3/4 inch o.c.; support with bars perpendicular to blades set 2 inches o.c.; and set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Ductmate Industries, Inc.
b. Duro Dyne Corp. c. Ward Industries, Inc.
C. Acoustic Turning Vanes: Fabricate airfoil-shaped aluminum extrusions with perforated faces and fibrous-glass fill.
2.11 DUCT-MOUNTING ACCESS DOORS
A. General Description: Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 3300 - 9 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
B. Door: Double wall, duct mounting, and rectangular; fabricated of galvanized sheet metal with insulation fill and thickness as indicated for duct pressure class. Include vision panel where
indicated. Include 1-by-1-inch butt or piano hinge and cam latches.
1. Manufacturers:
a. American Warming and Ventilating. b. CESCO Products. c. Ductmate Industries, Inc. d. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. e. Greenheck. f. McGill AirFlow Corporation.
g. Nailor Industries Inc. h. Ventfabrics, Inc.
i. Ward Industries, Inc.
2. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with bend-over tabs and foam gaskets.
3. Provide number of hinges and locks as follows:
a. Less Than 12 Inches Square: Secure with two sash locks.
b. Up to 18 Inches Square: Two hinges and two sash locks. c. Up to 24 by 48 Inches: Three hinges and two compression latches with outside and inside handles. d. Sizes 24 by 48 Inches and Larger: One additional hinge.
C. Door: Double wall, duct mounting, and round; fabricated of galvanized sheet metal with insulation fill and 1-inch thickness. Include cam latches.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Ductmate Industries, Inc.
b. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.
2. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with spin-in notched frame.
D. Pressure Relief Access Door: Double wall and duct mounting; fabricated of galvanized sheet metal with insulation fill and thickness as indicated for duct pressure class. Include vision panel
where indicated, latches, and retaining chain.
1. Manufacturers:
a. American Warming and Ventilating. b. CESCO Products.
c. Ductmate Industries, Inc. d. Greenheck.
e. KEES, Inc. f. McGill AirFlow Corporation.
g. Nexus PDQ.
2. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with bend-over tabs and foam gaskets.
E. Seal around frame attachment to duct and door to frame with neoprene or foam rubber.
F. Insulation: 1-inch- thick, fibrous-glass or polystyrene-foam board.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 3300 - 10 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
2.12 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Ductmate Industries, Inc.
2. Duro Dyne Corp.
3. Ventfabrics, Inc.
4. Ward Industries, Inc.
B. General Description: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics, coatings, and adhesives complying with UL 181, Class 1.
C. Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 3-1/2 inches wide attached to two strips of 2-3/4-inch- wide, 0.028-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel or 0.032-inch- thick
aluminum sheets. Select metal compatible with ducts.
D. Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene.
1. Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd..
2. Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch in the warp and 360 lbf/inch in the filling.
3. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.
E. Outdoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with weatherproof,
synthetic rubber resistant to UV rays and ozone.
1. Minimum Weight: 24 oz./sq. yd.
2. Tensile Strength: 530 lbf/inch in the warp and 440 lbf/inch in the filling.
3. Service Temperature: Minus 50 to plus 250 deg F.
2.13 FLEXIBLE DUCTS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Casco Silentflex II.
2. Thermaflex
B. Insulated Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1 with:
1. Non-woven nylon liner.
2. Steel spring wire helix.
3. Polyethylene vapor barrier jacket.
4. Adjustable metal male/female collars.
5. Pressure rating 1-1/2 in. positive to 1/2 in. negative.
6. Maximum Air Velocity: 4,000 fpm (continuous).
7. Temperature Range: 20 deg. F to 200 deg. F.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 3300 - 11 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
C. Flexible Duct Clamps: Stainless-steel band with cadmium-plated hex screw to tighten band with a worm-gear action, in sizes 3 through 18 inches to suit duct size.
2.14 DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE
A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap
and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments and of length to suit duct insulation thickness.
B. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to gasoline and grease.
2.15 DUCT SILENCERS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Industrial Acoustics Company (IAC)
2. Commercial Acoustics.
3. Vibro-Acoustics.
B. General Description: Factory-fabricated and -tested, round or rectangular silencers with
performance characteristics and physical requirements as indicated.
C. Fire Performance: Adhesives, sealants, packing materials, and accessory materials shall have fire ratings not exceeding 25 for flame-spread index and 50 for smoke-developed index when tested according to ASTM E 84.
D. Rectangular Units: Fabricate casings with a minimum of 0.034-inch- thick, solid galvanized sheet metal for outer casing and 0.022-inch- thick, ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60, perforated
galvanized sheet metal for inner casing.
E. Round Units:
1. Outer Casings:
a. ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60, galvanized sheet steel.
b. Up to 24 Inches in Diameter: 0.034 inch thick. c. 26 through 40 Inches in Diameter: 0.040 inch thick.
d. 42 through 52 Inches in Diameter: 0.052 inch thick. e. 54 through 60 Inches in Diameter: 0.064 inch thick.
f. Casings fabricated of spiral lock-seam duct may be one size thinner than that indicated.
2. Interior Casing, Partitions, and Baffles:
a. ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60, galvanized sheet steel.
b. At least 0.034 inch thick and designed for minimum aerodynamic losses.
F. Sheet Metal Perforations: 1/8-inch diameter for inner casing and baffle sheet metal.
G. Fill Material: Inert and vermin-proof fibrous material, packed under not less than 5 percent compression.
1. Erosion Barrier: Polymer bag enclosing fill and heat-sealed before assembly.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 3300 - 12 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
H. Fabricate silencers to form rigid units that will not pulsate, vibrate, rattle, or otherwise react to system pressure variations.
1. Do not use nuts, bolts, or sheet metal screws for unit assemblies.
2. Lock form and seal or continuously weld joints.
3. Suspended Units: Factory-installed suspension hooks or lugs attached to frame in quantities and spaced to prevent deflection or distortion.
4. Reinforcement: Cross or trapeze angles for rigid suspension.
I. Source Quality Control:
1. Acoustic Performance: Test according to ASTM E 477.
2. Record acoustic ratings, including dynamic insertion loss and self-noise power levels with
an airflow of at least 2000-fpm face velocity.
3. Leak Test: Test units for airtightness at 200 percent of associated fan static pressure or 6-
inch wg static pressure, whichever is greater.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION
A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116, "Fibrous Glass Duct
Construction Standards," for fibrous-glass ducts.
B. Provide duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel
accessories in galvanized-steel and fibrous-glass ducts, stainless-steel accessories in stainless-steel ducts, and aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts.
C. Install backdraft dampers on exhaust fans or exhaust ducts nearest to outside and where indicated.
D. Install volume dampers in ducts with liner; avoid damage to and erosion of duct liner.
E. Provide balancing dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches
lead from larger ducts as required for air balancing. Coordinate requirements with TAB contractor. Install at a minimum of two duct widths from branch takeoff.
F. Where volume damper adjustment is not readily accessible through finished ceilings, provide volume damper remote control cable adjustment. Locate concealed ceiling regulators in
coordination with Architect.
G. Provide test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated.
H. Install fire and smoke dampers, according to manufacturer's UL-approved written instructions.
I. Install duct access doors to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining accessories and
terminal units as follows:
1. On both sides of duct coils.
2. Downstream from volume dampers and equipment.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 3300 - 13 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
3. Adjacent to fire or smoke dampers, providing access to reset or reinstall fusible links.
4. To interior of ducts for cleaning; before and after each change in direction, at maximum 50-
foot spacing.
5. On sides of ducts where adequate clearance is available.
J. Install the following sizes for duct-mounting, rectangular access doors:
1. One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8 by 5 inches.
2. Two-Hand Access: 12 by 6 inches.
3. Head and Hand Access: 18 by 10 inches.
4. Head and Shoulders Access: 21 by 14 inches.
5. Body Access: 25 by 14 inches.
6. Body Plus Ladder Access: 25 by 17 inches.
K. Install the following sizes for duct-mounting, round access doors:
1. One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8 inches in diameter.
2. Two-Hand Access: 10 inches in diameter.
3. Head and Hand Access: 12 inches in diameter.
4. Head and Shoulders Access: 18 inches in diameter.
5. Body Access: 24 inches in diameter.
L. Install the following sizes for duct-mounting, pressure relief access doors:
1. One-Hand or Inspection Access: 5 inches in diameter.
2. Two-Hand Access: 10 inches in diameter.
3. Head and Hand Access: 13 inches in diameter.
4. Head and Shoulders Access: 19 inches in diameter.
M. Label access doors according to Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and
Equipment."
N. Install flexible connectors immediately adjacent to equipment in ducts associated with fans and
motorized equipment supported by vibration isolators.
O. For fans developing static pressures of 5-inch wg and higher, cover flexible connectors with
loaded vinyl sheet held in place with metal straps.
P. Connect diffusers or light troffer boots to low pressure ducts directly or with minimum 60-inch
lengths of flexible duct clamped or strapped in place.
Q. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with adhesive plus sheet metal screws.
R. Install duct test holes where indicated and required for testing and balancing purposes.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 3300 - 14 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
S. Primed and painted sheet metal cover shall be provided over flexible connectors located on roof.
3.2 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust duct accessories for proper settings.
B. Adjust fire and smoke dampers for proper action.
C. Final positioning of manual-volume dampers is specified in Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC."
END OF SECTION
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 3713 - 1 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES
SECTION 23 3713 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and General Provisions apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes ceiling- and wall-mounted diffusers, registers, and grilles.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 23 Section " Air Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers and volume-control
dampers not integral to diffusers, registers, and grilles.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product indicated, include the following:
1. Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish, and mounting details; and
performance data including throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise ratings.
2. Diffuser, Register, and Grille Schedule: Indicate Drawing designation, room location,
quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished.
B. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items
are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved:
1. Ceiling suspension assembly members.
2. Method of attaching hangers to building structure.
3. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile.
4. Ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers,
access panels, and special moldings.
5. Duct access panels.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For diffusers, registers, and grilles with factory-applied color finishes.
D. Samples for Verification: For diffusers, registers, and grilles, in manufacturer's standard sizes to verify color selected.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 3713 - 2 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified.
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified.
2.2 GRILLES AND REGISTERS
A. Adjustable Sidewall Supply:
1. Product: Titus 300RL
2. Manufacturers:
a. Anemostat; a Mestek Company. b. Price Industries. c. Titus.
3. Steel supply grilles shall be of the sizes and mounting types shown on the plans and outlet schedule. The deflection blades shall be available parallel to the long or short dimension of
the grille. Construction shall be of steel with a 1-1/4 inch wide border on all sides. Screw holes shall be countersunk for a neat appearance. Corner shall be welded with full
penetration resistance welds.
4. Deflection blades shall be contoured to a specifically designed and tested cross-section to
meet published test performance data. Blades shall be spaced on 3/4-inch centers. Blades shall have steel friction pivots on both ends to allow individual blade adjustment
without loosening or rattling. Plastic blade pivots are not acceptable.
5. Optional opposed-blade volume damper shall be constructed of heavy gauge steel. Damper must be operable from the face of the grille. The grille finish shall be #26 white. The finish shall be an anodic acrylic paint, baked at 315°F for 30 minutes. The pencil
hardness must be HB to H. The paint must pass a 100-hour ASTM B117 Corrosive Environments Salt Spray Test without creepage, blistering, or deterioration of film. The
paint must pass a 250-hour ASTM D870 Water Immersion Test. The paint must also pass the ASTM D2794 Reverse Impact Cracking Test with a 50-inch pound force applied.
6. The manufacturer shall provide published performance data for the grille. The grille shall be tested in accordance with ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 70-1991.
B. Adjustable Sidewall Return and Exhaust Register:
1. Product: Titus 350RL
2. Manufacturers:
a. Anemostat; a Mestek Company.
b. Price Industries. c. Titus.
3. The fixed deflection blades shall be available parallel to the long or short dimension of the grille. Construction shall be of steel with a 1-1/4-inch wide border on all sides. Screw holes
shall be countersunk for a neat appearance. Corners shall be welded with full penetration resistance welds.
4. Deflection blades shall be contoured to a specifically designed and tested cross-section to meet published test performance data. Blades shall be firmly held in place by mullions
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 3713 - 3 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES
from behind the grille and fixed to the grille by welding in place. Blade deflection angle shall be available at 35°.
5. Optional opposed-blade volume damper shall be constructed of heavy gauge steel. Damper must be operable from the face of the grille.
6. The grille finish shall be #26 white. The finish shall be an anodic acrylic paint, baked at 315° F for 30 minutes. The pencil hardness must be HB to H. The paint must pass a 100-hour ASTM B117 Corrosive Environments Salt Spray Test without creepage, blistering, or deterioration of film. The paint must pass a 250-hour ASTM D870 Water Immersion Test. The paint must also pass the ASTM D2794 Reverse Impact Cracking Test with a 50-inch pound force applied.
7. The manufacturer shall provide published performance data for the grille. The grille shall be tested in accordance with ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 70-1991.
2.3 LINEAR SLOT OUTLETS
A. Linear Diffuser:
1. Product: Titus Flowbar, Border Type 22.
2. Manufacturers:
a. Anemostat; a Mestek Company. b. Price Industries.
c. Titus.
3. Provide all materials and equipment required for a complete installation of all linear and modular slot air distribution systems as shown on the architectural and mechanical drawings and/or indicated in the architectural or mechanical specifications. The systems
shall be complete in every respect and shall include all required appurtenances. Mechanical contractor shall furnish and install all plenums, hoods, blank-offs, and
associated sheet metal components including all duct connections thereto.
4. Provide all continuous linear slot and modular slot diffusers as shown on the drawings. The
slot diffusers shall integrate into the ceiling system. Where curved linear slot diffusers are indicated, they shall be stretched formed to the exact radii required. Rolled or segmented
linear slot diffusers will not be accepted.
5. The linear slot diffusers shall have a single slot unless shown otherwise and shall be
capable of being used for supply air, return air, exhaust air, or any combination thereof.
6. The linear slot diffusers shall be capable of supporting the ceiling system. Linear diffusers
supported by screws in the flanges or from air plenums are unacceptable. For lay-in ceiling, provide hanger wire support clips that are integral with the linear slot diffusers
allowing the linear slot diffusers to be supported from the building structure with ceiling wire. For hard ceilings, provide clips that are integral with the linear slot diffusers allowing
the diffusers to be secured directly to the ceiling framing without the requirement for hanger supports. Provide spline clips to secure joints and ceiling tees to the diffusers.
7. Provide ends and corners as required. Ends shall be butt type, field installed, or mitered picture frame type factory installed, as indicated herein or shown on the drawings. Corners
shall be mitered one piece unit.
8. Pattern controllers shall be one piece extruded aluminum, 24" long maximum, positioned
between spring loaded spacers. Pattern controllers shall allow the airstream to be directed
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 3713 - 4 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES
flat against the ceiling in either direction or downward as well as allowing throw reduction every two feet along the entire length of the linear slot diffusers. The airstream shall be maintained at the ceiling plane and shall not dump when volume is reduced. Only extruded aluminum pattern controllers are acceptable. Where shown or noted pattern controllers shall be designed to allow the airstream to be jetted into the occupied space and be adjustable to vector the airstream as required.
9. Material shall be minimum wall thickness .062 extruded aluminum. Spring steel retainers shall be used under the spacers to hold the slot diffusers assembly tightly together and
allow the slot diffusers to be disassembled easily for field trimming. Materials other than extruded aluminum and spring steel will not be accepted.
10. Flanges exposed to view shall be painted factory standard white. All other surfaces shall be painted flat black. Provide paint samples if requested.
11. Model numbers are indicated on the plan schedules.
12. All slot diffusers shall be manufactured by the same manufacturer of the plenums and
hoods. No exceptions will be allowed. Plenum lengths and entry collar sizes shall be as indicated on the plan schedules.
13. Plenums shall be minimum 24 gauge galvanized steel and lined inside with black matte fiberglass insulation. Hoods shall be 51% free area and constructed of 24 gauge
perforated sheet metal painted flat black.
14. Provide a friction type volume damper located in the entry collar of the supply air plenum,
accessible through the slot diffuser.
15. Air test and balance of linear and modular slot diffusers systems shall be by this section
and be in accordance with the testing and balancing portion section of the specifications. Position all FlowBar pattern controllers in their normal operation positions and perform all
air testing and balancing of all slot diffuser systems in full accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
16. All slot diffusers shall be performance tested with air plenums as a composite assembly in full accordance with ASHRAE, ARI, and/or ADC standards. If requested, this contractor
shall provide for a visit by the mechanical consulting engineer to the product testing laboratory to verify performance data and testing procedures. All cost associated thereto
shall be provided at the expense of this contractor.
17. Diffusers shall be selected to achieve a throw to room length ratio which meets the
requirements of the ASHRAE 1993 Fundamentals Handbook, Chapter 31, Table 2, at both maximum design flow rate, and for VAV systems, at the minimum flow rate expected during
partial occupancy. Diffusers shall be selected to achieve a minimum of 70% ADPI over the range of expected loads in the space. The diffusers’ reported performance shall be based
on tests conducted in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 70–91. ADPI performance on at least one unit size of the selected diffuser shall have been tested in accordance with
ASHRAE Standard 113–90, to validate conformance and applicability to the ASHRAE table.
18. TITUS FlowBar system is the basis of the specification. Comparable products may be submitted as a substitution provided they are in full compliance with all sections of this
specification and meet performance requirement. This contractor should note that if the substitution adds costs to any other sections of this specification, or causes the architect and/or engineer to incur redesign costs, this contractor shall be fully responsible for the reimbursement of all these costs.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 3713 - 5 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES
2.4 CEILING DIFFUSER OUTLETS & INLETS
A. Perforated Ceiling Diffuser:
1. Product: Titus PCS.
2. Manufacturers:
a. Anemostat; a Mestek Company. b. Price Industries. c. Titus.
3. Diffusers shall have a perforated face with 3/16-inch diameter holes on 1/4-inch staggered centers and no less than 51 percent free area. Perforated face shall be steel or aluminum according to the model selected. The back pan shall be heavy gauge steel of the sizes and
mounting types shown on the plans and outlet schedule. The diffuser neck shall have at least 1 inch depth for easy duct connection.
4. Provide 24” x 24” modular face size at accessible ceiling areas. Use 16” x 16” modular face size for hard ceiling application. Provide suitable mounting/border to ceiling system.
Provide face accessible opposed blade damper for all diffusers located in hard ceiling.
5. Individually adjustable curved deflectors shall be mounted in the neck of the diffuser and must allow the discharged air to enter the room in either vertical or one-, two-, three-, four-way horizontal jets. The perforated face must be easily unlatchable from the back pan to
facilitate opening of the face for pattern controller adjustment or to access an optional damper.
6. The finish shall be #26 white. The finish shall be an anodic acrylic paint, baked at 315°F for 30 minutes. The pencil hardness must be HB to H.
7. The paint must pass a 100-hour ASTM B117 Corrosive Environments Salt Spray Test without creepage, blistering, or deterioration of film. The paint must pass a 250-hour ASTM
D870 Water Immersion Test. The paint must also pass the ASTM D2794 Reverse Impact Cracking Test with a 50-inch pound force applied.
8. Optional damper shall be constructed of heavy gauge steel. Damper must be operable from the face of the diffuser by unlatching the diffuser face. The diffuser must be designed
such that complete removal of the face is not required during damper adjustment. Optional volume damper shall be provided at hard ceiling application.
9. The manufacturer shall provide published performance data for the perforated diffuser. The diffuser shall be tested in accordance with ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 70-1991.
2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Verification of Performance: Rate diffusers, registers, and grilles according to ASHRAE 70,
"Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets."
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas where diffusers, registers, and grilles are to be installed for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of
equipment.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 3713 - 6 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb.
B. Ceiling-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make
final locations where indicated, as much as practicable. For units installed in lay-in ceiling panels, locate units in the center of panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict
with installation, notify Architect for a determination of final location.
C. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connections to ducts and to allow service and
maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed, before starting air balancing.
END OF SECTION
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 8119 - 1 PACKAGED ROOFTOP GAS ELECTRIC UNIT
SECTION 23 8119 PACKAGED ROOFTOP GAS ELECTRIC UNIT PART 1 — GENERAL
1.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Outdoor rooftop, or slab-mounted, electrically controlled heating and cooling unit using two-stage scroll compressor for cooling duty, and natural gas for heating duty. Unit shall discharge supply air vertically or horizontally as shown on contract drawings. Unit sizes Carrier model 48HC. Alternate manufacturers shall
be equal to Carrier in BTUH capacity and efficiency. Required changes in structural and electrical shall be the responsibility of the installing contractor. 1.2 STANDARD FEATURES
A. Unit shall meet ASHRAE 90.1 and California Title-24 efficiency requirements.
B. Unit shall be Energy Star certified. C. Unit shall be rated in accordance with AHRI Standards 210/240 and 340/360.
D. Unit shall be designed to conform to ASHRAE 15, 2001, and in accordance with
UL 1995.
E. Unit shall be UL tested and certified.
F. Roof curb shall be designed to conform to NRCA Standards, and shall meet the structural requirements of the latest California Building Code. Provide structural
calculations signed by a California licensed structural engineer.
G. Insulation and adhesive shall meet NFPA 90A requirements for flame spread and smoke generation.
H. Unit casing shall be capable of withstanding Federal test method Standard No.
141 (Method 6061) 500-hour salt spray test.
I. Unit shall be run tested on the factory assembly line in both cooling and heating modes.
J. Unit shall be designed and manufactured in a facility registered by ISO 9001.
1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Unit(s) shall be stored and handled per manufacturer’s recommendations.
PART 2 —PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL:
A. Factory-assembled, single-piece cooling and heating unit. Include VFD, all
factory wiring, piping, controls, refrigerant charge (R-410a), two stages of cooling
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 8119 - 2 PACKAGED ROOFTOP GAS ELECTRIC UNIT
using two fully hermetic scroll compressors, and gas combustion for heating duty (two-stages). 2.2 UNIT CABINET: A. Unit cabinet shall be constructed of galvanized steel, bonderized and coated with
a baked enamel finish on all externally exposed surfaces and have primer-coated interior panels. B. Evaporator-fan cabinet interior and gas heat compartment shall be insulated with a minimum .20-in. thick, closed-cell insulation consisting of polyethylene foam sandwiched between two layers of aluminum foil. Insulation shall conform to
ASTM standards and shall have no fiberglass. Insulation shall not crack, delaminate, or allow fungal growth. C. Cabinet panels shall be easily removable for servicing and shall have molded
composite handles.
D. Holes shall be provided in the base rails for rigging shackles to facilitate overhead rigging, and forklift slots shall be provided to facilitate maneuvering. E. Unit shall have a factory-installed, sloped condensate drain pan made of a non-
corrosive material, providing a minimum 3/4-in. connection with both vertical and horizontal drains and shall comply with ASHRAE 62.
F. Unit shall have factory-installed filter access panel to provide filter access with
tool-less removal.
2.3 FANS:
A. Indoor blower shall be of the belt-driven, double inlet, forward-curved centrifugal type. Belt drive shall include an adjustable-pitch motor pulley.
B. Indoor blower shall be made from steel with a corrosion-resistant finish and
shall be dynamically balanced.
C. Bearings shall be of the sealed, permanently lubricated, ball-bearing type.
D. Condenser fan shall be of the direct-driven propeller type and shall discharge air vertically upward.
E. Condenser fan shall have aluminum blades riveted to corrosion-resistant steel spiders and shall be dynamically balanced.
F. Condenser-fan motor shall be energy-efficient type.
G. Induced draft blower shall be of the direct-driven, single inlet, forward curved type
made from steel with a corrosion-resistant finish. 2.4 COMPRESSORS:
A. Fully hermetic scroll type, internally protected, with crankcase heater.
B. Two compressors for two stage capacity control.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 8119 - 3 PACKAGED ROOFTOP GAS ELECTRIC UNIT
C. Factory rubber-shock mounted and internally spring mounted for vibration isolation. D. Warranty shall be for five years. 2.5 COILS:
A. Provide factory flexible epoxy polymer coating (E-COAT) on indoor and outdoor coils. Coating process shall ensure complete coil encapsulation of tubes, fins and headers. Corrosion durability shall be confirmed through testing to be no less than 1000 hours salt spray per ASTM B117-90.
2.6 HEATING SECTION: A. Induced draft combustion type with energy saving direct spark ignition system, redundant main gas valve, and two stages of capacity. Heat exchanger shall be
an induced draft design. Positive pressure designs shall not be acceptable. 1. The heat exchanger shall be of the tubular section type constructed of a
minimum of 20 gauge steel coated with a nominal 1.2 mil aluminum-silicone alloy for corrosion resistance, and shall have a 10-year warranty. B. The heat exchanger shall be controlled by an Integrated Gas Controller (IGC)
microprocessor. The IGC board shall notify users of fault using an LED (light-emitting diode) to provide diagnostic information. The LED shall be visible without
removing the control box access panel.
C. IGC board contains anti-cycle protection for gas heat operation (after 4 continuous cycles on high temperature limit switch and one cycle on the flame
rollout switch).
2.7 REFRIGERANT COMPONENTS:
A. Thermostatic Expansion Valve on each circuit shall be standard.
B. Service gage connections on suction and liquid lines. Include a gauge line access port in the top of the RTU to facilitate correct and accurate condenser
pressure readings with the access panels in place.
C. Filter drier.
2.8 FILTER SECTION:
A. Standard filter section shall consist of factory-installed 2-inch low-velocity, throwaway filters of the same size.
B. Filter face velocity shall not exceed 300 fpm at nominal airflow.
C. Filter section shall use only one size filter. D. Filters shall be accessible through an access panel with ‘‘no-tool required’’
removal capability.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 8119 - 4 PACKAGED ROOFTOP GAS ELECTRIC UNIT
E. Factory-installed filters are for start-up only, and will be replaced with pleated filters of the type and rating as shown on the equipment schedule. Filters are to be furnished and installed by the contractor. 2.9 CONTROLS:
A. Shall be complete with self-contained low-voltage control circuit protected by a fuse on the 24V transformer side. B. Low ambient controls down to 35 F. ambient shall be standard, unless otherwise scheduled. Exception shall be the 48HCDD11, which is 0 F. as standard.
C. Unit shall include an Integrated Staging Control (ISC) that is intended for use with a standard thermostat or direct digital control. LED lights shall indicate if the unit is running properly or not. The configuration of red lights will indicate the type of error that the board has identified.
1. CONTROLS / ENERGY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (EMS)
Unit requires the controls manufacturer’s controller card to interface the standard 24V control circuit with a direct digital control EMS. a) If the EMS is non-Carrier, the controls manufacturer shall provide
interface card for field installation by the controls contractor inside the rooftop unit control center.
2.10 SAFETIES (COOLING):
A. Compressor over-temperature, over-current, high pressure differential.
B. Loss-of-charge/low-pressure switch.
C. Automatic reset, motor thermal overload protector.
D. High-pressure switch.
2.11 SAFTIES (HEATING):
A. High-temperature limit switches, induced draft motor speed sensor, flame rollout
switch, flame proving controls.
2.12 OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS:
A. Unit shall be capable of starting and running at 125 F ambient outdoor temperature.
B. Compressor with standard controls shall be capable of operation down to 35 F
ambient outdoor temperature. 2.13 MOTORS:
A. Compressor motors shall be cooled by refrigerant passing through motor windings and shall have line break thermal and current overload protection.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 8119 - 5 PACKAGED ROOFTOP GAS ELECTRIC UNIT
B. Indoor blower (evaporator-fan) motor shall have permanently lubricated bearings and inherent automatic-reset thermal overload protection. Include belt drive with variable frequency drive. C. Condenser-fan motor shall have permanently lubricated bearings and inherent automatic-reset thermal overload protection.
D. Induced draft motor shall have permanently lubricated, sealed bearings and inherent automatic reset thermal overload protection. PART 3 — SPECIAL FEATURES:
3.1 TWO-SPEED FAN (STAGED AIR VOLUME): A. Include variable frequency drive (VFD), factory installed, and tested. Include
self-diagnostics with fault and power code LED indicator, RS485 compatibility, and electronic thermal overload protection. Provide accessory VFD Display kit
(one per job-site) for access to VFD controller programs and diagnostics. 3.2 SPRING ISOLATED ROOF CURB:
A. Fully assembled spring isolation roof curb shall include welded construction, 2-
inch DSA approved spring isolators, and weather-tight construction. Curb shall be structurally-calculated and meet the seismic requirements of the current
California Building Code (CBC). Include calculations signed and stamped by a licensed California structural engineer. Supply and return air openings shall be as
shown on the contract drawings. Provide unit hold-downs.
B. Allow for installing and securing ductwork to curb prior to mounting unit on the curb. Contractor shall furnish and install flexible duct connections.
C. Overall curb height shall not exceed 21 inches unless scheduled otherwise.
3.3 ECONOMIZER AND ECONOMIZER CONTROL OPTIONS:
A. Provide Integrated Economizer with Modulating Power Exhaust: Economizer
shall have modulating controls and shall be capable of simultaneous economizer and compressor operation. Include power exhaust (centrifugal) fan with
modulating controls. Factory assembled, designed to exhaust 100% of the return air in order to maintain proper building pressure. Control shall be based on
building pressure. Designed to close damper during loss-of-power situations with spring return built into motor Fan motor shall be UL certified. Economizer shall
be Title-24 compliant, include fault detection and diagnostics (FDD), low leak dampers, and five year warranty. Power for the power exhaust shall be as shown
on the equipment schedule. Manufacturer shall provide 25 feet of space pressure tubing for installation by contractor. Pressure pick-up and ceiling termination plate furnished and installed by contractor.
1. Economizer controls shall interface with EMS. Economizer actuator shall be Belimo, or approved equal, and shall interface with EMS. Controls
manufacturer shall provide dry bulb outdoor-air control, outdoor enthalpy
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 8119 - 6 PACKAGED ROOFTOP GAS ELECTRIC UNIT
control, or differential dry bulb control as shown on the project controls drawings, or equipment schedule. 3.4 FLUE DISCHARGE DEFLECTOR:
A. Deflector shall direct unit flue exhaust vertically. Designed to terminate no higher than the rooftop unit cabinet. B. Deflector shall be defined as a “natural draft” device by the National Fuel and Gas (NFG) code.
C. Contractor may fabricate and install up to an 18-inch extension of the flue discharge deflector, if required.
3.5 CO2 SENSOR:
A. Provide stand-alone, wall-mounted, carbon dioxide sensor for use in determining ventilation necessity. Include sensor with LCD status display. Sensor shall be 24V and powered by the RTU control transformer. Sensor shall have self-calibration algorithm to minimize maintenance. Micro-Metl model 8002-WMDM,
or equal by Honeywell.
3.6 WARRANTY
A. Provide manufacturer’s optional extended warranty. Compressor: 5 years. Aluminized Heat Exchanger 10 years, stainless steel heat exchanger 15 years.
All other parts: 5 years.
END OF SECTION
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 8126 - 1 SPLIT-SYSTEM HEAT PUMPS
SECTION 23 8126 SPLIT-SYSTEM HEAT PUMPS PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and General Provisions apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes split-system air-conditioning and heat-pump units consisting of separate evaporator-fan and compressor-condenser components.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. Include performance data in terms of capacities, outlet velocities, static pressures, sound power characteristics, motor requirements, and electrical characteristics.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.
2. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Field quality-control reports.
B. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For split-system air-conditioning units to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Filters: One set(s) for each air-handling unit. 2. Gaskets: One set(s) for each access door. 3. Fan Belts: One set(s) for each air-handling unit fan.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 8126 - 2 SPLIT-SYSTEM HEAT PUMPS
B. ASHRAE Compliance:
1. Fabricate and label refrigeration system to comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems." 2. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 4 - "Outdoor Air Quality," Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment," Section 6 - " Procedures," and Section 7 - "Construction and System Start-up."
C. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations with actual equipment provided.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace components of split-system air-conditioning units that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period:
a. For Compressor: Five year(s) from date of Substantial Completion. b. For Parts: Five year(s) from date of Substantial Completion. c. For Labor: One year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
1. Carrier Corporation; Home Comfort and HVAC Building & Industrial Systems. 2. Trane; a business of American Standard companies. 3. YORK; a Johnson Controls company.
2.2 INDOOR UNITS A. Indoor-mounted, draw-thru, fan coil unit consisting of a forward curved direct-drive fan, fan motor,
pre-wired fan motor contactor, cooling coil, and PVC condensate pan. Include factory R-410a thermal expansion valve. B. Provide grooved tube aluminum fin evaporator coil with piston-type refrigerant metering device. Leak test coil at 150 psi and burst test at 435 psi. Suction and liquid line piping connections and condensate piping connections shall be made on the same side of the coil.
C. Provide cabinet of made of pre-painted galvanized steel. Provide knockouts for primary power and control power wiring. Disconnect shall be by the electrical contractor.
D. Unit shall be capable of providing the scheduled cfm at the scheduled external static pressure.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 8126 - 3 SPLIT-SYSTEM HEAT PUMPS
E. Install the fan coil per plans and specifications. Fan coil suspension hangers, isolation, platforms, condensate pumps, or auxiliary condensate pans shall furnished and installed by mechanical contractor. F. Provide premium-efficiency ECM direct drive fan motor.
G. Cabinet shall be insulated with R-4.2 insulation with vapor barrier. Cabinet shall not leak more than 2 percent when tested at 1.0 inches static pressure. H. Remove factory 1 inch permanent washable filter. Install Carrier model KFRAR filter rack and re-place filter with pleated filter of the size indicated in the product literature.
I. CONTROLS: Standard, programmable Title 24 compliant, non-communicating room thermostat to match existing. Provide lockable cover as required.
2.3 OUTDOOR UNITS
A. General:
1. Factory assembled, single piece, air-cooled heat pump condensing unit rated accord-ing to the equipment schedule. 2. Constructed in accordance with UL standards and will carry UL label of approval.
3. Unit shall be built in ISO9001 approved facility.
B. Unit Cabinet:
1. Provide baked-on polyester powder coating capable of withstanding Federal Test
Standard No. 141 (method 6061) 500-hour salt spray test.
2. All screws shall be rust-resistant.
3. Provide copper tube, aluminum fin coil. Tubes other than copper are not ac-ceptable.
4. Provide external, back-seating brass service valves with sweat connections.
5. Provide factory coil guard for protection from external damage.
6. Sound ratings shall not be higher than 70 dBA for all sizes.
7. Warranty: Provide five-year compressor replacement warranty.
C. Refrigerant Components:
1. Include liquid line and vapor line shut-off valves with sweat connections, POE
compressor oil, system charge of R410a refrigerant, accumulator, and reversing valve. Contractor shall provide additional refrigerant charge, as required. Charge system per the manufacturer’s instructions. Use 3/8 inch liquid lines. Include field-installed filter drier, and liquid line solenoid valve.
2. Scroll compressor shall have accumulator protection against refrigerant slugging,
and a compressor sound blanket.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 8126 - 4 SPLIT-SYSTEM HEAT PUMPS
D. Controls and Safeties: 1. Provide time delay restart, automatic restart, safety lockout when any unit safe-ty is open. Include crankcase heater. E. Low Ambient Kit:
2.4 Provide field-installed low ambient control with hard start isolation relay, crankcase heater and long line accessories. ACCESSORIES
A. Thermostat: Low voltage with subbase to control compressor and evaporator fan.
B. Thermostat: Wireless infrared functioning to remotely control compressor and evaporator fan, with the following features:
1. Compressor time delay.
2. 24-hour time control of system stop and start. 3. Liquid-crystal display indicating temperature, set-point temperature, time setting, operating mode, and fan speed. 4. Fan-speed selection including auto setting.
C. Automatic-reset timer to prevent rapid cycling of compressor.
D. Refrigerant Line Kits: Soft-annealed copper suction and liquid lines factory cleaned, dried,
pressurized, and sealed; factory-insulated suction line with flared fittings at both ends.
E. Drain Hose: For condensate.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install units level and plumb.
B. Install evaporator-fan components using manufacturer's standard mounting devices securely
fastened to building structure.
C. Install roof-mounted, compressor-condenser components on equipment supports specified in Section 07 7200 "Roof Accessories." Anchor units to supports with removable, cadmium-plated fasteners.
D. Equipment Mounting: 1. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation and seismic control devices specified in
Section 23 0548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
E. Install and connect precharged refrigerant tubing to component's quick-connect fittings. Install tubing to allow access to unit.
F. Provide secondary condensate drain pan with overflow through the ceiling, with chrome plated escutcheon, to a conspicuous location.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 23 8126 - 5 SPLIT-SYSTEM HEAT PUMPS
1. Refrigerant piping shall comply with Section 23 2300 “Refrigeration Piping”.
B. Where piping is installed adjacent to unit, allow space for service and maintenance of unit.
C. Duct Connections: Duct installation requirements are specified in Section 23 3113 "HVAC Ductwork - Metal Ducts." Drawings indicate the general arrangement of ducts. Connect supply and return ducts to split-system air-conditioning units with flexible duct connectors. Flexible duct connectors are specified in Section 23 3300 "Air Duct Accessories."
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.
B. Perform tests and inspections.
1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.
C. Tests and Inspections:
1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. 2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation.
3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
D. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
E. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.4 STARTUP SERVICE
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.
1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain units.
END OF SECTION
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 26 0500 - 1 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
SECTION 26 0500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes the following:
1. Supporting devices for electrical components. 2. Electrical demolition. 3. Cutting and patching for electrical construction.
B. Related sections include the following:
1. Division 07 Section “Firestopping” for firestopping materials and requirements for penetrations through fire and smoke barriers.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in CEC (NFPA 70), Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to the Fire Department, and marked for intended use.
1.03 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate chases, slots, inserts, sleeves, and openings with general construction work and arrange in building structure during progress of construction to facilitate the electrical installations that follow.
1. Set inserts and sleeves in poured-in-place concrete, masonry work, and other structural components as they are constructed.
B. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installing electrical materials and equipment for efficient flow
of the Work. Coordinate installing large equipment requiring positioning before closing in the building.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2. Or Equal: Where products are specified by manufacturers name and accompanied by the term "or equal", comply with provisions in General Provisions. Specific procedures must be followed before use of an unnamed product or manufacturer.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 26 0500 - 2 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
2.02 SUPPORTING DEVICES
A. Material: Cold-formed steel, with corrosion-resistant coating.
B. Metal Items for Use Outdoors or in Damp Locations: Hot-dip galvanized steel.
C. Slotted-Steel Channel Supports: Flange edges turned toward web, and 9/16-inch- diameter slotted holes at a maximum of 2 inches O.C., in webs.
1. Channel Thickness: Selected to suit structural loading. 2. Fittings and Accessories: Products of the same manufacturer as channel supports.
D. Raceway and Cable Supports: Manufactured clevis hangers, riser clamps, straps, threaded C-clamps with retainers, ceiling trapeze hangers, wall brackets, and spring-steel clamps or click-type hangers.
E. Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade A, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends.
F. Cable Supports for Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug for non-armored electrical cables in riser conduits. Plugs have number and size of conductor gripping holes as required to suit individual risers. Body constructed of malleable-iron casting with hot-dip galvanized finish.
G. Expansion Anchors: Carbon-steel wedge or sleeve type.
H. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.
I. Powder-Driven Threaded Studs: Heat-treated steel. Not allowed within building with occupants except by prior approval, before installation, with the Fire Department Representative.
2.03 TOUCHUP PAINT
A. For Equipment: Equipment manufacturer's paint selected to match installed equipment finish.
B. Galvanized Surfaces: Zinc-rich paint recommended by item manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated, arrange and install components and equipment to provide the maximum possible headroom.
B. Materials and Components: Install level, plumb, and parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference with other installations.
D. Right of Way: Give to raceways and piping systems installed at a required slope.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 26 0500 - 3 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
3.02 WIRING INSTALLATION
A. Install splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.
B. Install wiring at outlets with at least 12 inches of slack conductor at each outlet.
C. Connect outlet and component connections to wiring systems and to ground. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A.
3.03 ELECTRICAL SUPPORTING DEVICE APPLICATION
A. Damp Locations and Outdoors: Hot-dip galvanized materials, U-channel system components.
B. Dry Locations: Steel materials.
C. Support Clamps for PVC Raceways: Click-type clamp system.
D. Selection of Supports: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
E. Strength of Supports: Adequate to carry present and future loads, times a safety factor of at least four; minimum of 200-lb design load.
3.04 SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Install support devices to securely and permanently fasten and support electrical components.
B. Install individual and multiple raceway hangers and riser clamps to support raceways. Provide U-bolts, clamps, attachments, and other hardware necessary for hanger assemblies and for securing hanger rods and conduits.
C. Support parallel runs of horizontal raceways together on trapeze- or bracket-type hangers.
D. Size supports for multiple raceway installations, so capacity can be increased by a 25 percent minimum in the future.
E. Support individual horizontal raceways with separate, malleable-iron pipe hangers or clamps.
F. Install 1/4-inch diameter or larger threaded steel hanger rods.
G. Arrange supports in vertical runs so the weight of raceways and enclosed conductors is carried entirely by raceway supports, with no weight load on raceway terminals.
H. Simultaneously install vertical conductor supports with conductors.
I. Separately support cast boxes that are threaded to raceways and used for fixture support. Support sheet-metal boxes directly from the building structure or by bar hangers. If bar hangers are used, attach bar to raceways on opposite sides of the box and support the raceway with an approved fastener not more than 24 inches from the box.
J. Install metal channel racks for mounting cabinets, panel boards; disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices unless components are mounted directly to structural elements of adequate strength.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 26 0500 - 4 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
K. Install sleeves for cable and raceway penetrations of concrete slabs and walls unless core-drilled holes are used. Install sleeves for cable and raceway penetrations of masonry and fire-rated gypsum walls and of all other fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Install sleeves during erection of concrete and masonry walls.
L. Securely fasten electrical items and their supports to the building structure, unless otherwise indicated. Perform fastening according to the following unless other fastening methods are
indicated:
1. Wood: Fasten with wood screws or screw-type nails. 2. Masonry: Toggle bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion bolts on solid masonry units. 3. New Concrete: Concrete inserts with machine screws and bolts. 4. Existing Concrete: Expansion bolts.
5. Instead of expansion bolts, threaded studs driven by a powder charge and provided with lock washers may be used in existing concrete. 6. Steel: Welded threaded studs or spring-tension clamps on steel.
a. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.
7. Welding to steel structure may be used only for threaded studs, not for conduits, pipe straps, or other items.
8. Light Steel: Sheet-metal screws. 9. Fasteners: Select so the load applied to each fastener does not exceed 25 percent of its proof-test load.
3.05 FIRESTOPPING
A. Apply firestopping to cable and raceway penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to achieve fire-resistance rating of the assembly. Firestopping materials and installation
requirements are specified in Division 07 Section “Penetration Firestopping”.
3.06 DEMOLITION
A. Protect existing electrical equipment and installations indicated to remain. If damaged or disturbed in the course of the Work, remove damaged portions and install new products of equal
capacity, quality, and functionality.
B. Accessible Work: Remove exposed electrical equipment and installations, indicated to be
demolished, in their entirety.
C. Abandoned Work: Cut and remove buried raceway and wiring. When approval by the City’s Representative, raceway can be abandoned in place a minimum of 4 inches below the surface of adjacent construction. Cap raceways and patch surface to match existing finish.
D. Remove demolished material from Project site.
E. Remove, store, clean, reinstall, reconnect, and make operational components indicated for
relocation.
3.07 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Cut, channel, chase, and drill floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, and other surfaces required to permit electrical installations. Perform cutting by skilled mechanics of trades involved.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 26 0500 - 5 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
B. Repair and refinish disturbed finish materials and other surfaces to match adjacent undisturbed surfaces. Install new fireproofing where existing fire stopping has been disturbed. Repair and refinish materials and other surfaces by skilled mechanics of trades involved.
3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect installed components for damage and faulty work, including the following:
1. Supporting devices for electrical components. 2. Electrical demolition. 3. Cutting and patching for electrical construction. 4. Touchup painting.
3.09 REFINISHING AND TOUCHUP PAINTING
A. Refinish and touch up paint. Paint materials and application requirements are specified in Division 09 Section "Interior Painting."
1. Clean damaged and disturbed areas and apply primer, intermediate, and finish coats to suit the degree of damage at each location. 2. Follow paint manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation and for timing and application of successive coats. 3. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer. 4. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by
manufacturer.
3.10 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. On completion of installation, including outlets, fittings, and devices, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, paint spots, and construction debris.
B. Protect equipment and installations and maintain conditions to ensure that coatings, finishes, and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 26 0501 - 1 MINOR ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION
SECTION 26 0501 MINOR ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes the following:
1. Electrical demolition.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A. Materials and equipment for patching and extending work: As specified in individual sections.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify field measurements and circuiting arrangements are as shown on Drawings.
B. Verify that abandoned wiring and equipment serve only abandoned facilities.
C. Demolition drawings are based on casual field observation and existing record documents.
D. Report discrepancies to Owner before disturbing existing installation.
E. Beginning of demolition means installer accepts existing conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION
A. Disconnect electrical systems in walls, floors, and ceilings to be removed.
B. Coordinate utility service outages with Owner.
C. Provide temporary wiring and connections to maintain existing systems in service during construction. When work must be performed on energized equipment or circuits, use qualified
personnel in such operations.
D. Existing Electrical Service: Maintain existing system in service until new system is complete
and ready for service. Disable system only to make switchovers and connections. Minimize outage duration.
1. Obtain permission from Owner at least 72 hours before partially or completely disabling
system. 3.03 DEMOLITION AND EXTENSION OF EXISTING ELECTRICAL WORK
A. Remove, relocate, and extend existing installations to accommodate new construction.
B. Remove abandoned wiring to source of supply. Install pull rope and cap conduit ends.
C. Remove exposed abandoned conduit, including abandoned conduit above accessible ceiling finishes. Cut conduit flush with walls and floors, and patch surfaces.
D. Remove abandoned wiring from underground conduits and install pull rope and conduit caps. Label abandoned conduits with "from and to" identifiers.
E. Disconnect abandoned outlets and remove devices. Remove abandoned outlets if conduit servicing them is abandoned and removed. Provide blank cover for abandoned outlets that are not removed.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 26 0501 - 2 MINOR ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION
F. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during demolition and extension work. Repair of themed finishes shall match existing finish.
G. Maintain access to existing electrical installations that remain active. Modify installation or provide access panel as appropriate.
H. Protect adjacent equipment during demolition.
I. Maintain existing emergency circuits and equipment to maintain power continuity.
3.04 CLEANING AND REPAIR 1. On completion of installation, including outlets, fittings, and devices, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, paint spots, and construction debris.
2. Protect equipment and installations and maintain conditions to ensure that coatings, finishes,
and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 26 0519 - 1 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
SECTION 26 0519 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes building wires and cables and associated connectors, splices, and terminations
for wiring systems rated 600 V and less.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in CEC (NFPA 70), Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to the Fire Department, and marked for intended use.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified. 2. Or Equal: Where products are specified by manufacturers name and accompanied by the term "or equal", comply with General Provisions. Specific procedures must be followed before use of an unnamed product or manufacturer.
2.02 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Manufacturers (Building Wire and Cable):
1. American Insulated Wire Corp.; a Leviton Company. 2. General Cable Corporation. 3. Southwire Company. 4. Or equal
B. Manufacturers (Control Cable):
1. Alpha. 2. Belden. 3. Or equal.
C. Manufacturers (MC cable):
1. AFC Cable Systems. 2. Southwire Company.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 26 0519 - 2 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
3. Or equal.
D. Refer to Part 3 "Conductor and Insulation Applications" Article for insulation type, cable construction, and ratings.
E. Conductor Material: Copper complying with ICEA S-95-658 / NEMA WC 70 Non-Shielded 0-2 kV Cables.
F. Conductor Insulation Types: Type THW, THHN-THWN, XHHW, UF, USE, and SO complying with NEMA WC 70.
G. Multi-Conductor Cable: Not Allowed.
2.03 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES
A. Manufacturers:
1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. AMP Incorporated/Tyco International. 3. Hubbell/Anderson. 4. O-Z/Gedney; EGS Electrical Group LLC. 5. 3M Company; Electrical Products Division. 6. Or equal.
B. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 CONDUCTOR AND INSULATION APPLICATIONS
A. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway or Type NM.
B. Exposed Branch Circuits, including in Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.
C. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.
D. Outdoors: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.
E. Fire Alarm Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway, Power-limited, fire-protective, signaling circuit cable.
F. Class 1 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway.
G. Class 2 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 26 0519 - 3 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not use oil, grease, graphite or similar substances. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.
C. Use pulling means; including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips that will not damage cables or raceway. Pulling of large conductors in raceways shall be done with an approved cable pulling machine. Other methods such as block and tackle to install conductors are not acceptable.
D. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible.
E. Support cables according to Division 26 Section "Common Work Results for Electrical."
F. Seal around cables penetrating fire-rated elements according to Division 07 Section “Firestopping”. Provide separate sleeves and/or fire barriers for cable fire wall penetration, unless cable is UL listed for the application.
G. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Division 26 Section "Common Work Results for Electrical”. Identification for Electrical System. Color-coded conductor sleeves are not
permitted."
H. Metal Clad (MC) Cable Installation Requirements: Not Allowed.
3.03 CONNECTIONS
A. Provide steel with insulated throat cable connectors, OZ/Gedney AMC series or equivalent. Die cast or pressure cast fittings are not permitted.
B. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-
tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A.
C. Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.
D. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 12 inches of slack.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing: Perform the following field quality-control testing:
1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements. 2. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in NETA ATS, Section 7.3.1. Certify compliance with test parameters.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 26 0519 - 4 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
END OF SECTION
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and
HVAC Refurbishment
26 0526 - 1 GROUNDING AND BONDING
FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
SECTION 26 0526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes grounding of electrical systems and equipment. Grounding requirements
specified in this Section may be supplemented by special requirements of systems described in other Sections.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in CEC (NFPA 70), Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
1. Comply with UL 467.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Grounding Conductors, Cables, Connectors, and Rods:
a. Boggs, Inc. b. Chance/Hubbell. c. Copperweld Corp. d. Dossert Corp. e. Erico Inc.; Electrical Products Group. f. Framatome Connectors/Burndy Electrical. g. Hastings Fiber Glass Products, Inc. h. Heary Brothers Lightning Protection Co. i. Ideal Industries, Inc. j. ILSCO.
k. Or equal.
B. Or Equal: Where products are specified by manufacturers name and accompanied by the term "or equal", comply with General Provisions. Specific procedures must be followed before use of an unnamed product or manufacturer.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and
HVAC Refurbishment
26 0526 - 2 GROUNDING AND BONDING
FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
2.02 GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
A. For insulated conductors, comply with Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables.”
B. Material: Copper.
C. Equipment Grounding Conductors: Insulated with green-colored insulation.
D. Grounding Electrode Conductors: Stranded cable.
E. Underground Conductors: Bare, tinned, stranded, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Bare Copper Conductors: Comply with the following:
1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3. 2. Assembly of Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8. 3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33.
G. Copper Bonding Conductors: As follows:
1. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG copper conductor, 1/4 inch in diameter. 2. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded copper conductor. 3. Bonding Jumper: Bare copper tape, braided bare copper conductors, terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick. 4. Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided copper conductors, terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick.
H. Grounding Bus: Bare, annealed copper bars of rectangular cross section, with insulators.
2.03 CONNECTOR PRODUCTS
A. Comply with IEEE 837 and UL 467; listed for use for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and connected items.
B. Bolted Connectors: Bolted-pressure-type connectors, or compression type.
C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welded type, in kit form, and selected per manufacturer's written instructions.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 APPLICATION
A. Use only copper conductors for both insulated and bare grounding conductors in direct contact with earth, concrete, masonry, crushed stone, and similar materials.
B. In raceways, use insulated equipment grounding conductors.
C. Exothermic-Welded Connections: Use for connections to structural steel and for underground connections, except those at test wells.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and
HVAC Refurbishment
26 0526 - 3 GROUNDING AND BONDING
FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
D. Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Use bolted pressure clamps.
3.02 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
A. Comply with CEC (NFPA 70), Article 250, for types, sizes, and quantities of equipment grounding conductors, unless specific types, larger sizes, or more conductors than required by CEC (NFPA 70) are indicated.
B. Install equipment grounding conductors in all feeders and circuits.
C. Install insulated equipment grounding conductor with circuit conductors for the following items, in addition to those required by NEC:
1. Feeders and branch circuits. 2. Receptacle circuits. 3. Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 4. Three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits.
5. Flexible raceway runs. 6. Armored and metal-clad cable runs.
D. Isolated Equipment Enclosure Circuits: For designated equipment supplied by a branch circuit or feeder, isolate equipment enclosure from supply raceway with a nonmetallic raceway fitting listed for the purpose. Install fitting where raceway enters enclosure, and install a separate equipment grounding conductor. Isolate equipment grounding conductor from raceway and from
panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of the applicable derived system or service, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Nonmetallic Raceways: Install an equipment grounding conductor in nonmetallic raceways unless they are designated for telephone or data cables.
F. Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install an equipment grounding conductor to duct-mounted electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners and heaters. Bond conductor to each
unit and to air duct.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible, unless otherwise indicated. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.
B. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install so vibration by equipment mounted on vibration isolation
hangers and supports is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations, unless a disconnect-type connection is required; then, use a bolted clamp. Bond straps directly to the basic structure taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts. Install straps only in locations accessible for maintenance.
C. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water meters. Connect to pipe with grounding clamp connectors.
D. Bond interior metal piping systems and metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors of associated pumps, fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Use braided-type bonding straps.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and
HVAC Refurbishment
26 0526 - 4 GROUNDING AND BONDING
FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
3.04 CONNECTIONS
A. General: Make connections so galvanic action or electrolysis possibility is minimized. Select connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so metals in direct contact will be galvanically compatible.
1. Use electroplated or hot-tin-coated materials to ensure high conductivity and to make contact points closer to order of galvanic series.
2. Make connections with clean, bare metal at points of contact. 3. Coat and seal connections having dissimilar metals with inert material to prevent future penetration of moisture to contact surfaces.
B. Exothermic-Welded Connections: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Welds that are puffed up or that show convex surfaces indicating improper cleaning are not acceptable.
C. Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: For No. 8 AWG and larger, use pressure-type
grounding lugs. No. 10 AWG and smaller grounding conductors may be terminated with winged pressure-type connectors.
D. Noncontact Metal Raceway Terminations: If metallic raceways terminate at metal housings without mechanical and electrical connection to housing, terminate each conduit with a grounding bushing. Connect grounding bushings with a bare grounding conductor to grounding bus or terminal in housing. Bond electrically non-continuous conduits at entrances and exits with
grounding bushings and bare grounding conductors, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Tighten screws and bolts for grounding and bonding connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A.
F. Compression-Type Connections: Use hydraulic compression tools to provide correct circumferential pressure for compression connectors. Use tools and dies recommended by
connector manufacturer. Provide embossing die code or other standard method to make a visible indication that a connector has been adequately compressed on grounding conductor.
3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing: Perform the following field quality-control testing:
1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements.
END OF SECTION
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 26 0529 - 1 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
SECTION 26 0529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes the following:
1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems. 2. Seismic restraints for electrical equipment and systems.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. CBC: California Building Code
B. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.
C. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.
D. RMC: Rigid metal conduit.
E. Seismic Restraint: A structural support element such as a metal framing member, a cable, an anchor bolt or stud, a fastening device, or an assembly of these items used to transmit seismic forces from an item of equipment or system to building structure and to limit movement of item during a seismic event.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Illustrate and indicate style, material, strength, fastening provision, and finish for each type and size of electrical support and seismic-restraint component used.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with seismic-restraint requirements in the California Building Code
B. Testing of Seismic Anchorage Devices: Comply with testing requirements in Division 26 Section "Common Work Results for Electrical."
C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Project Seismic Zone as Defined in the CBC: Zone 4.
B. Project Seismic Zone Factor as Defined in the CBC: Zone Factor 0.40.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 26 0529 - 2 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2. Or Equal: Where products are specified by manufacturers name and accompanied by the term "or equal", comply with provisions in Division 01 Section “Product Options and Substitutions”. Specific procedures must be followed before use of an unnamed product or manufacturer.
2.02 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS
A. Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads calculated
or imposed under this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of five times the applied force.
B. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-3, factory-fabricated components for field assembly.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Cooper B-Line; a division of Cooper Industries.
b. ERICO International Corporation. c. Allied Support Systems; Power-Strut Unit. d. GS Metals Corp. e. Michigan Hanger Co., Inc.; O-Strut Div. f. National Pipe Hanger Corp. g. Thomas & Betts Corporation.
h. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd. i. Wesanco, Inc. j. Or equal.
2. Finishes:
a. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA-3.
b. Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer's standard PVC, polyurethane, or polyester coating applied according to MFMA-3. c. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA-3.
3. Channel Dimensions: Selected for structural loading and applicable seismic forces.
C. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1.
D. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel and malleable-iron hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.
E. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or cables in riser
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 26 0529 - 3 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron.
F. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.
G. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following:
1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Shall not be used in occupied areas and then only for non-seismic restraints. 2. Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened Portland cement concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.
a. Manufacturers:
1) Hilti, Inc. 2) ITW Construction Products. 3) MKT Fastening, LLC. 4) Simpson Strong-Tie Co. Inc. 5) Or equal.
3. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel, for use in hardened
Portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used.
a. Manufacturers:
1) Cooper B-Line; a division of Cooper Industries. 2) Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc. 3) Hilti, Inc.
4) ITW Construction Products. 5) MKT Fastening, LLC. 6) Powers Fasteners. 7) Or equal.
4. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron slotted-support-system units similar to MSS Type 18; complying with MFMA-3 or MSS SP-58.
5. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for attached structural element. 6. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325. 7. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.
8. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.
2.03 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT COMPONENTS
A. Rated Strength, Features, and Application Requirements for Restraint Components:
1. Structural Safety Factor: Strength in tension, shear, and pullout force of components used shall be at least five times the maximum seismic forces to which they will be subjected.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 26 0529 - 4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
B. Angle and Channel-Type Brace Assemblies: Steel angles or steel slotted-support-system components; with accessories for attachment to braced component at one end and to building structure at the other end.
C. Cable Restraints: ASTM A 603, zinc-coated, steel wire rope attached to steel or stainless-steel thimbles, brackets, swivels, and bolts designed for restraining cable service.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Amber/Booth Company, Inc. b. Loos & Co., Inc. c. Mason Industries, Inc. d. Or equal.
2. Seismic Mountings, Anchors, and Attachments: Devices as specified in “Support, Anchorage, and Attachment Components" Article, selected to resist seismic forces.
3. Bushings for Floor-Mounted Equipment Anchors: Neoprene units designed for seismically rated rigid equipment mountings, and matched to type and size of anchor bolts and studs used. 4. Bushing Assemblies for Wall-Mounted Equipment Anchorage: Assemblies of neoprene elements and steel sleeves designed for seismically rated rigid equipment mountings, and matched to type and size of attachment devices used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 APPLICATION
A. Comply with NECA 1 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems, except if requirements in this Section are stricter.
B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for EMT, and RMC as scheduled in NECA 1, where Table 1 lists maximum spacing less than stated
in. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch in diameter.
C. For individual conduit runs not directly fastened to the structure, use rod hangers.
D. Arrange conduit supports to prevent distortion of alignment by wire pulling operations. Fasten conduit using galvanized straps, lay-in adjustable hangers, clevis hangers, or bolted split galvanized hangers.
E. Do not fasten conduit with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove wire used for temporary conduit
support during construction before conductors are pulled. Do not use ceiling wire to support conduit.
3.02 SUPPORT AND SEISMIC-RESTRAINT INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1 for installation requirements, except as specified in this Article.
B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT, RMC may be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in CEC (NFPA 70).
C. Install seismic-restraint components using methods approved by the evaluation service providing required submittals for component.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 26 0529 - 5 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
D. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars.
3.03 INSTALLATION OF SEISMIC-RESTRAINT COMPONENTS
A. Install bushing assemblies for anchor bolts for floor-mounted equipment, arranged to provide resilient media between anchor bolts and mounting hole in concrete base.
B. Install bushing assemblies for mounting bolts for wall-mounted equipment, arranged to provide resilient media where equipment or equipment-mounting channels are attached to wall.
C. Restraint Cables: Provide slack within maximums recommended by manufacturer.
D. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure at flanges of beams, upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members.
E. Provide raceway fixtures and equipment systems with appropriate longitudinal and cross bracing to satisfy Seismic Zone 4 requirements.
3.04 ACCOMMODATION OF DIFFERENTIAL SEISMIC MOTION
A. Make flexible connections in runs of raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and busways where they cross expansion and seismic-control joints, where adjacent sections or branches are supported by different structural elements, and where they terminate with connection to electrical equipment that is anchored to a different structural element from the one supporting them as they approach equipment.
END OF SECTION
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 26 0533 - 1 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
SECTION 26 0533 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for electrical wiring.
B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 07 Section “Firestopping” for firestopping materials and installation at penetrations through walls, ceilings, and other fire rated elements. 2. Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for seismic restraints and bracing of raceways, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. EMT: Electrical Metallic Tubing.
B. ENT: Electrical Non-metallic Tubing.
C. FMC: Flexible Metal Conduit.
D. IMC: Intermediate Metal Conduit.
E. LFMC: Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal Conduit.
F. LFNC: Liquid-Tight Flexible Non-metallic Conduit.
G. RGS: Rigid Galvanized Steel Conduit.
H. RNC: Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
1.05 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of raceways, boxes, enclosures, cabinets, and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment and fire-suppression system.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 26 0533 - 2 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified. 2. Or Equal: Where products are specified by manufacturers name and accompanied by the term "or equal", comply with provisions in General Provisions. Specific procedures must be followed before use of an unnamed product or manufacturer.
2.02 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING
A. Manufacturers:
1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Alflex Inc. 3. Anamet Electrical, Inc.; Anaconda Metal Hose. 4. Electri-Flex Co. 5. Grinnell Co./Tyco International; Allied Tube and Conduit Div. 6. LTV Steel Tubular Products Company. 7. Manhattan/CDT/Cole-Flex.
8. O-Z Gedney; Unit of General Signal. 9. Wheatland Tube Co. 10. Or equal.
B. Rigid Galvanized Steel Conduit (RGS): ANSI C80.1.
C. Plastic-Coated Steel Conduit and Fittings: NEMA RN 1.
D. EMT and Fittings: ANSI C80.3.
1. Fittings: Compression type, Set Screw not allowed.
E. FMC: Zinc-coated steel.
F. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket.
G. Fittings: NEMA FB 1; compatible with conduit and tubing materials.
2.03 METAL WIREWAYS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Hoffman. 2. Square D. 3. Or equal.
B. Material and Construction: Sheet metal sized and shaped as indicated, NEMA 3R.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 26 0533 - 3 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
C. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system.
D. Select features, unless otherwise indicated, as required to complete wiring system and to comply with NFPA 70.
E. Wireway Covers: Screw-cover type.
F. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.
2.04 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Cooper Crouse-Hinds; Div. of Cooper Industries, Inc. 2. Emerson/General Signal; Appleton Electric Company. 3. Erickson Electrical Equipment Co. 4. Hoffman. 5. Hubbell, Inc.; Killark Electric Manufacturing Co. 6. O-Z/Gedney; Unit of General Signal. 7. RACO; Division of Hubbell, Inc. 8. Robroy Industries, Inc.; Enclosure Division. 9. Scott Fetzer Co.; Adalet-PLM Division.
10. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Co. 11. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 12. Or equal
B. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 1.
C. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA FB 1, Type FD, with gasketed cover.
D. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.
E. Cast-Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA FB 1, cast aluminum with gasketed cover.
F. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, with continuous hinge cover and flush latch.
1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.
G. Cabinets: NEMA 250, Type 1, galvanized steel box with removable interior panel and removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. Key latch to match panelboards. Include
metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage and include accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment.
2.05 FACTORY FINISHES
A. Finish: For raceway, enclosures, or cabinet components, provide manufacturer's standard prime-coat finish ready for field painting.
B. Finish: For raceway, enclosures, or cabinet components, provide manufacturer's standard paint
applied to factory-assembled surface raceways, enclosures, and cabinets before shipping.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 26 0533 - 4 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 RACEWAY APPLICATION
A. Outdoors: Apply Raceways products as specified below, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Exposed: RGS or IMC is acceptable for 600V or Below.
2. Concealed, Above ground: EMT, RGS or IMC.
3. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC.
4. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 3R.
B. Indoors: Comply with the following applications, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT
2. Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: EMT
3. Exposed, Subject to Severe Physical Damage: RGS
4. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT
5. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC; except use LFMC in damp or wet locations.
6. Damp or Wet Locations: RGS
7. Raceways for Signal System or Communications Cable in spaces for Environmental Air:
Plenum-Type, Signal System/Communications Cable Raceways and/or EMT
8. Raceways for Signal System or Communications Cable Risers in Vertical Shafts: Riser-Type, Signal System/Communications Cable Raceways and/or EMT
9. Raceways for concealed general purpose distribution for Signal System or Communications Cable: General-Use, Signal System /Communications Cable raceway and/or EMT
10. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except in damp or wet locations, use NEMA 250, Type 4, Stainless Steel.
C. Minimum Raceway Size Indoors: 3/4-inch trade size.
D. Minimum Raceway Size Underground: 1-inch trade size.
E. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.
1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings, unless
otherwise indicated.
2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings approved for use with that material. Patch all nicks and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer.
F. Install nonferrous conduit or tubing for circuits operating above 60 Hz. Where aluminum raceways are installed for such circuits and pass through concrete, install in nonmetallic sleeve.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 26 0533 - 5 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.
B. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.
C. Support raceways as specified in Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."
D. Install temporary closures to prevent foreign matter from entering raceways.
E. Protect stub-ups from damage where conduits rise through floor slabs. Arrange so curved portions of bends are not visible above the finished slab.
F. Make bends and offsets so ID is not reduced. Keep legs of bends in the same plane and keep straight legs of offsets parallel, unless otherwise indicated.
G. Install NO more than the equivalent of (3) three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for communications conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed.
H. Concealed Raceways:
1. Conceal conduits and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Install concealed raceways with a minimum of bends in the shortest practical distance, considering type of building construction and obstructions, unless otherwise indicated.
I. Install exposed raceways parallel or at right angles to nearby surfaces or structural members and follow surface contours as much as possible.
1. Run parallel or banked raceways together on common supports. 2. Make parallel bends in parallel or banked runs. Use factory elbows only where elbows can be installed parallel; otherwise, provide field bends for parallel raceways.
J. Join raceways with fittings designed and approved for that purpose and make joints tight.
1. Use insulating bushings to protect conductors.
K. Threaded Conduit Joints, exposed to wet, damp, corrosive, or outdoor conditions: Apply compound to threads of raceways and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound’s manufacturers written instructions.
L. Terminations:
1. Where raceways are terminated with locknuts and bushings, align raceways to enter
squarely and install locknuts with dished part against box. Use two locknuts, one inside and one outside box. 2. Where raceways are terminated with threaded hubs, screw raceways or fittings tightly into hub so end bears against wire protection shoulder. Where chase nipples are used, align raceways so coupling is square to box; tighten chase nipple so no threads are exposed.
3. Where raceway terminations are subjected to moisture or vibration: use insulating bushing to protect conductors, including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 26 0533 - 6 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
M. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire.
N. Install raceway sealing fittings at suitable, approved, and accessible locations and fill them with UL-listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings at the following points:
1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces. 2. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.
O. Stub-up Connections: Extend conduits through concrete floor for connection to freestanding equipment. Install with an adjustable top or coupling threaded inside for plugs set flush with finished floor. Extend conductors to equipment with rigid steel conduit; FMC may be used
6 inches above the floor. Install screwdriver-operated, threaded plugs flush with floor for future equipment connections.
P. Expansion-Joint Fittings for RNC: Install in each run of aboveground conduit that is located where temperature change may exceed 30 degrees F, and that has a straight-run length that exceeds 25 feet.
1. Install expansion-joint fittings for each of the following locations, and provide type and
quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for location: a. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 degrees F temperature change. b. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 degrees F temperature
change. c. Indoor Spaces: Connected with the outdoors without physical separation, 125
degrees F temperature change. d. Attics: 135 degrees F temperature change. 2. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch per foot of length of straight run per degree F of temperature change.
3. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected according to manufacturer’s written instructions for conditions at specific location at the
time of installation.
Q. Flexible Connections: Use maximum of 72 inches of flexible conduit for recessed and semi recessed lighting fixtures; for equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for all motors. Install separate ground conductor across flexible connections.
1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage. 2. Use LFMC or LFNC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage.
R. Surface Raceways: Install a separate, green, ground conductor in raceways from junction box supplying raceways to receptacle or fixture ground terminals.
S. Install hinged-cover enclosures and cabinets plumb. Support at each corner.
3.03 PROTECTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure coatings, finishes, and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 26 0533 - 7 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
2. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer.
3.04 CLEANING
A. After completing installation of exposed, factory-finished raceways and boxes, inspect exposed finishes and repair damaged finishes.
END OF SECTION
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 26 0548 - 1 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
SECTION 26 0548 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes seismic restraints and other earthquake-damage-reduction measures for
electrical components. It complements optional seismic construction requirements in the various electrical component Sections.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. CBC: California Building Code.
B. Seismic Restraint: A fixed device (a seismic brace, an anchor bolt or stud, or a fastening assembly) used to prevent vertical or horizontal movement, or both vertical and horizontal
movement, of an electrical system component during an earthquake.
C. Mobile Structural Element: A part of the building structure such as a slab, floor structure, roof structure, or wall that may move independent of other mobile structural elements during an earthquake.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Illustrate and indicate types, styles, materials, strength, fastening provisions, and
finish for each type and size of seismic restraint component used. 1. Anchor Bolts and Studs: Tabulate types and sizes, complete with report numbers and rated strength in tension and shear as evaluated by ICBO Evaluation Service.
B. Shop Drawings: For anchorage and bracing not defined by details and charts on Drawings. Indicate materials, and show designs and calculations signed and sealed by a professional engineer.
1. Design Analysis: To support selection and arrangement of seismic restraints. Include calculations of combined tensile and shear loads. 2. Details: Detail fabrication and arrangement. Detail attachment of restraints to both structural and restrained items. Show attachment locations, methods, and spacing,
identifying components and listing their strengths. Indicate direction and value of forces transmitted to the structure during seismic events.
3. Preapproval and Evaluation Documentation: By California Office of Statewide Health Planning and Development (OSHPD), ICBO Evaluation Service, or an agency approved by City’s Representative, showing maximum ratings of restraints and the basis for approval (tests or calculations).
C. Coordination Drawings: Plans and sections drawn to scale and coordinating seismic bracing for electrical components with other systems and equipment, including other seismic restraints, in
the vicinity.
D. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of seismic restraints certifying that products furnished comply with requirements.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 26 0548 - 2 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
E. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.
F. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results of seismic control devices for compliance with requirements indicated.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with seismic restraint requirements in California Building Code/Code of Regulations, unless requirements in this Section are more stringent.
B. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in California and who is experienced in providing seismic engineering services, including the design of seismic restraints, that are similar to those indicated for this Project.
C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to the City’s Representative, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated.
1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Project Seismic Zone and Zone Factor as Defined in CBC: Zone 4, Zone Factor 0.40.
B. Occupancy Category as Defined in CBC: I=1.0 standard occupancy.
C. Acceleration Factor: 8 Km from seismic source B.
D. Soil profile Type SC.
E. For additional criteria, see Structural Drawings.
1.06 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of seismic bracing with building structural system and architectural features, and with mechanical, fire-protection, electrical, and other building features in the vicinity.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. B-Line Systems, Inc. 2. Erico, Inc. 3. Powerstrut. 4. Thomas & Betts Corp. 5. Unistrut Corporation.
6. Or equal.
B. Or Equal: Where products are specified by manufacturers name and accompanied by the term "or equal", comply with General Provisions. Specific procedures must be followed before use of
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 26 0548 - 3 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
an unnamed product or manufacturer.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Use the following materials for restraints: 1. Indoor Dry Locations: Steel, zinc plated. 2. Outdoors and Damp Locations: Galvanized steel. 3. Corrosive Locations: Stainless steel.
2.03 ANCHORAGE AND STRUCTURAL ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS
A. Strength: Defined in reports by ICBO Evaluation Service or another agency acceptable to City’s Representative. 1. Structural Safety Factor: Strength in tension and shear of components used shall be at least two times the maximum seismic forces to which they will be subjected.
B. Concrete and Masonry Anchor Bolts and Studs: Steel-expansion wedge type.
C. Concrete Inserts: Steel-channel type.
D. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325.
E. Welding Lugs: Comply with MSS SP-69, Type 57.
F. Beam Clamps for Steel Beams and Joists: Double sided. Single-sided type is not acceptable.
G. Bushings for Floor-Mounted Equipment Anchors: Neoprene units designed for seismically rated rigid equipment mountings, and matched to the type and size of anchor bolts and studs used.
H. Bushing Assemblies for Wall-Mounted Equipment Anchorage: Assemblies of neoprene elements and steel sleeves designed for seismically rated rigid equipment mountings, and matched to the type and size of attachment devices used.
2.04 SEISMIC BRACING COMPONENTS
A. Slotted Steel Channel: 1-5/8-by-1-5/8-inch cross section, formed from 0.1046-inch- thick steel, with 9/16-by-7/8-inch slots at a maximum of 2-inches O.C. in webs, and flange edges turned
toward web. 1. Materials for Channel: ASTM A 570, GR 33. 2. Materials for Fittings and Accessories: ASTM A 575, ASTM A 576, or ASTM A 36. 3. Fittings and Accessories: Products of the same manufacturer as channels and designed for use with that product. 4. Finish: Baked, rust-inhibiting, acrylic-enamel paint applied after cleaning and phosphate
treatment, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Channel-Type Bracing Assemblies: Slotted steel channel, with adjustable hinged steel brackets and bolts.
C. Cable-Type Bracing Assemblies: Zinc-coated, high-strength steel wire rope cable attached to steel thimbles, brackets, and bolts designed for cable service. 1. Arrange units for attachment to the braced component at one end and to the structure at
the other end.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 26 0548 - 4 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
2. Wire Rope Cable: Comply with ASTM 603. Use 49 or 133-strand cable with a minimum strength of 2 times the calculated maximum seismic force to be resisted.
D. Hanger Rod Stiffeners: Slotted steel channels with internally bolted connections to hanger rod.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install seismic restraints according to applicable codes and regulations and as approved by the City’s Representative, unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
3.02 STRUCTURAL ATTACHMENTS
A. Use bolted connections with steel brackets, slotted channel, and slotted-channel fittings to spread structural loads and reduce stresses in accordance with the structural engineer of record approval.
B. Attachments to New Concrete: Bolt to channel-type concrete inserts or use expansion anchors.
C. Attachments to Existing Concrete: Use expansion anchors.
D. Holes for Expansion Anchors in Concrete: Drill at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars.
E. Attachments to Solid Concrete Masonry Unit Walls: Use expansion anchors.
F. Attachments to Hollow Walls: Bolt to slotted steel channels fastened to wall with expansion anchors.
G. Attachments to Wood Structural Members: Install bolts through members.
H. Attachments to Steel: Bolt to clamps on flanges of beams or on upper truss chords of bar joists.
3.03 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT ANCHORAGE
A. Anchor rigidly to a single mobile structural element.
B. Anchor panel boards, motor-control centers, motor controls, switchboards, switchgear, transformers, unit substations, fused power-circuit devices, transfer switches, busways, battery racks, static uninterruptible power units, power conditioners, capacitor units, communication system components, and electronic signal processing, control, and distribution units as follows: 1. Bushings for Floor-Mounted Equipment Anchors: Install to allow for resilient media between anchor bolt or stud and mounting hole in concrete. 2. Anchor Bolt Bushing Assemblies for Wall-Mounted Equipment: Install to allow for resilient media where equipment or equipment-mounting channels are attached to wall.
3. Torque bolts and nuts on studs to values recommended by equipment manufacturer.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 26 0548 - 5 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
3.04 SEISMIC BRACING INSTALLATION
A. Install bracing according to spacing and strengths indicated by approved analysis.
B. Expansion and Contraction: Install to allow for thermal movement of braced components.
C. Cable Braces: Install with maximum cable slack recommended by manufacturer.
D. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to the structure at flanges of beams, upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members.
3.05 ACCOMMODATION OF DIFFERENTIAL SEISMIC MOTION
A. Make flexible connections in raceways, cables, wire ways, cable trays, and busways where they cross expansion and seismic control joints, where adjacent sections or branches are supported by different structural elements, and where they terminate at electrical equipment anchored to a different mobile structural element from the one supporting them.
3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform the following field quality-control testing:
B. Testing: Test pull-out resistance of seismic anchorage devices. 1. Provide necessary test equipment required for reliable testing. 2. Provide evidence of recent calibration of test equipment by a testing agency acceptable to the City.
3. Schedule test with the City before connecting anchorage device to restrained component (unless post-connection testing has been approved), and with at least seven days' advance notice. 4. Obtain Structural Engineer’s approval before transmitting test loads to the structure. Provide temporary load-spreading members. 5. Test at least four of each type and size of installed anchors and fasteners selected by the
City. 6. Test to 90 percent of rated proof load of device. 7. If a device fails the test, modify all installations of same type and retest until satisfactory results are achieved.
8. Record test results.
END OF SECTION
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 26 2816 - 1 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
SECTION 26 2816 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes the following individually mounted, enclosed switches and circuit breakers:
1. Fusible switches. 2. Non-Fusible Switches. 3. Molded-Case Circuit Breakers (MCCBs). 4. Enclosures.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. HD: Heavy Duty.
B. NC: Normally closed.
C. NO: Normally open.
D. SPDT: Single pole, double throw.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensioned elevations, sections, weights, and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes.
1. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. 2. Current and voltage ratings. 3. Short-circuit current rating. 4. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective devices and auxiliary components.
B. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that enclosed switches and circuit breakers, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Work." Include the following:
1. Basis of Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation.
a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any
parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."
2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.
C. Qualification Data: For testing agency.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 26 2816 - 2 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
D. Field quality-control test reports including the following:
1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with requirements.
E. Manufacturer's field service report.
F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Include the following:
1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting enclosed switches and circuit breakers. 2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of circuit breaker.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies
to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in CEC (NFPA 70), Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
C. Comply with CEC (NFPA 70).
D. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for enclosed
switches and circuit breakers, including clearances between enclosures, and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.
1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 degrees F and not exceeding 104
degrees F. 2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet.
B. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify City Representative no fewer than 10 days in advance of proposed interruption of
electric service. 2. Indicate method of providing temporary electric service.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 26 2816 - 3 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
3. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without City Representative’s written permission. 4. Comply with NFPA 70E.
1.06 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with other construction, including conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required
workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.
1.07 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Spares: For the following: a. Fuses for Fusible Switches: 3.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified.
2. Or Equal: Where products are specified by manufacturers name and accompanied by the term "or equal", comply with provisions in General Provisions. Specific procedures must be followed before use of an unnamed product or manufacturer.
2.02 FUSIBLE AND NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Eaton Corporation; Cutler-Hammer Products.
2. General Electric Co.; Electrical Distribution & Control Division. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. Square D/Group Schneider. 5. Or equal.
B. Fusible Switch, 600 A and Smaller: NEMA KS 1, Type HD, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate specified fuses, lockable handle with capability to accept two padlocks, and
interlocked with cover in closed position.
C. Non-Fusible Switch, 600 A and Smaller: NEMA KS 1, Type HD, lockable handle with capability to accept two padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.
D. Type GD, General Duty, Single Throw, 240-Vac, 800 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with fuse interiors to accommodate fuses, lockable handle with capability to accept two padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 26 2816 - 4 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
E. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 240-600Vac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate fuses, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.
F. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Six Pole, Single Throw, 240-600Vac, 200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate fuses, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.
G. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Double Throw, 240-600Vac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate fuses, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.
H. Accessories:
1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper ground conductors. 2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded, and bonded; and
labeled for copper neutral conductors. 3. Auxiliary Contact Kit: Auxiliary set of contacts arranged to open before switch blades open.
2.03 MOLDED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.
3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. 5. Or equal.
B. General Requirements: Comply with UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with interrupting capacity to comply with available fault currents.
C. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads and
instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.
D. Adjustable, Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front-mounted, field-adjustable trip setting.
E. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller, and let-through ratings less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5.
F. Integrally Fused Circuit Breakers: Thermal-magnetic trip element with integral limiter-style fuse listed for use with circuit breaker and trip activation on fuse opening or on opening of fuse compartment door.
G. Ground-Fault, Circuit-Interrupter (GFCI) Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with Class A ground-fault protection (6-mA trip).
H. Ground-Fault, Equipment-Protection (GFEP) Circuit Breakers: With Class B ground-fault
protection (30-mA trip).
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 26 2816 - 5 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
2.04 ENCLOSURES
A. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, NEMA KS 1, NEMA 250, and UL 50, to comply with environmental conditions at installed location.
1. Indoor, Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1. 2. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R. 3. Kitchen/Wash-Down Areas: NEMA 250, Type 4X, Stainless Steel.
4. Other Wet or Damp, Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4. 5. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids: NEMA 250, Type 12. 6. Hazardous Areas Indicated on Drawings: NEMA 250, Type 7C.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with applicable portions of NECA 1, NEMA PB 1.1, and NEMA PB 2.1 for installation of enclosed switches and circuit breakers.
B. Mount individual wall-mounting switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height, unless otherwise indicated. Anchor floor-mounting switches to concrete base.
C. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Work".
D. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.
3.03 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs as specified in Division 26 Section "Common Work Results for Electrical”.
B. Enclosure Nameplates: Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate as specified in Division 26 Section "Common Work Results for Electrical”.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation, including connections, and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing.
1. Inspect mechanical and electrical connections. 2. Verify switch and relay type and labeling verification. 3. Verify rating of installed fuses.
4720 / Faraday Center Roof and HVAC Refurbishment 26 2816 - 6 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
4. Inspect proper installation of type, size, quantity, and arrangement of mounting or anchorage devices complying with manufacturer's certification.
B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. Test mounting and anchorage devices according to requirements in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems". 2. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in NETA ATS,
Section 7.5 for switches and Section 7.6 for molded-case circuit breakers. Certify compliance with test parameters. 3. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. 4. Infrared Scanning:
a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days
after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each enclosed switch and circuit breaker. Open or remove doors or panels so connections are accessible to portable scanner. b. Follow-Up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each
unit 11 months after date of Substantial Completion. c. Instruments, Equipment and Reports:
1) Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device. 2) Prepare a certified report that identifies enclosed switches and circuit
breakers included and describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial
action.
3.05 ADJUSTING
A. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges.
3.06 CLEANING
A. On completion of installation, vacuum dirt and debris from interiors; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning.
B. Inspect exposed surfaces and repair damaged finishes.
END OF SECTION
APPENDIX A
BASIS OF DESIGN PRODUCT DATA
Composition: The AlphaGuard BIO Base Coat
is a two-part, bio- based, polyurethane roof
coating. AlphaGuard BIO Base Coat is used with
fiberglass mat or polyester reinforcement.
Basic Uses:The AlphaGuard BIO System can
be used in a variety of projects, including roof
restoration, approved recover and new construc-
tion assemblies, IRMA and vegetative roof systems.
Limitations:
• Do not apply when ambient temperatures are
below 45°F (7°C)
• Do not apply when overnight temperature
drops below 40ºF (4ºC)
• Do not adhere to expanded polystyrene or
extruded polystyrene.
• Do not apply directly to plywood, tongue and
groove decks, wood decks, poured in place
gypsum, lightweight insulating concrete
decks, structural lightweight concrete and
cementitious wood fiber decks.
• Not for use over coal tar pitch, gravel BUR,
corrugated metal roof systems, and silicone-
based coatings and sealants.
Packaging:
Part A - 5 gallon (18.9 L) container (3.2 gal total).
Part B - 1 gallon (3.78 L) container (0.8 gal total).
Each Part A & Part B kit yields 4 gallons
Colors:Gray
• High bio content makes
product sustainable and
environmentally friendly
• Results in faster cure
times than similar one-
component products
• Suitable for use over
many substrates/roof
types
• 100% Solids
• Low Odor
• Meets California VOC
limits
• Can be used in limited
access areas
• Resistant to a wide variety
of harmful chemicals
AlphaGuard®BIO Base Coat
High Performance, Two-Part,
Bio-Based Polyurethane Base Coat
Roofing & Weatherproofing Peace of Mind™
Grade:Brush/roller/squeegee.
Pot Life:20-25 minutes (77°F/50% RH)
*Temperature dependent - Increasing
temperature reduces expected pot-life
Storage Life: 12 months in unopened containers.
Recommended storage conditions are in an area
sheltered from harsh weather conditions at tempera-
tures ranging from 60-80°F (15-26°C) and low hu-
midity. Storage temperatures must not exceed
110°F (43°C). Do not store in direct sunlight.
APPLICATION:
Preparation: Clean the substrate with a high pres-
sure power wash of at least 2,000 psi. Prior to appli-
cation the surface must be clean, dry, solid, and free
of dirt, grease, oil, algae, and other debris.
Mixing: Use a heavy duty power drill with Jiffy Mixer
attachment. Cordless drills are not recommended
and may not properly mix the materials.
Mix Part A (Gray Label) for 1 minute before adding
Part B (Gray Label). After adding Part B mix the
combined materials for a minimum of 2 minutes
moving the mix blade from top to bottom. Make
sure to mix areas around side walls and bottom of
pail. Improper mixing will result in non-curing mate-
rial. Never fully invert empty pails in attempt to drain
material will result in non-curing material.
Do not break down kits into smaller quantities – MIX
ENTIRE KIT.
Repairs:If AlphaGuard BIO is being used over an
existing roof system, all appropriate repairs should
be made before applying the AlphaGuard BIO sys-
tem. Allow suggested cure time of repairs before
applying AlphaGuard BIO to the roof surface.
Reinforcement:AlphaGuard BIO Base Coat re-
quires full reinforcement with AlphaGuard Glass
Mat or Permafab. Fully embed reinforcement into
wet coating using a brush or roller until free of
voids, wrinkles, air pockets, standing fibers, etc.
ACCEPTABLE ROOF SURFACES/SUBSTRATES:
Bituminous Roof Systems
AlphaGuard BIO can be used over aged asphalt
based roof products. When using over felt roof
systems, repair any blisters and degraded felts.
Product Advantages
Features Benefits
Bio Content
Catalyzed Cure
Versatile
High Solids
Low VOC
Chemical Resistant
3735 Green RoadBeachwood, OH 44122216-292-5000
220 Wicksteed AveToronto, ONT M4H 1G7416-421-3300
6950 Rev. 8/16Printed in USA
Physical Performance Characteristics
AlphaGuard BIO Base Coat
Property Test Method Typical Value
Tensile Strength1 ASTM D412 1,400 lb/in
2
Water Vapor Transmission1 ASTM E96 0.19 perms
Low Temperature Flexibility ASTM D522 Pass at -25°F
(1/2" mandrel bend)
Tear Strength1 ASTM D5147 309 lbf
Water Absorption1 ASTM D471 0.008
Indentation Hardness ASTM D2240 88 Shore A
Dimensional Stability1 ASTM D5147 < 0.1%
Volume Solids ASTM D 2697 100%
Weight Solids ASTM D 1644 100%
Volatile Organic Content ASTM D3960 1 g/L (A+B mix)
Viscosity ASTM D 2196 2,500 - 5,500 cp
¹ Data is for AlphaGuard BIO System
Skin & Over-Coat Times
Skin Time at:77 ºF/ 50% RH 3-4 hours
Over-Coat Time at: 77 ºF / 50% RH 6-7 hours
NOTE- Both skin & overcoat times are temperature-dependent.
Higher temperatures will result in reduced skin/overcoat times,
lower temperaturesmay result in extended skin/overcoat times
Concrete
AlphaGuard BIO can be used directly over concrete with
the appropriate primer. Any cracks should be repaired
before coating is applied. Allow new concrete to fully
cure for a minimum of 28 days (a concrete dryness test
should be performed before application).
Single Ply Systems
AlphaGuard BIO can be used over select single ply systems,
when used with the appropriate primer.
Modified Bitumen Systems
AlphaGuard BIO can be used over MB roof systems
when used with the appropriate primer.
Coverage Rate:
Smooth BUR/MB, Concrete, Single-Ply surfaces:
3 gals / SQ (48 wet mils) minimum
Granule surfaced MB:
4 gals / SQ (64 wet mils) minimum
Clean Up:Before the product cures, clean surfaces and
equipment with Isopropyl Alcohol.
Precautions:Use Tremco AlphaGuard BIO System
Coatings with adequate ventilation. Users must read
container labels and Material Safety Data Sheets for
health and safety precautions prior to use.
Availability and Cost:Contact your local Tremco Roof-
ing Representative for pricing and availability. For the
name and number of your Representative, call the Roof-
ing Division at 216-292-5000.
Maintenance:Your local Tremco Roofing Representative
can provide you with effective maintenance procedures
which may vary, depending upon specific conditions.
Periodic inspections, early repairs and preventative
maintenance are all part of a sound roof program.
Guarantee/Warranty:Tremco Inc. warrants Alpha-
Guard BIO to be free of defects and to meet published
physical properties when cured and tested according to
ASTM and Tremco standards. Under this warranty, we
will provide at no charge, AlphaGuard BIO in standard
packaging to replace any AlphaGuard BIO proven to be
defective when applied according to our written instruc-
tions, and in applications recommended by us as suit-
able for AlphaGuard BIO. THIS IS BUYER'S SOLE AND
EXCLUSIVE REMEDY.
All claims concerning product defects must be made in
writing within (12) months of shipment. The absence of
such claims in writing during this period will constitute a
waiver of all claims with respect to such product.
This warranty shall be IN LIEU OF any other warranty, ex-
press or implied, including but not limited to, any implied
warranty of MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTIC-
ULAR PURPOSE.
AlphaGuard BIO can be used in a system configuration.
Talk to your local Tremco Representative about system
roof warranties.
Technical Services:Your local Tremco Representative,
working with the Technical Service Staff, can help analyze
conditions and needs to develop recommendations for
special applications. The services of the Tremco Re-
search Center, which has earned a unique reputa-
tion in weather- proofing technology, complement
and extend the services of the Tremco Technical
Service Staff.
Statement of Policy and Responsibility:
Tremco takes responsibility for furnishing quality
materials and for providing specifications and rec-
ommendations for their proper installation.
As neither Tremco itself nor its Representatives
practice architecture or engineering, Tremco offers
no opinion on, and expressly disclaims any re-
sponsibility for the soundness of any structure on
which its products may be applied. If questions
arise as to the soundness of a structure or its ability
to support a planned installation properly, the
Owner should obtain opinions of competent struc-
tural engineers before proceeding. Tremco accepts
no liability for any structural failure or for resultant
damages, and no Tremco Representative is author-
ized to vary this disclaimer.
Composition: The AlphaGuard BIO Top Coat is a
two-part, bio-based, polyurethane roof coating.
Basic Uses:The AlphaGuard BIO Top Coat
can be used in a variety of projects, including
roof restoration, approved recover and new
construction assemblies, IRMA and vegetative
roof systems. AlphaGuard BIO Top Coat is used
as a surfacing over AlphaGuard BIO Base Coat
and reinforcement.
Limitations:
• Do not apply when ambient temperatures are
below 45°F (7°C)
• Do not apply when overnight temperature
drops below 40ºF (4ºC)
• Do not adhere to expanded polystyrene or
extruded polystyrene.
• Do not apply directly to plywood, tongue and
groove decks, wood decks, poured in place
gypsum, lightweight insulating concrete decks,
structural lightweight concrete and
cementitious wood fiber decks.
• Not for use over coal tar pitch, gravel BUR,
corrugated metal roof systems, and silicone-
based coatings and sealants
AlphaGuard®BIO Top Coat
High Performance, Two-Part, Bio-Based
Polyurethane Top Coat
Roofing & Weatherproofing Peace of Mind™
Packaging:
Part A - 5 gallon (18.9 L) container (2.2 gal total).
Part B - 1 gallon (3.78 L) container (0.9 gal total).
Each Part A & Part B kit yields 3.1 gallons.
Colors:White
Grade:Brush/roller/squeegee.
Pot Life:20-25 minutes (77°F/50% RH)
*Temperature dependent - Increasing temper-
ature significantly reduces expected pot-life
Storage Life: 12 months in unopened containers.
Recommended storage conditions are in an
area sheltered from harsh weather conditions at
temperatures ranging from 60-80°F (15-26°C)
and low humidity. Storage temperatures must not
exceed 110°F (43°C). Do not store in direct sunlight.
APPLICATION:
Preparation: AlphaGuard BIO Base Coat must
be clean, dry, solid, and free of dirt, grease, oil,
algae, and other debris. AlphaGuard BIO Base Coat
should be top-coated within 72 hours of base coat
application.
Mixing: Use a heavy duty power drill with Jiffy Mixer
attachment. Cordless drills are not recommended
and may not properly mix the materials.
Mix Part A (White Label) for 1 minute before adding
Part B (White Label). After adding Part B mix the
combined materials for a minimum of 2 minutes
moving the mix blade from top to bottom. Make
sure to mix areas around side walls and bottom
of pail. Improper mixing will result in non-curing
material. Never fully invert empty pails in attempt
to drain material – will result in non-curing material.
Do not break down kits into smaller quantities – MIX
ENTIRE KIT.
Repairs:If AlphaGuard BIO is being used over an
existing roof system, all appropriate repairs should
be made before applying the AlphaGuard BIO
system. Allow suggested cure time of repairs before
applying AlphaGuard BIO to the roof surface.
ACCEPTABLE ROOF SURFACES/SUBSTRATES:
Properly applied and cured AlphaGuard BIO Base
Coat and reinforcement.
• High bio content makes
product sustainable and
environmentally friendly
• Lower surface temperature
• Potential Energy Savings
• Results in faster cure
times than similar one-
component products
• Suitable for use over
many substrates/roof
types
• 100% Solids
• Low Odor
• Meets California VOC
limits
• Can be used in limited
access areas
• Resistant to a wide variety
of harmful chemicals
Product Advantages
Features Benefits
Bio Content
Reflective Top Coat
Catalyzed Cure
Versatile
High Solids
Low VOC
Chemical Resistant
3735 Green RoadBeachwood, OH 44122216-292-5000
220 Wicksteed AveToronto, ONT M4H 1G7416-421-3300
6951 Rev. 8/16Printed in USA
Non-Skid Application: In areas where a slip-resistant
surface is required, 20 - 40 mesh silica sand can
be broadcast at 10 - 15 lbs / SQ (0.5 - 0.7 kg/m2)
and back-rolled in an additional layer of Tremco
AlphaGuard BIO Top Coat.
Coverage Rate:
Top Coat: 2 gals / SQ (32 wet mils)
Non-Skid Coat: 1.5 gals / SQ (24 wet mils)
Tremco Plain and Simple Warranty: 3 gals / SQ
(48 wet mils)
Clean Up:Before the product cures, clean surfaces
and equipment with Isopropyl Alcohol.
Precautions:Use Tremco AlphaGuard BIO System
Coatings with adequate ventilation. Users must read
container labels and Material Safety Data Sheets for
health and safety precautions prior to use.
Availability and Cost:Contact your local Tremco
Roofing Representative for pricing and availability.
For the name and number of your Representative,
call the Roofing Division at 216-292-5000.
Maintenance:Your local Tremco Roofing
Representative can provide you with effective
maintenance procedures which may vary, depending
upon specific conditions. Periodic inspections,
early repairs and preventative maintenance are
all part of a sound roof program.
Guarantee/Warranty:Tremco Inc. warrants Alpha-
Guard BIO to be free of defects and to meet pub-
lished physical properties when cured and tested
according to ASTM and Tremco standards. Under
this warranty, we will provide at no charge, Alpha-
Guard BIO in standard packaging to replace any
AlphaGuard BIO proven to be defective when
applied according to our written instructions, and
in applications recommended by us as suitable
for AlphaGuard BIo. THIS IS BUYER'S SOLE AND
EXCLUSIVE REMEDY.
All claims concerning product defects must be made
in writing within (12) months of shipment. The
absence of such claims in writing during this period
will constitute a waiver of all claims with respect to
such product.
This warranty shall be IN LIEU OF any other warranty,
express or implied, including but not limited to, any
implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
AlphaGuard BIO can be used in a system
configuration. Talk to your local Tremco
Representative about system roof warranties.
Technical Services:Your local Tremco Representative,
working with the Technical Service Staff, can
help analyze conditions and needs to develop
recommendations for special applications. The
services of the Tremco Research Center, which
has earned a unique reputation in weatherproofing
technology, complement and extend the services of
the Tremco Technical Service Staff.
Statement of Policy and Responsibility:
Tremco takes responsibility for furnishing quality
materials and for providing specifications and
recommendations for their proper installation.
As neither Tremco itself nor its Representatives
practice architecture or engineering, Tremco
offers no opinion on, and expressly disclaims any
responsibility for the soundness of any structure
on which its products may be applied. If questions
arise as to the soundness of a structure or its ability
to support a planned installation properly, the
Owner should obtain opinions of competent
structural engineers before proceeding. Tremco
accepts no liability for any structural failure or for
resultant damages, and no Tremco Representative
is authorized to vary this disclaimer.
Physical Performance Characteristics
AlphaGuard BIO Top Coat
Property Test Method Typical Value
Tensile Strength1 ASTM D412 1,400 lb/in
2
Water Vapor Transmission1 ASTM E96 0.19 perms
Low Temperature Flexibility ASTM D522 Pass at -25°F
(1/2" mandrel bend)
Tear Strength1 ASTM D5147 309 lbf
Water Absorption1 ASTM D471 0.008
Indentation Hardness ASTM D2240 81 Shore A
Dimensional Stability1 ASTM D5147 < 0.1%
Reflectivity ASTM C1549 84%
Emissivity ASTM C1371 87%
SRI ASTM E1980 105
Volume Solids ASTM D 2697 100%
Weight Solids ASTM D 1644 100%
Volatile Organic Content ASTM D3960 < 6 g/L (A+B mix)
Viscosity ASTM D 2196 2,500 - 5,500 cp
¹ Data is for AlphaGuard BIO System
Skin & Over-Coat Times
Skin Time at:77 ºF/ 50% RH 2-3 hours
Over-Coat Time at: 77 ºF / 50% RH 7-8 hours
NOTE- Both skin & overcoat times are temperature-dependent.
Higher temperatures will result in reduced skin/overcoat times,
lower temperaturesmay result in extended skin/overcoat times
AlphaGuard¥ #*0MT F L UI D APPL I ED RO OF ING S Y S TEM4
*/45"--"5*0/(6*%&
I
II
III
IV
V
VI
VII
VIII
IX
X
XI
XII
Table of Contents
GENERAL OVERVIEW
STORAGE & HANDLING
WEATHER RESTRICTIONS
PERSONAL PROTECTION EQUIPMENT
TOOLS & EQUIPMENT
PRODUCT LIST
PRIMER MATRIX
6<6TE0 48$LI)IC$TIO16
SURFACE PREPARATION
APPLICATION & INSTALLATION
INSPECTION 5EP$I56
DETAILS
45
10
11
12-13
14-2
229
30
31-45
4
AlphaGuard Plus RooIing System
AlphaGuard Concrete RooIing System
AlphaGuard Restoration System
AlphaGuard Top Coat
AlphaGuard Reinforcement
AlphaGuard Base Coat
BURmastic Composite Ply
BURmastic Adhesive SF
Approved Coverboard
Polyisocyanurate Insulation
Steel Deck (Pictured) or Concrete
AlphaGuard Top Coat
AlphaGuard Reinforcement
AlphaGuard Base Coat
Concrete Deck
AlphaGuard Top Coat
AlphaGuard Reinforcement
AlphaGuard Base Coat
Existing Roof Membrane
5
The AlphaGuard MT System is a liquid-applied,
moisture triggered, aliphatic polyurethane
elastomeric roofing membrane that provides
seamless waterproofing.
The unique moisture triggered formula uses
moisture from the air to begin the curing process,
but does not rely on moisture for the entire
curing process. This differs from moisture cured
urethanes, which needs the moisture for the
entire curing process and is susceptible to carbon
dioxide gassing and pin holing. This makes for a
more stable, uniformed cure.
This UV resistant, high solid, durable roofing
system is low odor, low VOC and is field-applied
with one-part liquid waterproofing layers reinforced
with fabric. AlphaGuard MT can be fully bonded
to a variety of substrates as a maintenance and
restoration system or as a new construction
system.
Fabric reinforcement is required to provide
dimensional stability to the cured urethane
waterproofing. Fabric reinforcement will prevent
potential shrinkage, especially in high movement
flashing areas.
General Overview
The AlphaGuard BIO System is a liquid-applied,
biobased twocomponent, polyurethane roofing
field and flashing elastomeric membrane that
provides seamless waterproofing.
AOSKD*XDUG 0T AOSKD*XDUG %IO
The development of $lphaGuard BIO is derived
from uniTue biobased polyurethane technology.
The high biocontent maNes for a sustainable
environmentally responsible roofing product while
the polyurethane technology offers longterm
waterproofing performance in the toughest
conditions.
The 100 solids highly reflective 89 resistant
product is a field applied twocomponent roofing
system. The twocomponent technology has a
cataly]ed curing process which results in a faster
dry times a more uniform finished film and
negates the possiblity of blistering gassing
pinholing etc.
$lphaGuard BIO can be installed to a variety of
substrates as a maintenance and restoration
system as a liTuid flashing membrane or as a new construction system. )abric
reinforcement is reTuired to provide dimensional
stability to the cured urethane waterproofing.
$lphaGuard BIO is a low 9OC product with
minimal to no odor maNing it ideal for applications
over occupied space causing little to no disruption
to the building
s occupants.
6
Storage & Handling
All AlphaGuard components will be delivered
to the site in original sealed containers. Store
AlphaGuard components in cool, dry spaces
outside of direct sunlight in accordance with local
regulations. Store away from heat, open fire, or
any ignition sources. In addition, store away from
strong acids or bases.
Rolls must be stored vertically to prevent contact
with water and other contaminants. Optimum
storage temperature is between 60ºF and 90ºF.
Shelf life drops at temperatures above this range.
In addition, resins risk self-polymerization when
exposed to temperatures above 140ºF.
Do not smoke around Geogard Primer and
keep product away from open flame, fire, or any
ignition source. Geogard Primer, in particular, is
flammable and harmful if inhaled, swallowed or
absorbed through the skin. This can cause skin,
eye, and respiratory irritation.
7
Weather Restrictions
AlphaGuard System installations cannot
proceed when there is a threat of precipitation
or condensation on the substrate exists.
Applying AlphaGuard during or just before a
precipitation event can cause the surface to
become pitted or distorted.
Application of $lphaGuard 0T 6ystem is
permitted when the ambient temperature
is between 50ºF (10ºC) and 110ºF (43ºC) and
the substrate temperature is a minimum of 5ºF
above the dew point. It is required that overnight
temperatures be above 40ºF (4.4ºC).
Application of $lphaGuard BIO 6ystem is
permitted when the ambient temperature is between 45ºF (ºC) and 110ºF (43ºC) and
the substrate temperature is a minimum of 5ºF
above the dew point. It is required that overnight
temperatures be above 40ºF (4.4ºC).
8
Personal Protection Equipment
Refer to the MSDS for each product for specific
PPE information.
Provide the following to installers: Safety Shoes &
Overalls, suitable Hand, Eye, and Ear Protection,
and hard hats & appropriate fall protection.
Comply with requirements of OSHA, NIOSH or
governing local authority regarding barricades,
retaining ropes, and other safety elements (active
/ passive).
Use AlphaGuard with adequate ventilation or
respiratory protection as needed to keep exposure
below TLV values within applications lacking
sufficient natural air movements. Protect HVAC
air intake ducts from infiltration into the building
interior. Pre-existing eyes, skin, and respiratory
issues may be aggravated by exposure, and may
cause skin and respiratory sensitization.
Geogard Primer is flammable and harmful if
inhaled, swallowed or absorbed through the
skin. This can cause skin, eye, and respiratory
irritation. Do not smoke around Geogard Primer
and keep product away from open flame, fire, or
any ignition source.
9
Tools & Equipment
Blower Broom or 9acuum
ChalN Line
'isposable 5ubber Gloves
E[tension Cords
Garbage Bags
Generator
+and Grinder
+and 6ander
0asNing Tape
Pail +eat Bands
Paint Brushes 4´
Paint 5oller Cages 4´ ´
Paint 5oller Covers 4´ ´ 3/1/2´ nap
Paint 5oller E[tension +andles
Paint Trays
Power washer 3000 psi ma[
5ags
6carifier concrete substrates
6cissors and/or 5a]or .nives
6crewdrivers
6hot Blaster concrete substrates
6ocNets / :renches
6Tueegees )lat Blade ó´ 1otched
Tap 6et
Tape measure
Tarps and/or 6heeting
:et 0il Gauge
:ater 6ource
10
Product List
Fluid-Applied Membrane
$lphaGuard 0T Base Coat
$lphaGuard 0T Top Coat
$lphaGuard BIO Base Coat .its Part $ B
$lphaGuard BIO Top Coat .its Part $ B
RHiQIRUFiQJ 0DWHUiDOV
$lphaGuard Glass 0at
Permafab Polyester 5einforcement
PUiPHUV
$lphaGuard CPrime
$lphaGuard 0Prime
$lphaGuard :B Primer
Geogard Primer
Tremco Primer/6plice :ash
Tremco Primer/6plice :ash L9
%DVH SKHHWV
B85mastic Composite Ply
B85mastic Composite Ply +T
B85mastic Composite Ply Premium
B85mastic 6upreme Composite Ply
0astics
Solargard Seam Sealer
%ase 6Keet $GKesiYe
BURmastic Adhesive SF
,nsulation $GKesiYe
Tremco Low Rise Foam Adhesive
11
AlphaGuard Primer Matrix
Substrates C-PrimeM-PrimeRe-PrimePrimer/Splice WashWB PrimerWood
Metal X
Concrete X
Brick X
Stone X
Bituminous Surfaces X X
MB Cap Sheets X X
EPDM XX
PVC/TPA X
TPO X
Hypalon XX
Plastic/PVC Pipes X
Urethane Coated Surfaces X X
Chart 1
*
*When using AlphaGuard WB Primer, a test patch must be utilized to ensure proper adhesion to the substrate.
System Qualifications
1otify warrantor of e[tent of worN. 'o not proceed
with worN that will diminish Owner¶s protection
under e[isting warranties unless directed by
Owner.
E[iVWiQJ :DUUDQWiHV
E[amine e[isting roofing substrates with Installer
present for compliance with reTuirements and for
other conditions affecting application and
performance of roof coatings.
)or the record prepare written report endorsed
by Installer listing conditions detrimental to
performance.
9erify compatibility with and suitability of
substrates.
9erify that substrates are visibly dry and free of
moisture. Conduct an I5 scan on applicable roof
assemblies to identify moisture within the e[isting
roof system.
9erify that roofing membrane surfaces have
adeTuately aged to enable proper bond with base
coat.
9erify that roofing membrane is free of blisters
splits open laps indications of shrinNage and
puncture damage or other indications of
impending roof system failure.
$pplication of fluidapplied membrane indicates
acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
E[DPiQDWiRQ
Protect e[isting roofing system that is indicated
not to receive fluidapplied roofing and adMacent
portions of building and building eTuipment.
Comply with warranty reTuirements of e[isting
roof membrane manufacturer.
Limit traffic and material storage to areas of
e[isting roofing membrane that have been
protected.
0aintain temporary protection and leave in
place until replacement roofing has been
completed.
6hut down air intaNe eTuipment in the vicinity of
the :orN in coordination with the Owner. Cover
air intaNe louvers before proceeding with coating
worN that could affect indoor air Tuality or activate
smoNe detectors in the duct worN.
9erify that rooftop utilities and service piping
affected by the :orN have been shut off before
commencing :orN.
0aintain roof drains in functioning condition to
ensure roof drainage at end of each worNday.
Prevent debris from entering or blocNing roof
drains and conductors. 8se roofdrain plugs
specifically designed for this purpose. 5emove
roofdrain plugs at end of each worNday when no
worN is taNing place or when rain is forecast.
'o not permit water to enter into or under
e[isting membrane roofing system components
that are to remain.
PUHSDUDWiRQ
1
System Qualifications
0HPEUDQH SXUIDFH PUHSDUDWiRQ
5emove aggregate ballast or pavers from
roofing membrane.
5emove blisters ridges bucNles and other
substrate irregularities from e[isting roofing
membrane that would inhibit application of
uniform waterproof coating.
5epair membrane at locations where
irregularities have been removed.
Broom clean e[isting substrate.
Clean substrate of contaminants such as dirt
debris oil and grease that can affect adhesion of
fluidapplied membrane by power washing at
minimum 2000 psi. 5emove e[isting coatings if
any. $llow to dry thoroughly.
9erify that e[isting substrate is dry before
proceeding with application of fluid applied
roofing. 6pot checN substrates with an electrical
capacitance moisturedetection meter.
RRRI CRDWiQJ PUHSDUDWiRQ
1
RRRI PDWFKiQJ 1otify Owner each day of e[tent
of roof tearoff proposed and obtain authori]ation
to proceed.
Buildup isolated low spots on e[isting roofing
membrane with fluid applied manufacturer¶s
recommended products to alleviate ponding.
Limited 5oof TearOff: :here indicated remove
e[isting roofing membrane and other membrane
roofing system components down to the decN. )ill
in the tearoff areas to match e[isting membrane
roofing system construction.
'uring removal operations have sufficient and
suitable materials onsite to facilitate rapid
installation of temporary protection in the event of
une[pected rain.
RRRI CRDWiQJ PUHSDUDWiRQ
5emove or repair e[isting base flashings around
parapets curbs walls and penetrations.
Clean substrates of contaminants such as
asphalt sheet materials dirt and debris.
'o not damage metal counterflashings that are
to remain. 5eplace damaged counterflashings
with counterflashings of liNe metal weight/
thicNness and finish.
5epair flashings with liNe materials.
5epair gravel stops copings and other roof
related sheet metal and trip elements 5eseal
Moints replace loose or missing fasteners and
replace components where reTuired to create a
watertight condition.
E[iVWiQJ )ODVKiQJV
1
Surface Preparation
%efore beginning the proMect consider the
substrates that are present on your proMect and
refer to the primer matri[ see &hart to select
the proper primer.
The substrate in which you will be roofing must
be clean and dry. $ll surfaces should be cleaned
with a power washer min. 2000 psi and a
cleaning solution that is appropriate for the
substrate. $ny e[isting roof system should have
a thermal I5 scan performed. This will ensure
that all areas of concern will be addressed and
wet insulation will be removed.
:hen applying $lphaGuard to a concrete
substrate always refer to the International
&oncrete 5epair Institute I&5I manual for
6electing and 6pecifying &oncrete 6urface
Preparation for 6ealers &oating and Polymer
2Yerlays no. 72.
In order to use $lphaGuard over a concrete
substrate the surface must be prepared to
accept the roofing system. $ll grease oils
asphalt remnants buildup and debris must be
removed. The surface must be repaired prior to
applying $lphaGuard. $ll cracNs larger than ó´
must be repaired using a rapid set selfleveling
concrete repair mi[ture. $llow to properly set and
dry before proceeding.
$reas that are raised more than ó´ must be
leveled or ground down. This will allow for a level
and sound substrate for $lphaGuard. The
surface must be shot blasted or scarified to
achieve a C6P 3 profile IC5I 03321 . This
will allow the $lphaGuard system to properly
adhere to the substrate.
)or new concrete substrates allow a minimum of
2 days and always test the moisture in the
concrete before proceeding with installation of
$lphaGuard.
CONCRETE 'EC.S
ASP+A/T %8R 0% S<STE0S
:hen restoring asphalt based roof systems
make all necessary repairs using 6olargard
6eam 6ealer and Permafab. 2nce all repairs
haYe been made allow to cure for a minimum of
2 hours before applying the $lphaGuard
6ystem.
$ll surfaces to have $lphaGuard applied should
be power washed min. 2000 psi and all debris
removed from roof. Once roof is clean and dry
prime all surfaces that are to be treated. 5efer
to the primer matri[ see chart 1 for the
appropriate primer for this substrate.
For modified bitumen and cap sheet roofs, end
laps and side laps must be treated with
AlphaGuard base coat or 6olargard 6eam
6ealer at a rate of 50 linear feet/gallon.E[isting urethane coatings should power washed
min. 2000 psi and allowed to dry before any
$lphaGuard is applied. 5efer to the primer matri[
see chart 1 for the appropriate primer for this
substrate. $llow primer to fully dry before
applying $lphaGuard to the substrate.
E;ISTIN* 8RET+ANE COATIN*S
Wrinkles in EPDM will telegraph through the AlphaGuard system. It is
necessary to make these repairs before applying AlphaGuard.
Holes and tears in membranes must be repaired before AlphaGuard is
applied.
(Fig. 2)
(Fig. 1)
SIN*/E P/< S<STE0S
7he substrate must be inspected for loose
flashings popped fasteners and tearing of the
membrane.
$ll single ply substrates must be clean and dry
before any $lphaGuard is applied. The surface
must be power washed min. 2000 psi and
cleaned with a mild detergent wa[ free .
5emove any walNway pads and maNe all
necessary repairs before priming the surface.
5efer to the primer matri[ see chart 1 for the
appropriate primer for this substrate.
White single ply roof, cleaned and ready to be coated with AlphaGuard.
15
1
Metal substrates must be clean and primed with M-Prime.
:OO' S8R)ACES
$lphaGuard can be applied directly to small
wooden details and walls of wood construction. If
a wood decN is being utili]ed insulation and /or a
base sheet must be used. Consult Tremco
Technical 6ervice for the recommendations on
your proMect.
%RIC. OR STONE S8R)ACES
:hen coating or flashing bricN or stone power
wash the surfaces and remove any loose mortar
or protruding surfaces. 5efer to the primer matri[
see chart 1 for the appropriate primer for this
substrate.
0ETA/ S8R)ACES
:hen coating a metal surface all rusted or
o[idi]ed areas must be ground to a bright metal
surface. $ny painted surfaces should be tested
to verify adhesion either by a small test area or
sending a small sample into our lab. 5efer to the
primer matri[ see chart 1 for the appropriate
primer for this substrate.
1
AlphaGuard Application On Concrete Decks
Minimum deck thickness for structural concrete
is 4.
Only poured-in-place concrete that provides
bottom side drying is acceptable.
Structural Concrete Deck must be structurally
sound, dry, and free of grease, oils, coatings,
dust, curing compounds and other contaminants.
Surface laitance must be removed. The surface
must be scarified, shot blasted or pressure
washed with high/ultra high pressure. Remove
oil, grease smear and asphalt residue with
trisodium phosphate or a strong detergent. For
oil contaminated surfaces, use steam cleaning in
conjunction with a strong emulsifying detergent.
Rinse thoroughly with potable water.
Properly prepared concrete substrate
Remove defective concrete, honeycombs,
cavities, joint cracks, voids and other defects
by routing to sound material. Smooth precast
and formed concrete surfaces must be cleaned,
roughened and made absorptive by mechanical
abrasion. Surface profile should be equal to CSP
3-6 in accordance with ICRI Guideline 310.2. If it is
not possible to mechanically abrade, acid etch with
a 15% Hydrochloric acid solution. After etching,
pressure wash or flush the surface with copious
amounts of water to neutralize the surface. Care
must be taken to ensure that all salts and residue
from the reaction have been removed.
The pH of the surface should be checked, as per
ASTM D 4262, following acid etching. Following
surface preparation, apply AlphaGuard MT to the
cleaned surface in a small area. An Elcometer
Pull Off Adhesion tester or similar (ASTM D 4541)
must be used to test the trial area for proper
adhesion. Before application of the coating, use
the “Visqueen test” (ASTM D 4263) to evaluate
moisture level in concrete.
Allow new structural concrete to cure for a minimum
of 28 days. Remove any surface hardener or
curing compounds by using the recommended
mechanical methods for surface preparation.
Patch all unsound or defective concrete with repair
mortar acceptable to material manufacturer.
Prevent dust, vapors, gases, and odors from
entering into the building during roof installation.
When shutting down or blocking air intakes,
provide makeup air or additional intake air from
sources away from the work area. Coordinate
these procedures with owner’s Representative.
Maintain roof drains in functioning condition to
ensure roof drainage at end of each workday.
Prevent debris from entering or blocking roof
drains and conductors. Use roof-drain plugs
specifically designed for this purpose. Remove
roof-drain plugs at the end of each workday, when
no work is taking place, or when rain is forecast.
Do not permit water to enter into or under existing
membrane roofing system components that are
to remain.
1
ICRI Surface Profiles
Surface profiles are provided by the International Concrete Repair Institute (ICRI). Molded replicas of these
profiles can be purchased from ICRI at www.ICRI.org.
CSP 1
(Acid Etched)
CSP 2
(Grinding)
CSP 3
(Light Shot blasting)
CSP 4
(Light Scarification)
CSP 5
(Medium Shot blasting)
CSP 7
(Heavy Abrasive Blast)
CSP 8
(Scabbled)
CSP 9
(Heavy Scarification)
CSP 6
(Medium Scarification)
1
GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
Use products with personal protection equipment.
User must read container label and material safety
data sheets prior to use.
Store all materials prior to application at
temperatures between 60ºF and 90ºF
Use with adequate ventilation. Protect HVAC air
intake ducts from infiltration into the building’s
interior.
$pplication Temperatures:
$lphaGuard BIO: 45) 110)
$lphaGuard 0T: 50) 110)
Cure times are e[tended below 50)
Prevent materials from penetrating substrate joints,
entering building, or damaging roofing system
components or adjacent building construction.
Painters tape shall be used to mask detail areas and
metal flashings. Remove tape while AlphaGuard
remains wet.
All flashings shall be installed first, before the field
of the roof is covered.
After base coat and fiberglass reinforcement
have been installed, and before the top coat is
installed, a thorough inspection of the surface
must be conducted by the manufacturer’s technical
representative. The fiberglass reinforcement must
be completely encapsulated by the base coat, with
no pinholes or voids, at the end of each work day.
Coverage rates of base coat and top coat must be
continuously verified for proper wet film thickness
with a wet mil gauge.
Coverage rate of base coat may vary depending on
surface conditions.
Raised or exposed fiberglass reinforcement shall
be sanded smooth prior to application of top coat.
A/P+A*8AR' CPRI0E INSTALLATION
Mixing: Use clean containers and mixing
equipment.
Using a low speed “Jiffy” type mixer, mix the A &
B components separately for approximately one
minute.
Combine one part by volume Part A with one part
by volume “B”. Mix the components thoroughly
for three to five minutes.
Scrape the bottom and sides of the mixing
container at least once. Do not mix air into the
blend. Mix only enough material that can be used
within the working life.
Application: The ambient and surface
temperature must be between 50ºF to 90ºF (10ºC
to 32.2ºC).
Apply to concrete using a short nap roller,
squeegee, or brush.
Coverage rates may vary depending on concrete
surface conditions.
Surface temperature, porosity and texture will
determine actual material quantities. Ensure
primer does not puddle and substrate has
complete coverage.
AlphaGuard base coat can be applied as soon as
the primer has become tack free.
A/P+A*8AR' %IO 0I;IN* INSTR8CTIONS
8sing a low speed ³-iffy´ type mi[er mi[
$lphaGuard BIO Part $ for one minute.
Combine Part B with Part $ in its entirety. 'o
not breaNdown Nits into smaller Tuantities.
0i[ the components thoroughly until completely
blended typically 2 minutes . 0i[ only enough
material that can be used within the pot life
2025 minutes .
Prime all metal surfaces with M-Prime.
Install base coat to flashing surfaces according
to manufacturer’s written instructions. Extend
coating up vertical surfaces a minimum of 8 and
out onto horizontal surfaces 4.
Back roll to achieve a minimum wet mil coating
thickness as required by the manufacturer.
Install fiberglass reinforcement immediately into
wet base coat. Extend reinforcement up vertical
surfaces a minimum of 8 and out onto horizontal
surfaces 4. Install according to manufacturers
written instructions.
Lap adjacent flashing pieces of fiberglass no
less than 3. Roll the surface of the fiberglass
to completely embed it into the wet base coat.
The fiberglass reinforcement must be backrolled to ensure material
saturates through the reinforcement.
Fiberglass must be fully encapsulated in base coat without pin holes,
voids, or openings.
Tape all edges to provide a straight line for all flashing details.
FLASHING AND STRIPPING INSTALLATION
Base coat and fiberglass reinforcement must be
installed on all curbs, penetrations, and drains
before moving to installation in the field.
Install masking tape or similar along the top edge
of flashings where base coat will terminate.
Prime all metal surfaces with $lphaGuard 0
Prime prior to installing flashings.
ALPHAGUARD MEMBRANE APPLICATION
%DVH CRDW ASSOiFDWiRQ
Install base coat directly onto primed concrete
surface and spread coating evenly according to
manufacturer¶s written instructions. BacN roll to
achieve the desired minimum wet mil thicNness.
Prime metal surfaces with $lphaGuard 0Prime.
Install reinforcement immediately into wet base
coat. 8sing a wet roller fully embed the
reinforcement into the wet base coat. 5oll until
fully saturated. 5einforcement must be fully
encapsulated in base coat and not contain pin
holes voids or openings.
Lap adMacent rolls no less than 3´. End laps shall
be no less than ´. Lap onto flashing no less
than 3´.
TRS CRDW ASSOiFDWiRQ
$pply top coat over cured base coat beginning
with flashings then install top coat directly over
field base coat and spread coating evenly
according to manufacturer¶s written instructions.
BacN roll to achieve a minimum thicNness of 32
wet mils on both flashings and field.
Priming of the base coat with Geogard Primer
may be reTuired if top coat is not applied within
2 hours of the base coat application.
WALKWAY INSTALLATION
NRQSNiG :DONZD\ ASSOiFDWiRQ
1. Identify walNway areas as indicated or as
directed by Owner.
2. $pply additional application of top coat to
taped walNway area at 1ó gals / 64 20 wet
mils .
3. Broadcast appro[imately 2030 lbs. per 100
sT.ft. of 2040 mesh silica sand or Tuart] in the
wet top coat material.
4. Immediately bacN roll sand and top coat
creating an even dispersal of sand.
5. 5emove tape outlining walNway immediately.
* If walkway application is not applied within 72
hours of the top coat application the top coat
shall be primed with Geogard Primer.
ROO) 'RAINS
5emove drain strainer and clamping ring.
5emove all rust and debris from the surface of
drain bowl. If necessary use a grinder to sand
metal surfaces down to clean bare metal.
Install base coat onto surrounding concrete decN
and metal drain bowl flange. Install a target piece
of reinforcement immediately into the wet base
coat and roll to fully embed/saturate the material.
$fter top coat has been installed reinstall drain
clamping ring and strainer. 5eplace broNen
drain ring clamping bolts if necessary.
$llow base coat to cure a before installing top
coat.
$void foot traffic on new fluidapplied membrane
for a minimum of 24 hours.
2
)/AS+IN* 'ETAI/S
$ll details are to be completed before the field of
the roof. $pply the basecoat to the walls
penetrations and curbs before the field of the
roof. $fter the field of the roof has been
completed with basecoat apply the topcoat to
the walls penetrations and curbs followed by
the field of the roof.
Parapet Walls & Coping Walls:
Before flashing a wall be sure that the wall is
properly cleaned and primed as appropriate.
Ensure that the wall is of sound construction
before flashing.
Once substrates are appropriately cleaned and
prepared apply base coat to the substrate at
the reTuired mil thicNness. The base coat should
only be applied to the area that you intend to
embed the reinforcement into at any given time.
8sing a roller or brush fully saturate the
reinforcement worNing from the center outwards.
The $lphaGuard material should e[tend ´
above the roof substrate per 15C$
recommendations. The toe of the flashing should
e[tend 4´ onto the roof substrate allowing for an
adeTuate surface to lap the $lphaGuard field
base coat onto the roof substrate per 15C$
recommendations. The toe of the flashing must
e[tend a minimum 4´ onto the roof substrate
allowing for adeTuate surface for the
$lphaGuard field base coat to lap.
:hen encountering a corner the reinforcement
should wrap by 34´ and be fully embedded into
the $lphaGuard base coat. 8sing a brush worN
the reinforcement into the corner. It may be
necessary to maNe relief cuts to form tightly.
Inspect the wall and corners for any pinholes or
unsaturated areas. If any areas e[ist reapply a
small amount of $lphaGuard base coat until
areas are fully saturated.
2
Wood or Solid Curbs:
Once substrates are appropriately cleaned and
prepared apply $lphaGuard base coat to the
substrate at the reTuired mil thicNness. The
base coat should only be applied to the area that
you intend to embed the reinforcement into at
any given time. 8sing a roller or brush fully
saturate the reinforcement worNing from the
center outwards.
The $lphaGuard material should e[tend ´
above the roof substrate per 15C$
recommendations. The toe of the flashing should
e[tend 4´ onto the roof substrate allowing for an
adeTuate surface to lap the $lphaGuard field
base coat to lap.
:hen encountering a corner the reinforcement
should wrap by 34´ and be fully embedded into
the $lphaGuard base coat. 8sing a brush worN
the reinforcement into the corner. It may be
necessary to maNe relief cuts to form tightly.
Inspect the curb and corners for any pinholes or
unsaturated areas. If any areas e[ist reapply a
small amount of $lphaGuard base coat until
areas are fully saturated.
Insulated Curbs:
Before flashing an insulated curb with
$lphaGuard one ply of B85mastic Composite
ply must be set in B85mastic 6) over the curb
wall and onto the field of the roof. 5emove
e[cess B85mastic 6) at laps and allow to cure
overnight.
Once the B85mastic 6) has cured $lphaGuard
can be applied directly to the B85mastic
Composite ply. The $lphaGuard material should
e[tend above the B85mastic Composite ply by
at least 1´. The toe of the flashing should e[tend
4´ onto the roof substrate allowing for an
adeTuate surface to lap the $lphaGuard field
base coat.
:hen encountering a corner the reinforcement
should wrap by 34´ and be fully embedded into
the $lphaGuard base coat. 8sing a brush worN
the reinforcement into the corner. It may be
necessary to maNe relief cuts to form tightly.
Inspect the curb and corners for any pinholes or
unsaturated areas. If any areas e[ist reapply a
small amount of $lphaGuard basecoat until
areas are fully saturated.
2
Soil Stacks, Pipe Penetrations and
Pitch Pockets:
$ll penetrations should be properly prepared by
grinding metal surfaces to a bright metal
removing asphalt residue and priming with the
appropriate primers see chart 1 .
Once a penetration has been properly prepared
marN them at least ´ above the roof decN. Tape
along these marNs to ensure you have a clean
straight line.
On round penetrations cut pieces to si]es that
are manageable and tear the bottom edge 23´
from the edge. This will allow the reinforcement
to conform to the pipe. $pply the $lphaGuard
base coat and fully embed the reinforcement.
The field base coat should e[tend over the toe of
the flashing to the base of the pipe. Once
cured the $lphaGuard top coat can be applied
followed by the field top coat. On sTuare
penetrations cut pieces that are manageable.
Cut the pieces to go ´ above the field of the roof
and 4´ onto the field of the roof. $pply the
$lphaGuard base coat and fully embed the
reinforcement. The field base coat should
e[tend over the toe of the flashing to the base of
the pipe. Once cured the $lphaGuard top coat
can be applied followed by the field top coat.
Flashing pipes and stands are easy and seamless.
Penetrations on MB roof systems can be flashed with AlphaGuard as well.
Penetrations that previously needed pitch pockets are flashed with
AlphaGuard. This eliminates possible points of water infiltration.
AlphaGuard as a flashing solution, is compatible with a variety of roofing
systems.
25
Internal Roof Drains:
Prior to applying $lphaGuard to a roof drain
detail inspect the drain bowl for cracNs and
holes. Grind the bowl to remove any residual
roofing products or asphalt residue. The drain
should have a clean rust free surface.
)or insulated roof systems a base sheet of
B85mastic Composite ply adhered in
B85mastic 6) should e[tend onto the drain
bowl to the inside edge of the bowl. The
transition from the insulation board to the drain
bowl should be within 1/´ vertically and 1/´
hori]ontally. $ tight fit is necessary at the areas.
)or concrete decNs maNe sure that the gap
between the decN and the drain bowl is 1/´ or
less. )or gaps greater than 1/´ a urethane
sealant should be used to fill the void. Once the
drain is prepared properly the field base coat
and reinforcement should be e[tended into the
drain past where the ring meets the bowl and
down into the bowl followed by the top coat.
5einstall the drain bowl and basNet once the
material is completely cured.
)or restoration proMects maNe all necessary
repairs to the e[isting drain detail. Ensure that
the e[isting roofing material is adhered tightly to
the drain bowl and abutting insulation. Once the
drain is prepared properly the field base coat
and reinforcement should be e[tended into the
drain past where the ring meets the bowl
followed by the top coat. 5einstall the drain bowl
and basNet once the material is completely
cured.
When flashing a drain, AlphaGuard will conform to the drain bowl,
eliminating areas where water can penetrate.
For concrete and insulated systems, extend AlphaGuard into the drain
bowl. Ensure that the drain bowl is prepared per requirements.
Completed drain detail.
2
Gutters & Metal Edge Details:
)or premanufactured metal edge systems such
as TremLocN EE6 TremLocN )ascia and
TremLocN Coping follow the reTuirements of the
detail drawings below.
)or shop fabricated details the metal edge or
gutter should be installed after the base layer of
$lphaGuard is applied. The metal edge should
then be flashed in with a base coat of
$lphaGuard with reinforcement embedded
followed by a top coat of $lphaGuard. The
$lphaGuard should e[tend the full length of the
flange along with the reinforcement.
Expansion Joints:
E[pansion Moints would be flashed in the same
manner as a wood curb. Once substrates are
appropriately cleaned and prepared apply
$lphaGuard base coat to the substrate at the
reTuired mil thicNness. The base coat should
only be applied to the area that you intend to
embed the reinforcement into at any given time.
8sing a roller or brush fully saturate the
reinforcement worNing from the center outwards.
The $lphaGuard material should e[tend ´
above the roof substrate per 15C$
recommendations. The toe of the flashing should
e[tend 4´ onto the roof substrate allowing for an
adeTuate surface to lap the $lphaGuard field
base coat to lap.
:hen encountering a corner the reinforcement
should wrap by 34´ and be fully embedded into
the $lphaGuard base coat. 8sing a brush worN
the reinforcement into the corner. It may be
necessary to maNe relief cuts to form tightly.
Inspect the e[pansion Moint and corners for any
pinholes or unsaturated areas. If any areas e[ist
reapply a small amount of $lphaGuard base coat
until areas are fully saturated. Once the
$lphaGuard flashings are installed a stainless
steel or copper cap would be installed per
Tremco specifications.
2
ALPHAGUARD APPLICATION
DIRECT TO CONCRETE
Base coat and fiberglass reinforcement
installation:
• Install base coat directly onto primed
concrete surface and spread coating
evenly according to Tremco’s written
instructions.
• Back roll to achieve a minimum wet mil
thickness according to Tremco’s
written instructions.
• Install fiberglass reinforcement
immediately into wet base coat. Roll
surface of fiberglass to
fully embed into wet base
coat. Roll until fully saturated.
• Lap adjacent rolls of glass mat no less
than 3”. End laps shall be no less than 6”.
• Lap onto flashing no less than 3”.
• Roll the surface of the fiberglass to
completely embed into the wet base coat.
• Allow base coat to cure a before installing
top coat.
• Fiberglass reinforcement must be fully
encapsulated in base coat and not contain
pin holes, voids, or openings.
Top coat installation for field of roof and
flashings:
• Priming of the base coat may be required
if top coat is not applied within 72 hours of
the base coat application. The base
coat shall be lightly primed with
manufacturer’s recommended primer.
• Install top coat on flashings first. Extend
coating up vertical surfaces a minimum of
8 “ and out onto horizontal surfaces.
• Install top coat directly over field base
coat and spread coating evenly according
to manufacturer’s written instructions.
• Back roll to achieve a minimum wet mil
thickness according to manufacturer’s
written instructions.
• Avoid foot traffic on new fluid-applied
membrane for a minimum of 24 hours.
WALKWAY INSTALLATION
Install walkways following application of top coat.
Locate as indicated, or as directed by Owner.
•If walkway application is not applied within
72 hours of the top coat application
the top coat shall be primed with
manufacturer’s recommended primer.
• Apply additional application of top coat to
taped walkway area according to
manufacturer’s written instructions.
• Broadcast approximately 20-30 lbs. per
100 sq. ft. of 20-40 mesh silica sand
or quartz in the wet top coat material.
• Immediately back roll sand and top coat,
creating an even dispersal of sand.
Remove tape outlining walkway
immediately.
2
ALPHAGUARD PLUS APPLICATION
INSULATED SYSTEMS
BURmastic Roof System Installation:
•Install roof insulation.
•Plan placement of SF BURmastic Roofing
System to ensure that water flows over or
along, but not against exposed edges.
•Starting at the low point of the roof,
embed approved ply sheets
in a uniform, continuous application of
BURmastic Adhesive SF.
• Ply shall never touch ply.
•Apply BURmastic Adhesive SF at a rate of
2 Gal/100 sf.
Base coat and fiberglass reinforcement
installation:
• Install base coat directly onto approved
ply sheet and spread coating
evenly according to Tremco’s
written instructions.
• Back roll to achieve a minimum wet mil
thickness according to Tremco’s
written instructions.
• Install fiberglass reinforcement
immediately into wet base coat. Roll
surface of fiberglass to
fully embed into wet base
coat. Roll until fully saturated.
• Lap adjacent rolls of glass mat no less
than 3”. End laps shall be no less than 6”.
• Lap onto flashing no less than 3”.
• Roll the surface of the fiberglass to
completely embed into the wet base coat.
• Allow base coat to cure before installing
top coat.
• Fiberglass reinforcement must be fully
encapsulated in base coat and not contain
pin holes, voids, or openings.
Top coat installation for field of roof and
flashings:
• Priming of the base coat is required if top
coat is not applied within 72 hours of
the base coat application. The base
coat shall be lightly primed with
manufacturer’s recommended primer.
• Install top coat on flashings first. Extend
coating up vertical surfaces a minimum of
8 “ and out onto horizontal surfaces.
• Install top coat directly over field base
coat and spread coating evenly according
to manufacturer’s written instructions.
• Back roll to achieve a minimum wet mil
thickness according to manufacturer’s
written instructions.
• Avoid foot traffic on new fluid-applied
membrane for a minimum of 24 hours.
WALKWAY INSTALLATION
Install walkways following application of top coat.
Locate as indicated, or as directed by Owner.
•If walkway application is not applied within
72 hours of the top coat application
the top coat shall be primed with
manufacturer’s recommended primer.
• Apply additional application of top coat to
taped walkway area according to
manufacturer’s written instructions.
• Broadcast approximately 20-30 lbs. per
100 sq. ft. of 20-40 mesh silica sand
or quartz in the wet top coat material.
• Immediately back roll sand and top coat,
creating an even dispersal of sand.
Remove tape outlining walkway
immediately.
2
ALPHAGUARD APPLICATION RESTORATION
Base coat and fiberglass reinforcement
installation:
• Prime with required primer (see chart 1)
and install base coat onto approved
substrate, spread coating
evenly according to Tremco’s
written instructions.
• Back roll to achieve a minimum wet mil
thickness according to Tremco’s
written instructions.
• Install fiberglass reinforcement
immediately into wet base coat. Roll
surface of fiberglass to
fully embed into wet base
coat. Roll until fully saturated.
• Lap adjacent rolls of glass mat no less
than 3”. End laps shall be no less than 6”.
• Lap onto flashing no less than 3”.
• Roll the surface of the fiberglass to
completely embed into the wet base coat.
• Allow base coat to cure a before installing
top coat.
• Fiberglass reinforcement must be fully
encapsulated in base coat and not contain
pin holes, voids, or openings.
Top coat installation for field of roof and
flashings:
• Priming of the base coat is required if top
coat is not applied within 72 hours of
the base coat application. The base
coat shall be lightly primed with
manufacturer’s recommended primer.
• Install top coat on flashings first. Extend
coating up vertical surfaces a minimum of
8 “ and out onto horizontal surfaces.
• Install top coat directly over field basecoat and spread coating evenly according
to manufacturer’s written instructions.
• Back roll to achieve a minimum wet mil
thickness according to manufacturer’s
written instructions.
• Avoid foot traffic on new fluid-applied
membrane for a minimum of 24 hours.
WALKWAY INSTALLATION
Install walkways following application of top coat.
Locate as indicated, or as directed by Owner.
• If walkway application is not applied within
72 hours of the top coat application
the top coat shall be primed with
manufacturer’s recommended primer.
• Apply additional application of top coat to
taped walkway area according to
manufacturer’s written instructions.
• Broadcast approximately 20-30 lbs. per
100 sq. ft. of 20-40 mesh silica sand
or quartz in the wet top coat material.
• Immediately back roll sand and top coat,
creating an even dispersal of sand.
Remove tape outlining walkway
immediately.
30
Final Inspection
$rrange for roofing system manufacturer¶s
technical personnel to inspect the fluidapplied
membrane on completion. Prior to
manufacturer¶s final inspection the contractor
shall e[amine the completed worN for the
following deficiencies:
Inspect completed Top Coat installation for pin
holes voids e[posed base coat e[posed
reinforcement rough fiberglass blisters un
adhered material or any other deficiencies that
could compromise waterproofing integrity and
long term performance.
Correct deficiencies as follows:
PiQ KROHVYRiGVH[SRVHG EDVH FRDW RU
UHiQIRUFHPHQW
1. Install Geogard Primer over Top Coat at a
coverage rate of 1 gal/500 sf. $llow to dry.
2. Install new Top Coat at a coverage rate of 2
gal/100 sf.
Repair & Maintenance
INSPECTION & REPAIR
RRXJK IiEHUJODVV UHiQIRUFHPHQW
1. 6and or grind fiberglass reinforcement down
flush to surrounding Base Coat surface.
2. Install Geogard Primer over area at a
coverage rate of 1 gal/00 sf. $llow to dry.
3. Install new Top Coat at a coverage rate of 2
gal/100 sf.
%OiVWHUVXQDGKHUHG TRS CRDW
1. Cut out and remove loose coating.
2. 5emove moisture if present.
3. Install Geogard Primer over area at a
coverage rate of 1 gal/500 sf. $llow to dry.
4. Install new Top Coat at a coverage rate of 2
gal/100 sf.
The fluidapplied membrane does not reTuire
additional surfacing or coatings for the
duration of the warranty service life. +owever
the following preventive maintenance and
general rooftop houseNeeping procedures
should be performed on a regular basis:
Inspect the fluidapplied membrane for physical
damage such as punctures splits or tears.
Inspect flashing components and details for
openings that could allow moisture entry.
Inspect rooftop for debris on the membrane and
around drains. 5emove debris and ensure all
drain strainers are clear.
'irt and debris that has accumulated on the roof
surface can be removed to preserve the
surfaces solar reflectivity. 5emove dirt and
debris with a solution of soap and water.
'ispose of rinse water according to local
environmental regulations.
Repair & Maintenance
If inspection reveals that repairs are needed in
the membrane or flashings follow these general
guidelines:
Punctures/splits/tears:
1. Clean surface of membrane with soap and
water. Let dry.
2. Install Geogard Primer over defective area at a
coverage rate of 1 gal/500 sf.
3. Install Base Coat over defect at a coverage rate
of 3 gal/100 sf and install reinforcement into wet
material.
4. Ensure that reinforcement is completely
saturated and does not contain pin holes or voids.
5. Once Base Coat is dry install Top Coat at a
coverage rate of 2 gal/100 sf.
31
Detail Drawings
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
3735 Green Road • Beachwood, OH • 44122 • 216-292-5000
50 Beth Nealson Drive • Toronto, ON • M4H 1M6 • 216-292-5000
6881
TGFU.R6692
Roofing Systems
Page Bottom
Roofing Systems
See General Information for Roofing Systems
TREMCO INC R6692 Roofing & Building Maintenance 3735 Green Rd Beachwood, OH 44122 USA
"AlphaGuard Bio Base Coat or "AG Bio Base Coat"/AlphaGuard Bio Top Coat" coating and "AlphaGuard MT Base Coat/AlphaGuard MT Top
Coat" systems are interchangeable in any Certification.
23. Deck: C-15/32 Incline: 1
Existing Roof System: — (To maintain existing Certifications) - Any Class A, B or C, uncoated, insulated or uninsulated, smooth
surfaced BUR or modified bitumen roofing system to retain the existing Certification covered with:
Primer (Optional): — "Single Ply Primer" (not UL Certified), 0.33-gal/100-ft.2. Base Coat: — "AlphaGuard MT Base Coat" or "AlphaGuard MT Top Coat - Winter Grade", applied at 3-gal/100-ft.2. Reinforcement (Optional): — One ply, 0.33-oz/ft.2 "PermaFab Mat" (not UL Certified) or one ply 0.75-oz/ft.2 "AlphaGuard Glass Mat"(not UL Certified). Top Coat: — "AlphaGuard MT Top Coat" or "AlphaGuard MT Top Coat - Winter Grade", applied at 2-gal/100-ft.2.